GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5

Reference Manual

SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E
SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE(V)
MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal
 • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS •
(Always read these instructions before using this equipment.)

Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual
carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly.
The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product. For the safety instructions of the
programmable controller system, please read the CPU module user's manual.
In this manual, the safety instructions are ranked as "DANGER" and "CAUTION".

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

! DANGER resulting in death or severe injury.

Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions,

! CAUTION resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage.

Note that the ! CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances.
Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety.

Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user.

[Test Operation Instructions]

! DANGER
• Before performing test operation (bit device on/off, word device's present value changing,
timer/counter's set value and present value changing, buffer memory's present value changing)
for a user-created monitor screen, system monitoring, special module monitoring or ladder
monitoring, read the manual carefully to fully understand how to operate the equipment.
During test operation, never change the data of the devices which are used to perform
significant operation for the system.
False output or malfunction can cause an accident.

A-1 A-1
 Precautions for using this software (important)
1. Memory of the personal computer used
Processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows 95 operation system, Microsoft Windows 98
R R R R

operation system, Microsoft Windows NT Workstation4.0 operation system,

R R

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating system, Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
R R R R

Operating System on some personal computer models having main memory of not more than 32M bytes.
Therefore, use them after increasing the main memory to 32M bytes or more.
2. Free space on the hard disk
While this software is running, free space of at least 50M byte is required on the hard disk.
Since free space of 50M byte is required by Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT Workstation4.0,
R R R

Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional as the swap area, Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows NT
R R R R R

Workstation4.0, Windows Me, Windows 2000 Professional may forcibly terminate the program if that free
R R

space is used up while the drawing software is running. Produce a sufficient amount of free space on the
hard disk before using the drawing software. If you have to use the drawing software with an amount of free
space that is barely above the requirement, save project data as often as possible.
When GT Simulator is used with GX Developer or GX Simulator, free space is required separately.
Refer to the GX Developer or GX Simulator Operating Manual for the free space required for use of GX
Developer or GX Simulator.
3. Using a spin box in a dialog box
• Do not enter into a spin box a numerical value with a number of digits that drastically exceeds the maximum
number of digits that can be entered into the spin box. Entering a number of digits that drastically exceeds the
maximum allowable number of digits may cause a forcible termination of the program.
• On the [Action] tab selectable from the [Touch key] dialog box, the spin box provided for selecting a key
code does not display the key codes in the order of valid key codes when it displays the key codes for the
special keys used by such functions as the alarm history display, data list display, and alarm list (user
alarm) display. When you keep on clicking the button, therefore, the key codes will not be scrolled forward
or backward in the order of the valid key codes. (Clicking the button when the spin box displays "FFEF", for
example, will not display "FFB0" as the valid key code that comes next in the order.)
To specify such a key code for a special key associated with an object, use the keyboard the type the key
code into the spin box instead of making a selection from the spin box.
4. Operation on a table in a dialog box
To select a line on a table when specifying a object display range, for example, click on any part of the line
except the number display column. Clicking on the number display column on a line does not select the line.
If you clicked on the number display column on a line, that line is displayed in reverse video; click on the
number display column again to resume the display in normal video.
5. Instructions for displaying any line other than a continuous line (such as a dotted line) in boldface type
When any line other than a continuous line is drawn in boldface type, the personal computer screen may not
display the line type properly. However, it is displayed properly on the GOT and there are no problems in data.
6. Measures against the year 2000 (Y2K) problem
The GOT reads and displays the clock information from the PLC. When the GOT is connected to the
Mitsubishi PLC/Mitsubishi motion controller or is used with the A9GT-RS2T, continuous operation or restart
of the GOT will present no problem since the PLC/motion controller/A9GT-RS2T itself will perform 1999-to-
2000 roll-over operation and leap compensation properly. (No measures required) When connected to a
third party PLC, however, the GOT reads and displays the clock data from the third party PLC. Therefore,
contact the corresponding company for the clock data when the GOT is connected to the third party PLC.
7. About the messages displayed at start
"Internal error: null pointer access"
If the above error has appeared, change the setting in the following procedure.
1) Click the "Start" button, point to the [Settings]-[Control Panel] menu, and click.
2) Double-click the "Regional Settings" icon.
3) As the [Regional Settings Property] dialog box appears, choose "English". If the above message appears
with the setting of "English", choose the language other than English and restart the personal computer.
After a start, choose "English" again and restart the personal computer.
"Abnormal termination"
If the above error has appeared, check whether the hard disk has the free capacity of 50MB or more.
8. Printing (file save) on the Windows 2000
R

If save a lot of screen images at a time when performing "Save file" of the print function on the
Windows 2000, the bitmap file may not be saved correctly. In such cases, separate the screen images for
R

each and save it.

A-2 A-2
REVISIONS
* The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Aug., 2000 SH (NA)-080117-A First edition
Oct., 2000 SH (NA)-080117-B Partial corrections
Section 2.1.2
Partial additions
Section 4.5.2, Section 2.2.3, Appendix7
Nov., 2000 SH (NA)-080117-C Partial corrections
Section 7.2.3
Partial additions
Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.2, Section 4.5.2, Section 4.5.3, Section 5.2.1,
Section 5.2.2, Section 5.2.3, Section 5.3.3, Section 5.5, Section 5.6.1,
Section 5.6.2, Section 5.8, Section 7.1.2
Additions
Section 4.1.4, Section 4.1.5, Section 5.8.13, Section 5.8.14
Feb., 2001 SH (NA)-080117-D Partial corrections
Section 2.2.3, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.2,
Section 4.5.2, Section 5.1.4, Section 5.2.2, Section 5.5, Section 5.7,
Section 5.8.1, Section 5.8.5, Section 5.8.6, Section 5.8.7, Section 5.8.8,
Section 5.8.9, Section 5.8.10, Section 5.9.1, Section 6.5.2, Appendix5,
Appendix7
Partial additions
Section 3.2, Section 4.1.4, Section 4.5.3, Section 6.5, Section 6.6,
Section 6.7, Appendix4
Additions
Section 4.1.7
May, 2001 SH (NA)-080117-E Partial corrections
Section 3.2, Section.4.1.1, Section.4.1.2, Section.4.1.7, Section.4.2.2,
Section.4.3.1, Section.4.5.2, Section.4.5.3, Section.5.5.1, Section.5.2.1,
Section.5.3.1, Section.5.3.3, Section.5.5, Section.5.6.1, Section.5.8.1,
Section.5.8.2, Section.5.8.5, Section.5.8.12, Section.5.9.4, Section.6.5.2,
Section.7.1.2, Appendix1, Appendix2, Appendix3, Appendix7
Jun., 2001 SH (NA)-080117-F Partial corrections
Section 4.3.2, Section 5.1.4, Section 5.8.9, Appendix7
Additions
Section 5.9.5
Aug., 2001 SH (NA)-080117-G Partial corrections
Section 2.1.1, Section 2.1.2, Section 2.2.1, Section 2.2.2, Section 2.2.3,
Section 3.2, Section 4.4.2, Section 4.5.2, Section 5.2.1, Section 5.4.6,
Section 5.5, Section 5.8.4, Section 5.8.9, Section 5.9.2, Section 6.5.1,
Appendix6, Appendix 7
May, 2002 SH (NA)-080117-H Partial corrections
Section 2.2.3, Section 3.2, Section 4.1, Section 4.1.2, Section 4.1.4,
Section 4.1.5, Section 4.2.1, Section 4.2.2, Section 4.3.1, Section 4.3.2,
Section 4.5.1, Section 4.5.2, Section 5.1.4, Section 5.2.1, Section 5.2.2,
Section 5.3.3, Section 5.5, Section 5.8.13, Section 5.9.1, Section 5.9.2,
Section 6.5.1, Section 6.5.2, Appendix4, Appendix8
Additions
Appendix7

A-3 A-3
 * The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover.
Print Date * Manual Number Revision
Jul., 2003 SH (NA)-080117-I Partial corrections
Section 2.2.3, Section 3.1, Section 4.4.2, Section 4.5.3, Section 5.1.4,
Section 5.5, Section 5.9.1, Section 5.9.5, Section 7.2.2
Additions
Chapter 1, Appendix 8
Jan., 2004 SH (NA)-080117-J Partial corrections
Section 4.3.2, Section 4.5.1
Jun., 2004 SH (NA)-080117-K Partial corrections
Manuals
MODEL CODE change
Changed from 13JF95 to 1DM186
Oct., 2004 SH (NA)-080117-L Partial corrections
Precautions for using this software (important), Section 4.3.2,
Section 5.8.1, Section 7.1.2, Section 7.2.2, Section 7.2.3, Section 7.5.2
Jan., 2006 SH (NA)-080117-M Partial corrections
Section 4.5.2, Section 5.3.2, Section 5.4.1, Section 5.4.2, Section 5.4.5,
Section 5.8.1, Section 5.8.12, Section 5.9.5, Section 7.2.2
Additions
Section 3.7, Section 4.5.4

Japanese Manual Version SH-080112-N

This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind, nor does it confer any patent
licenses. Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property
rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual.
© 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION

A-4 A-4
 INTRODUCTION

Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal.

Before using the equipment, please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum.

CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...............................................................................................................................A- 1
Precautions for using this software (important)..............................................................................................A- 2
REVISIONS .....................................................................................................................................................A- 3
INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................................A- 5
CONTENTS.....................................................................................................................................................A- 5
About Manuals ................................................................................................................................................A- 9
Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual ...........................................................................................A-10

CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1- 1 to 1- 2

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2- 1 to 2- 5

2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen ............................................................................................ 2- 1

2.1.1 System configuration....................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.1.2 Operation environment.................................................................................................................... 2- 1
2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation............................................................ 2- 2
2.2.1 System configuration....................................................................................................................... 2- 2
2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable ............................................................................................................ 2- 4
2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used) .................................................. 2- 5

CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3- 1 to 3-21

3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools ................................................................................................. 3- 1

3.2 Menu Configuration................................................................................................................................... 3- 7
3.3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box................................................................................................................. 3-11
3.4 Operation of Template ............................................................................................................................. 3-13
3.5 Operation of Tool Palette......................................................................................................................... 3-16
3.6 How to Use Help ...................................................................................................................................... 3-18
3.6.1 Help menu makeup ........................................................................................................................ 3-19
3.6.2 Printing the help screen.................................................................................................................. 3-19
3.7 Contents of Help ...................................................................................................................................... 3-20

CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION 4- 1 to 4-78

4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created................................................................................................... 4- 1

4.1.1 Base screen..................................................................................................................................... 4- 1
4.1.2 Window screen ................................................................................................................................ 4- 2
4.1.3 About the report screen.................................................................................................................. 4-10
4.1.4 Video window.................................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.1.5 RGB screen .................................................................................................................................... 4-21
4.1.6 Video window/RGB screen settings .............................................................................................. 4-23
4.1.7 Wide display screen ....................................................................................................................... 4-25

A-5 A-5
4.2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes............................................................................................. 4-27
4.2.1 Types of drawing figures ................................................................................................................ 4-27
4.2.2 Attribute type for selection.............................................................................................................. 4-29
4.2.3 Figures in bitmap file format........................................................................................................... 4-31
4.2.4 Character size by magnification..................................................................................................... 4-32
4.2.5 Data capacity of each figure........................................................................................................... 4-33
4.3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions ........................................................................ 4-34
4.3.1 Types of and restrictions on object functions for setting ............................................................... 4-34
4.3.2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set .................................................................. 4-37
4.4 Overlap Setting......................................................................................................................................... 4-45
4.4.1 Figure and object............................................................................................................................ 4-45
4.4.2 About overlapping Objects ............................................................................................................. 4-45
4.5 Available Devices..................................................................................................................................... 4-46
4.5.1 Internal devices of GOT ................................................................................................................. 4-46
4.5.2 Device ranges available for the GOT-A900 series........................................................................ 4-53
4.5.3 Device ranges available for the GOT-F900 series........................................................................ 4-69
4.5.4 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT............................................................................... 4-77

CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5- 1 to 5-140

5.1 Data Display Functions ............................................................................................................................. 5- 2

5.1.1 Numerical display function (shows word device data as a numerical value) ................................ 5- 2
5.1.2 Data list display function (lists multiple word device states as numerical values) ........................ 5- 5
5.1.3 ASCII display function (shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character string).. 5- 8
5.1.4 Clock display function (reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU) .............................................. 5-11
5.2 Message Display Functions..................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.2.1 Comment display function
(shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF or value of monitor device) .......................................... 5-14
5.2.2 Alarm history display function
(shows a history of occurrence times, comments and others when a condition is enabled)................ 5-18
5.2.3 Alarm list display function (shows the error information of the system at error occurrence) ....... 5-24
5.3 Animation Display Functions ................................................................................................................... 5-27
5.3.1 Part display function (shows a part/screen corresponding to a device) ....................................... 5-27
5.3.2 Part movement display function (shows the movement of a part corresponding to a device) .... 5-30
5.3.3 Lamp display function (changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value) .......................... 5-33
5.3.4 Panelmeter display function (shows a meter according to a word device value) ........................ 5-36
5.4 Graph Display Functions ......................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.4.1 Trend graph display function (shows a word device value on trend graph)................................. 5-39
5.4.2 Line graph display function (shows word device values on line graph) ....................................... 5-46
5.4.3 Bar graph display function (shows word device values on bar graph) ......................................... 5-51
5.4.4 Statistical graph display function (shows word device values on statistical graph) ..................... 5-54
5.4.5 Scattered chart display function (shows word device values on scattered chart)........................ 5-57
5.4.6 Level display function (shows a word device value as a level)..................................................... 5-63
5.5 Touch Key Functions (When Touched, Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device Value Change
and Screen Switching)............................................................................................................................. 5-66
5.6 Data Input Functions................................................................................................................................ 5-77
5.6.1 Numerical input function (writes any value to device)................................................................... 5-77
5.6.2 ASCII input function (writes any key code to word devices)......................................................... 5-81

A-6 A-6
5.7 Report Function (Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory)................................................... 5-84
5.8 Other Object Functions ............................................................................................................................ 5-88
5.8.1 Hardcopy function (prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file) ................................... 5-88
5.8.2 System information function (confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU) .................. 5-91
5.8.3 Observe status function (writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled) ....... 5-94
5.8.4 Floating alarm function (causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen).............. 5-98
5.8.5 Recipe function (reads/writes values in the specified device range).......................................... 5-100
5.8.6 Sound function (plays a sound on GOT) ..................................................................................... 5-104
5.8.7 Test function (changes the device value of the PLC CPU) ........................................................ 5-106
5.8.8 Barcode function (writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU)...................................... 5-107
5.8.9 Operation panel function (operates GOT externally) .................................................................. 5-108
5.8.10 Time action function (performs specified operation at preset time).......................................... 5-110
5.8.11 Sampling function (reads PLC CPU data under specified condition)....................................... 5-113
5.8.12 Script function (exercises display control under GOT program)............................................... 5-115
5.8.13 Video display function ................................................................................................................ 5-118
5.8.14 RGB screen function .................................................................................................................. 5-119
5.9 Useful Functions .................................................................................................................................... 5-120
5.9.1 Screen call function (reduces project data capacity) .................................................................. 5-120
5.9.2 Security function (limits users) ..................................................................................................... 5-127
5.9.3 Offset function (monitors multiple devices by setting of one device).......................................... 5-131
5.9.4 Expression function (performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT) ............................. 5-133
5.9.5 Station number switching function
(Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number) ................... 5-138

CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT 6- 1 to 6-12

6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time.................................................................................................... 6- 1

6.2 Operations for Drawing Figures................................................................................................................ 6- 2
6.3 Operations for Object Setting ................................................................................................................... 6- 2
6.4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen................................................................................................. 6- 3
6.5 Installation Operations of System Program ............................................................................................. 6- 4
6.5.1 Types of system program installed on GOT................................................................................... 6- 4
6.5.2 Required knowledge before installation of system program.......................................................... 6- 7
6.5.3 Installation of ROM_BIOS............................................................................................................... 6- 9
6.5.4 Installation of OS ............................................................................................................................ 6-10
6.6 Download of Screen Data........................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.7 Debugging of Screen Data ...................................................................................................................... 6-12

CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 7- 1 to 7-28

7.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.1 Features........................................................................................................................................... 7- 1
7.1.2 Operating instructions ..................................................................................................................... 7- 3
7.2 Specifications ............................................................................................................................................ 7- 6
7.2.1 Types ............................................................................................................................................... 7- 6
7.2.2 Control structure .............................................................................................................................. 7- 7
7.2.3 Usable data and representation methods ..................................................................................... 7-10
7.2.4 Script execution .............................................................................................................................. 7-14

A-7 A-7
7.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution..................................................................................................... 7-17
7.4 Program Examples .................................................................................................................................. 7-18
7.4.1 Touch keys with interlock function ................................................................................................. 7-18
7.4.2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions................................................. 7-19
7.4.3 Password input screen with time limit function.............................................................................. 7-21
7.5 Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................................................... 7-23
7.5.1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger ............................................................ 7-23
7.5.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT ........................................................... 7-25

APPENDICES App- 1 to App-33

Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data...............................................................App- 1

Appendix2 Display Speed of Object (Reference Value)............................................................................App- 5
Appendix3 List of Key Code .......................................................................................................................App- 7
Appendix4 Drawing Sheet .........................................................................................................................App-10
Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value).......................................................App-16
Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area
(Memory Map) .........................................................................................................................App-17
Appendix7 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR ...................................................................................App-18
Appendix8 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5
/ GT Designer Version5...........................................................................................................App-21

INDEX Index- 1 to Index- 3

A-8 A-8
About Manuals

The following manuals are relevant to this product.

Refer to the following list and order the required manuals.
• Detailed manuals
Manual name Manual number (Model code)
A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT User’s Manual
Explains the specifications, general system configuration, component devices, part names, option SH-4005
unit loading methods, installation and wiring methods, maintenance and inspection methods, and (1DM099)
error codes of A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT unit. (Available as option)
A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOT User’s Manual
Explains the specifications, general system configuration, component devices, part names, option SH-080018
unit loading methods, installation and wiring methods, maintenance and inspection methods, and (1DM103)
error codes of A950GOT/A951GOT/A953GOT/A956GOT unit. (Available as option)

• Relevant Manual
For relevant manual, refer to the PDF manual stored within the drawing software.

A-9 A-9
Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual
Abbreviations, generic terms and special terms used in this manual are described as
follows:
Abbreviations, generic terms
Description
and special terms
A985GOT-V Generic term of A985GOT-TBA-V and A985GOT-TBD-V
A985GOT Generic term of A985GOT-TBA, A985GOT-TBD and A985GOT-TBA-EU
A975GOT Generic term of A975GOT-TBA-B, A975GOT-TBD-B, A975GOT-TBA, A975GOT-TBD and
A975GOT-TBA-EU
Generic term of A970GOT-TBA-B A970GOT-TBD-B, A970GOT-TBA, A970GOT-TBD,
A970GOT A970GOT-SBA, A970GOT-SBD, A970GOT-LBA, A970GOT-LBD, A970GOT-TBA-EU and
A970GOT-SBA-EU
A97*GOT Generic term of A975GOT and A970GOT
A960GOT Generic term of A960GOT-EBA, A960GOT-EBD and A960GOT-EBA-EU
A956GOT Generic term of A956GOT-TBD, A956GOT-SBD, A956GOT-LBD, A956GOT-TBD-M3,
A956GOT-SBD-M3 and A956GOT-LBD-M3
A956WGOT Generic term of A956WGOT-TBD
A953GOT Generic term of A953GOT-TBD, A953GOT-SBD, A953GOT-LBD, A953GOT-TBD-M3,
A953GOT-SBD-M3 and A953GOT-LBD-M3
A951GOT Generic term of A951GOT-TBD, A951GOT-SBD, A951GOT-LBD, A951GOT-TBD-M3,
A951GOT-SBD-M3 and A951GOT-LBD-M3
GOT A951GOT-Q Generic term of A951GOT-QTBD, A951GOT-QSBD, A951GOT-QLBD, A951GOT-QTBD-M3,
A951GOT-QSBD-M3 and A951GOT-QLBD-M3
A950GOT Generic term of A950GOT-TBD, A950GOT-SBD, A950GOT-LBD, A950GOT-TBD-M3,
A950GOT-SBD-M3 and A950GOT-LBD-M3
A950 handy GOT Generic term of A950GOT-SBD-M3-H, A950GOT-SBD-M3-H, A953GOT-SBD-M3-H and
A953GOT-LBD-M3-H
A95*GOT Generic term of A956GOT, A953GOT, A951GOT, A951GOT-Q, A950GOT and A950 handy
GOT
F940GOT Generic term of F940GOT-SWD-E, F940GOT-LWD-E, ET-940BH(-L) and ET-940PH(-L)
F930GOT Generic term of F930GOT-BWD-E, F930GOT-BBD-K-E
F920GOT Abbreviation of F920GOT-BBD5-K-E
F940 handy GOT Generic term of F940GOT-SBD-H, F940GOT-LBD-H, F943GOT-SBD-H, F943GOT-LBD-H,
F940GOT-SBD-RH, F940GOT-LBD-RH, F943GOT-SBD-RH and F943GOT-LBD-RH
F940WGOT Abbreviation of F940WGOT-TWD
GOT-A900 series Generic term of A985GOT-V, A985GOT, A975GOT, A970GOT, A960GOT, A95*GOT and
GT SoftGOT
GOT-F900 series Generic term of F940GOT, F930GOT, F920GOT, F940 handyGOT and F940WGOT
Communica- Bus connection board Generic term of A9GT-QBUSS, A9GT-QBUS2S, A9GT-BUSS and A9GT-BUS2S
tion board Serial communication board Generic term of A9GT-RS4, A9GT-RS2 and A9GT-RS2T
Bus connection unit Generic term of A9GT-QBUS2SU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A9GT-BUS2SU, A7GT-BUSS and A7GT-
BUS2S
Communica- Data link unit Generic term of A7GT-J71AP23, A7GT-J71AR23 and A7GT-J71AT23B
tion unit
Network unit Generic term of A7GT-J71LP23 and A7GT-J71BR13
CC-Link communication unit Generic term of A8GT-J61BT13 and A8GT-J61BT15
Protection sheet Abbreviation of A9GT-80PSC, A9GT-70PSC, A9GT-60PSC and A9GT-50PSC type
transparent protection sheets
Backlight Abbreviation of A9GT-80LTT, A9GT-70LTTB, A9GT-70LTT, A9GT-70LTS and
A9GT-50LT type backlights
Debug stand Abbreviation of A9GT-80STAND, A9GT-70STAND and A9GT-50STAND type debug stand
PC card ( memory card ) Abbreviation of PC card with PCMCIA Ver.2.1
Flash PC card Generic term of A9GTMEM-10MF, A9GTMEM-20MF and A9GTMEM-40MF
Option Compact flash PC card Compact flash PC card compliant with Compact FlashTM
Memory board Abbreviation of A9GT-FNB, A9GT-FNB1M, A9GT-FNB2M, A9GT-FNB4M, A9GT-FNB8M,
A9GT-QFNB, A9GT-QFNB4M, A9GT-QFNB8M type option function memory board
Attachment Generic term of A77GT-96ATT/A85GT-95ATT/A87GT-96ATT/A87GT-97ATT attachments
Ten-key Panel Abbreviation of A8GT-TK ten-key Panel
A7GT-CNB Abbreviation of A7GT-CNB bus connector conversion box
A9GT-QCNB Abbreviation of A9GT-QCNB bus connector conversion box
External I/O unit Abbreviation of A9GT-70KBF and A8GT-50KBF type external I/O interface unit
Printer interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT-50PRF type printer interface unit
Memory card interface unit Abbreviation of A1SD59J-MIF memory card interface unit
Option unit Video input interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT-80V4 type Video input interface unit
RGB input interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT-80R1 type RGB input interface unit
Video/RGB mixed input Abbreviation of A9GT-80V4R1 type Video/RGB mixed input interface unit
interface unit
GT Works Version 5 Abbreviation of SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package
GT Designer Version 5 Generic term of SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE software package and SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV
Software software package
GT Designer Abbreviation of image creation software GT Designer for GOT900
GT Simulator Abbreviation of GT Simulator screen simulator GOT900

A - 10 A - 10
 Abbreviations, generic terms and special terms Description
GT Converter Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter for GOT900
GT Debugger Abbreviation of debugging software GT Debugger
GT Manager Abbreviation of GT Manager data editing software for GOT900
Software GT SoftGOT Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT monitoring software
GX Developer Generic term of SW D5C-GPPW-E/SW D5F-GPPW-E software packages
GX Simulator Generic term of SW D5C-LLT-E ladder logic test tool function software packages
(SW5D5C-LLT-E or later)
QCPU (Q Mode) Generic term of Q00JCPU, Q00CPU, Q01CPU, Q02CPU, Q02HCPU, Q06HCPU, Q12HCPU,
Q25HCPU, Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU CPU units
QCPU (A Mode) Generic term of Q02CPU-A, Q02HCPU-A and Q06HCPU-A CPU units
QCPU Generic term of QCPU (Q Mode) and QCPU (A Mode)
QnACPU (Large Type) Generic term of Q2ACPU, Q2ACPU-S1, Q3ACPU, Q4ACPU and Q4ARCPU CPU units
QnACPU (Small Type) Generic term of Q2ASCPU, Q2ASCPU-S1, Q2ASHCPU and Q2ASHCPU-S1 CPU units
QnACPU Generic term of QnACPU (Large Type) and QnACPU (Small Type)
AnUCPU Generic term of A2UCPU, A2UCPU-S1, A3UCPU and A4UCPU CPU units
AnACPU Generic term of A2ACPU, A2ACPU-S1 and A3ACPU CPU units
AnNCPU Generic term of A1NCPU, A2NCPU, A2NCPU-S1 and A3NCPU CPU units
ACPU (Large Type) Generic term of AnUCPU, AnACPU and AnNCPU CPU units
CPU A2US(H)CPU Generic term of A2USCPU, A2USCPU-S1 and A2USHCPU-S1 CPU units
AnS(H)CPU Generic term of A1SCPU, A1SHCPU, A2SCPU and A2SHCPU CPU units
A1SJ(H)CPU Generic term of A1SJCPU-S3 and A1SJHCPU CPU units
ACPU (Small Type) Generic term of A2US(H)CPU, AnS(H)CPU and A1SJ(H)CPU CPU units
ACPU Generic term of ACPU (Large Type), ACPU (Small Type) and A1FXCPU CPU units
Generic term of FX0 series, FX0N series, FX0S series, FX1 series, FX1N series, FX1S series,
FXCPU FX2 series , FX2C series, FX2N series, FX1NS series, FX2NC series, FX(2N)-10GM/20GM
series CPU unit
Motion controller CPU Generic term of A273UCPU, A273UHCPU, A273UHCPU-S3, A171SCPU-S3, A171SHCPU,
A172SHCPU, Q172CPU, Q173CPU CPU unit
FA controller Generic term of LM610, LM7600, LM8000 CPU unit
Inverter Generic term of FREQROL series (A500 Series, E500 Series, F500 Series)
Peripheral
connection unit G4 Abbreviation of AJ65BT-G4-S3

E71 Generic term of AJ71E71-S3, A1SJ71E71-B2-S3, A1SJ71E71-B5-S3, AJ71E71N-B2,

AJ71E71N-B5T, A1SJ71E71N-B2 and A1SJ71E71N-B5T
Ethernet unit QE71 Generic term of AJ71QE71, A1SJ71QE71-B2, AJ71QE71-B5, A1SJ71QE71-B5,
AJ71QE71N-B2, AJ71QE71N-B5T, A1SJ71QE71N-B2 and A1SJ71QE71N-B5T
Q series-compatible E71 Generic term of QJ71E71, QJ71E71-B2 and QJ71E71-100
Omron PLC Generic term of C200HS, C200H, C200H series(C200HX, C200HG, C200HE), CQM1,
C1000H,C2000H,CV500, CV1000, CV2000, CVM1-CPU11, CVM1-CPU21, CS1, CJ1 CPU unit
Yasukawa PLC Generic term of GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120, GL130, CP-9200SH, CP-9300MS, MP-920,
MP-930, MP-940, CP-9200(H) and PROGIC-8 CPU unit
SLC500 Series Generic term of SLC500-20, SLC500-30, SLC500-40, SLC5/01 SLC5/02, SLC5/03, SLC5/04 SLC5/05
Generic term of 1761-L10BWA, 1761-L10BWB, 1761-L16AWA, 1761-L16BWA, 1761-
MicroLogix1000 Series L16BWB, 1761-L16BBB, 1761-L32AWA, 1761-L32BWA, 1761-L32BWB, 1761-L32BBB,
1761-L32AAA, 1761-L20AWA-5A, 1761-L20BWA-5A, 1761-L20BWB-5A
MicroLogix1500 Series Abbreviation of 1764-LSP
Allen-Bradley PLC Generic term of SLC 500 Series, MicroLogix1000 Series, MicroLogix1200 Series, MicroLogix1500 Series
Sharp PLC Generic term of JW-21CU, JW-22CU, JW-31CUH, JW-32CUH, JW-33CUH, JW-50CUH,
JW-70CUH, JW-100CUH CPU unit
PROSEC T Series Generic term of T2 (PU224 type), T2E, T2N, T3, T3H CPU unit
Other PLC
PROSEC V Series Abbreviation of Model3000 (S3) CPU unit
Toshiba PLC Generic term of PROSEC T Series and PROSEC V Series
SIEMENS PLC Generic term of SIMATIC S7-200 Series, SIMATIC S7-300 Series and SIMATIC S7-400 Series CPU unit
Large type H series Generic term of H-302(CPU2-03H), H-702(CPU2-07H), H-1002(CPU2-10H), H-2002(CPU2-
20H), H-4010(CPU3-40H),.J-300(CPU-03Ha), H-700(CPU-07Ha), H-2000(CPU-20Ha)
H200 to 252 Series Generic term of H-200(CPU-02H, CPE-02H), H-250(CPU21-02H), H-252(CPU22-02H), H-
252B(CPU22-02HB), H-252C(CPU22-02HC, CPE22-02HC)
H Series board type Generic term of H-20DR, H-28DR, H-40DR, H-64DR, H-20DT, H-28DT, H-40DT, H-64DT,
HL-40DR, HL-64DR
EH-150 Series Generic term of EH-CPU104, EH-CPU208, EH-CPU308, EH-CPU316
HITACHI PLC (HIDIC H Series) Generic term of large type H series,H-200 to 252 Series H Series board type, EH-150 Series
Matsushita Electric Works Generic term of FP0-C16CT, FP0-C32CT, FP1-C24C, FP1-C40C, FP2, FP2SH, FP2-CCU,
PLC FP3, FP5, FP10(S), FP10SH, FP-M(C20TC) and FP-M(C32TC)
Memory abbreviation of memory (flash memory) in the GOT
OS Abbreviation of GOT system software
Others Object Setting data for dynamic image
Personal Computer Personal computer where the corresponding software package is installed
Servo amplifier Generic term of MR-J2S- A, MR-J2S- CP and MR-J2M A series
In this manual, the following products are called by new names.
Old Name New Name Remarks
GPPW GX Developer Generic term of SW D5C-GPPW-E/SW D5F-GPPW-E software packages

A - 11 A - 11
 1 OVERVIEW
MELSOFT

CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW
1 This manual describes the system configuration, screen makeup, basic dialog box
operation methods, specifications, help using methods, functions and others of the
following products used with the GOT900 series.

• SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E software package

• SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE software package
• SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV software package
Exclusive updating products which can be utilized by those who use the previous
products.

In this manual, the above products are abbreviated to the following.

SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E ...........................................................GT Works Version5
SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE/SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKEV.............GT Designer Version5

POINT
• This manual describes only the basic operation methods, specifications and
functions.
Refer to the help of the corresponding software package for information on
setting details and operation methods (e.g. figure drawing for monitor screen
creation, object function setting operation, data transfer to the GOT).
Refer to Chapter 5 for how to use help.
• GT Works Version5 and GT Designer Version5 do not support the functions
added to GT Designer2.
When it is desired to use the functions added to GT Designer2, consider using
GT Designer2.

1-1 1-1
1 OVERVIEW
MELSOFT

MEMO
1

1-2 1-2
 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT

CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

2.1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen

2.1.1 System configuration

GT Works Version5
GT Designer Version5

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

2.1.2 Operation environment

Item Description
Pentium R
133MHz or higher (Pentium II R
266MHz or higher recommended)
Personal computer on which Microsoft R
Windows R
95 operating system, Microsoft R

Body Windows R
98 operating system, Microsoft R
WindowsNT R
Workstation 4.0 operating
system operates, Microsoft R
Windows R
Millennium Edition Operating System or
Microsoft R
Windows R
2000 Professional Operating System.
Disk drive CD-ROM drive is mandatory.
Main memory 32 Mbyte (64 Mbyte or more is recommended.)
At the time of complete installation
Hard disk space When installed : 80M bytes or more
When operating : 50M bytes or more
Compatible with Windows R
95, Windows R
98, WindowsNT R
4.0, Windows R
Me,
CRT
Windows R
2000 Professional
Display colors 256 colors
Resolution Resolution of 800 × 600 dots or more
Mouse, keyboard, printer, Compatible with Microsoft R
Windows R
95, Windows R
98, WindowsNT R
4.0, Windows R

CD-ROM drive Me, Windows R

2000 Professional

POINT
Depending on the language of your Operating System, this software may not start.
In such a case, start this software after setting the Regional Settings within Control
Panel of Windows 95, Windows 98, WindowsNT 4.0 to "English".
R R R

2-1 2-1
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT

2.2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation

2.2.1 System configuration

(1) When the GOT-A900 is used

2
1

RS-232C cable GOT-A900 Series

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

2
OS program and monitoring screen data
can be transferred (written) on the
PC card.

PC card with PCMCIA

Ver. 2.1

GT Works Version5
GT Designer Version5

Printer cable Windows R compatible printer

1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

2: Refer to Item 2.2.3 for available PC cards.

2-2 2-2
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

RS-232C cable GOT-F900 series

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible

Printer cable Windows R compatible printer

GT Works Version5
GT Designer Version5

1: Refer to Item 2.2.2 for wiring diagram of RS-232C.

2-3 2-3
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT

2.2.2 Compatible RS-232C cable

The cable in the wiring diagram below or the cable type below is required.

POINT
When the cable is self-made for the GOT-A900 series/GOT-F900 series, either of
the following wiring diagrams (1) and (2) may be used.
However, if the F940GOT/F930GOT is connected to the A series CPU or the FX
series CPU with RS422 to use the PLC CPU and the GOT with the FX-2PIF at the
same time, use the F2-232CAB-1 connection cable.

(1) Wiring diagram of AC30R2-9SS

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible GOT
RXD 2 2 RXD
TXD 3 3 TXD
RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
SG 5 5 SG
DTR 4 4 DTR
Shield

(2) Wiring diagram of FX-232CAB-1

IBM PC/AT or 100% compatible GOT
RXD 2 2 RXD
TXD 3 3 TXD
RTS 7 7 RTS
CTS 8 8 CTS
DSR 6 6 DSR
SG 5 5 SG
DTR 4 4 DTR
Shield

Use the screw-in type connector (inch) for the GOT side.
AC30R2-9SS
IBM PC/AT FX-232CAB-1
or GOT
100% compatible

Manufacturer Type
AC30R2-9SS (9pin-9pin)
Mitsubishi Electric
FX-232CAB-1 (9pin-9pin)

If the following cable is used, 9-25 pin converter is required.

Manufacturer Type
AC30R2-9P (9pin-25pin)
Mitsubishi Electric
F2-232CAB-1 (9pin-25pin)

2-4 2-4
2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
MELSOFT

2.2.3 Compatible PC card (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

(1) About compatible PC card types

For the PC cards available for the GOT, refer to the User's Manual supplied with
the GOT unit.
(2) About PC card formatting
Use the PC card after formatting.
It may be formatted in either of the following ways.
(a) Using the personal computer (SRAM type, flash PC card)
Format the PC card on the personal computer that satisfies the following
conditions.
1) The PCMCIA card slot is provided.
2) Windows 95, Windows 98, Windows Me or Windows 2000 has been
R R R R

installed.
(Note that Windows NT 4.0 cannot format the PC card.)
R

POINT
• The PC card used with the GOT should be formatted in either of the following
systems.
• SRAM type PC card : FAT16
• Flash PC card : FAT16, FAT32
• To make the SRAM type PC card recognized by Windows 95 or Windows 98,
R R

config.sys must be added to the description.

For details, enter "SRAM" and keyword in Help of Windows 95 or Windows 98,
R R

and refer to the contents.

(b) Using the self-diagnostics (memory card check) of the utility
menu
This method is valid for the SRAM type PC card only.
This method is fewer in the number of object files that may be saved than
the method using the personal computer.
For details of the utility menu, refer to the GOT-A900 Series Operating
Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible Extended •
Option Functions).
(3) About the number of files that may be saved
There are the following upper limits to the number of object files that may be
saved according to the memory capacity of the PC card.
Number of Files
Memory Capacity of PC
Card Total of recipe, alarm history and Total of all files 1
report files
1M Max. 2025 files
(512 bytes/file)
Max. 128 files
2M Max. 4075 files
(512 bytes/file)
4M Max. 256 files Max. 2041 files
(2048 bytes/file)
16M (A9GTMEM-10MF) Max. 2541 files
(4096 bytes/file)
32M (A9GTMEM-20MF) Max. 9740 files
Max. 512 files (2048 bytes/file)
48M (A9GTMEM-40MF) Max. 19497 files
(2048 bytes/file)
1: Indicates the maximum number of files that can be stored when the file size is as
indicated in the parentheses.
For example, when data of 3072 bytes is written to the above 4M PC card, the data
occupies two files and are stored there since the data exceeds the parenthesized
value (2048).
As a result, the remaining number of files where data can be written is 2039.

2-5 2-5
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER

3.1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools

This section describes screen configuration and various tools.

(1) Title bar (2) Menu bar

(12) Help

(4) Toolbar (Main)

(5) Toolbar (View)

3
(6) Toolbar
(Figure . Object)

(7) Toolbar (Edit)

(1) Title bar

(10) Template

(11) Tool palette

(8) Toolbar (Draw)

(9) Status bar

(3) Drop-down menu

3-1 3-1
 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(1) Title bar

The screen title is displayed.
Move the cursor to the title bar. You can drag the screen to the desired position.
The GT Designer has the application window title bar and the screen title bar.
The title is displayed. The screen enlarges or shrinks.

The screen size can be changed or the The screen can be minimized.
screen can be closed.
Click here to close
3 the screen.

(2) Menu bar

Menu names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed.
Select a menu and a dropdown menu appears. Then, various functions can be
selected from this menu.

(3) Dropdown menu

Function names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed.
If " " is displayed at the right end of the dropdown menu, subsequent dropdown
menu of the function is displayed.
If "..." is displayed on the function name, move the cursor to the function and click
it. The set dialog box appears.
Dropdown menu
is displayed.

Select this and the

dialog box appears.

3-2 3-2
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(4) Toolbar (Main)

This is where the basic items assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons. Move
the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20)

Names of tool buttons

1) New project 11) Switching edit screen
2) Open project 12) Open and display closed screen (for
3) Save project switching edit screen)
4) New screen 13) Object list screen display
5) Load screen 14) Device list screen display
6) Save screen 15) Comment edit
7) Cut 16) Tool palette display
8) Copy 17) Template display
9) Paste 18) Panelkit display
10) Preview 19) Figure and object editing cursor
20) Template placing cursor

(5) Toolbar (View)

This is where the items (moving distance, pattern, etc.) assigned on the menu
bar appear as buttons.
Moving the cursor onto " " and clicking it opens the drop-down menu of the
corresponding item.
Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the
corresponding function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)

1) Setting cursor moving distance 6) Setting screen display data (object

2) Enlarging screen ID, device)
3) Setting grid color 7) Setting screen color
4) Grid distance 8) Setting screen pattern
5) Switching ON/OFF object functions 9) Setting screen background
10) Switching screen-drawn target
(GOT-F900 series only)

3-3 3-3
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

POINT
When a pattern is set to the background of the screen using "Pattern (8))", the set
pattern is not deleted completely if "Pattern (8))" is set to "No" again.
The outer frame of the screen is displayed in the color set to Color (7)).
(The outer frame is not displayed when Color (7)) is set to Black (0).)
When it is desired to delete the pattern settings, display the [Screen Auxiliary
Setting] dialog box of the screen where the pattern has been set, and remove the
checkmark in the "Sheet color" checkbox.

Screen Auxiliary Setting Dialog Box

The details of the "Screen Auxiliary Setting" dialog box settings and operation
information can be browsed by choosing the following Help items.
(1) Choose [Help] - [Object setting].
(2) Choose "Operations after making screen" "Defining the input processing
specifications for each screen" in the Help contents.

(6) Toolbar (Figure • Object)

This is where the figure/object setting items laid out in the tool palette appear as
buttons.
Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding
function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22) 23) 24) 25) 26) 27) 28) 29) 30)

Names of tool buttons

1) Line 16) Clock display function
2) Line freedom 17) Comment display function
3) Rectangle 18) Alarm history display function
4) Polygon 19) Alarm list display function
5) Circle 20) Part display function
6) Arc 21) Part movement display function
7) Sector 22) Lamp display function
8) Scale 23) Panel meter display function
9) Text 24) Line/trend/bar graph display function
10) Paint 25) Statistics graph display function
11) Insert BMP format file 26) Scatter chart display function
12) Insert DXF format file 27) Level display function
13) Numerical display function 28) Touch key function
14) Data list display function 29) Numerical input function
15) ASCII display function 30) ASCII input function

3-4 3-4
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(7) Toolbar (Edit)

This is where the figure editing items assigned on the menu bar appear as
buttons.
Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding
function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19)

Names of tool buttons

1) Bring to front 11) Selection target (object)
2) Send to back 12) Selection target (figure+object)
3) Grouping 13) Selection target (report line)
4) Canceling grouping 14) Report figure (line)
5) Horizontal flip 15) Report figure (text)
6) Vertical flip 16) Report print object (numerical)
7) 90° counterclockwise 17) Report print object (comment)
8) Edit vertex 18) Setting report header line
9) Align 19) Setting report repeat line
10) Selection target (figure)

(8) Toolbar (Draw)

This is where the items (line style, pattern, text style, etc.) laid out in the tool
palette appear as lists.
Moving the cursor " " onto any button and clicking it opens the drop-down menu
of the corresponding item.
Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the
corresponding function.
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9)

1) Set/change of line style 6) Set/change of painting background

2) Set/change of line width color
3) Set/change of line color 7) Set/change of character color
4) Set/change of painting pattern 8) Set/change of character decoration
5) Set/change of painting color 9) Set/change of character shade color

(9) Status bar

This is where the current operation status and cursor coordinates are displayed.

Current operation status is displayed. Cursor coordinates

are displayed.

(10) Template
This is provided to register and read the panelkit and parts easily.
Refer to Section 3.4 for details.

3-5 3-5
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(11) Tool palette

This is where the buttons for setting figures, objects and so on are displayed.
Refer to Section 3.5 for details.

(12) Help
This is where how to operate GT Designer, how to create/edit the GOT screen
data, and other information are shown.
Refer to Section 3.6 for details.

3-6 3-6
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.2 Menu Configuration

This section describes the command list allocated on the menu bar and explains the
details.

(1) GT Designer
Project New New project data is created.
Open Existing file is read.
Close Editing file is closed.
Save Editing file is saved with project data.
Save as Editing file is saved as different name and editing continues.
Import File
Project Other project data is used for the project data in editing.
Bitmap BMP format figure data is pasted on the screen.
Dxf DXF format figure data is pasted on the screen.
GPP Comment GX Developer device comment file to be read into the GT Designer is specified.
Print Setting data and screen image is output to printer and files.
Option Operation, display and communication environments are set.
Exit GT Designer is ended.

Edit Undo The last operation for the data is cancelled and the previous data is maintained.
Cut Figures and objects are cut and stored in the clipboard.
Copy Selected figures, characters and objects are stored in the clipboard.
Paste Figures and objects stored in the clipboard are pasted.
Consecutive Copy Selected figures and objects are copied and pasted on the multiple editing screen.
Delete Selected figures and objects are deleted.
Edit Vertex Length of continuous line or lines designated by polygon is changed.
Object of Selection
Figure Only figures are edited.
Object Only objects are edited.
Figure and Object Figures and objects are edited.
Report line Report lines are edited.
Select All All figures and objects are selected.
Group
Group Selected figures and objects are grouped.
Switch group Grouping of selected objects as a single object.
Ungroup Grouping of selected figures and objects is canceled.
Rotate/Flip
Flip Vertical Selected figures are flipped vertically.
Flip Horizontal Selected figures are flipped horizontally.
Rotate Left Selected figures are rotated to the left by 90°.
Align Selected figures and objects are aligned.
Stacking Order
Bring to Front Selected figures and objects are brought to front.
Send to Back Selected figures and objects are sent to back.
Attribute Attributes of selected figures and objects are changed.
Replace Devics The set monitoring devices are replaced with other devices.
Replace Overlap Screen Overlap screen numbers are batch-changed.

View Preview Screen details are displayed in monitoring image.

ON Image Screen details are displayed in ON.
Redisplay Editing screen is re-displayed.
Color Setting 16 colors that are displayed on the color list are selected.
Device List
Screen Displays the device list used for each screen.
Project Displays the device list used for each project.
Object List Object list set in the screen is displayed.
Overlap Screen Overlap screens are displayed hierarchically.
Option Operation, display and communication environments are set.

3-7 3-7
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

Draw Panelkit Reads, registers and deletes the panel kit.

Part Registers the part for the part display function and the part movement function.
Comment Registers the comment for the comment display function, the alarm list display function
and the alarm history display function.
Draw Figure
Line Draws linear line.
Line Freeform Draws a continuous linear line.
Rectangle Draws a rectangle.
Polygon Draws a polygon.
Circle Draws a circle.
Arc/Sector Draws an arc/sector.
Scale Draws graduation.
Text Inputs characters.
Paint Paints a polygon or a closed area with selected pattern.
Data Display
Numerical Display Sets the numerical display function.
Data List Sets the data list display function.
Ascii Display Sets the ASCII display function.
Clock Sets the clock display function.
Message Display
Comment Sets the comment display function.
Alarm History Sets the alarm history display function.
Alarm List Sets the alarm list display function.
Animation Display
Part Display Sets the part display function.
Part Movement Sets the part movement function.
Part Move Route Sets the part movement route.
Lamp Sets the lamp display function.
Panelmeter Sets the panel meter function.
Graph
Trend/Line/Bar Sets the trend graph display function, the line graph display function and the bar graph
display function.
Statistics Sets the statistical graph function.
Scatter chart Sets the scatter chart display function.
Level Sets the level function.
Touch Key Sets the touch key function.
Data Input
Numerical Input Sets the numerical input function.
Ascii Input Sets the ASCII input function.
Overlap Screen Sets the overlap screen function.
Window Position
Overlap Window 1 Sets the window screen position for overlap window 1.
Overlap Window 2 Sets the window screen position for overlap window 2.
Superimpose Window Sets the window screen position for superimpose window.
Key Window Sets the key window position.
Key Window Custom
Input Value Area Sets the input value display area in the key window.
Input Range Area Sets the input range display area in the key window.

Report Common Makes settings for the whole report function.

Parameter Sets the parameters of each report screen.
Print Object
Number Sets the value to be printed.
Comment Sets the comment to be printed.
Line Draws the rules (rectangle).
Text Enters characters.
Header/Continue Specifies the header and repeated lines.

3-8 3-8
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

Communi- Download (to GOT)

cation Monitor Data Downloads the created monitoring screen data to the GOT or the PC card.
Special Function/ Downloads the special Function monitoring data/Motion Monitor data/
Motion/Servo Servo amplifier data to the GOT or the PC card.
amplifier Monitor Data
Upload (from GOT) Uploads the monitoring data stored in the GOT.
Install
OS Installs the OS on the GOT or the PC card.
ROM_BIOS Installs the ROM_BIOS on the GOT or the PC card.
Memory Displays or clears the memory.
Data Check Checks the number of monitoring data.
Option Operation, display and communication environments are set.
Common Title
Screen Sets the titles and details for each base screen, window screen and report screen.
Project Registers the title and the ID number of the project data.
Switching Screen Sets the base/window screen switching device.
Switching Station No. Sets the station No. switching device.
Ethernet Sets the monitor destination for Ethernet connection.
Gateway
Server Sets the server function.
Client Sets the client function.
Mail Sets the mail send function.
FTP Server Sets the FTP server function.
Password Sets the security function (password, etc.).
Hardcopy Sets the hard copy function.
Operation Panel Sets the operation panel function.
Barcode Sets the bar code function.
Sampling Sets the sampling function.
System Information Sets the device to check the GOT operation status on the PLC CPU.
Time action Sets the time action function.
Observe Status Sets the status monitoring function.
Alarm History Sets the alarm history function in common with projects.
Floating Alarm Sets the alarm flow Alarm.
Recipe Sets the recipe function in common with projects.
Print Format Sets the print format used on the alarm history display function.
Sound Sets the voice file (WAV format).
GOT/PC Type Sets the GOT type for the created screen data and the PC type for connection.
Script
Project script setting Make project-based script setting.
Screen script setting Make screen-based script setting.
Key Window Screen No. Sets the screen used as a key window.
Auxiliary Setting
Screen Performs auxiliary setting for each screen.
Project Performs auxiliary setting for each project.
Update Script data Updates the script data read to GT Designer to the latest script data.
Screen New Screen New screen is created.
Load Designated screen is opened.
Clear Designated screen is closed.
Clear and Load Editing screen is closed and another screen is opened.
Store Editing screen is saved and editing continues.
Store As Editing screen No. is changed.
Screen Utilize/Delete Screen data is utilized/deleted in the editing project.
Change Size Editing screen size is changed.
Cascade The current screens are displayed in cascade.
Tile The current screens are displayed in tile.

Help Update Help which allows you to browse the updated additional function list.
Firstly Fist operation help learned in the step of GT Designer.
Figure Operation help for drawing figures.
Object Operation help for setting objects.
Transfer/Print Operation help for data transmission and printing.
About Version of installed GT Designer is displayed.

3-9 3-9
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(2) GT Converter
Project Open Designates the monitor screen data for GOT800 to be converted.
Option
Conversion setting Set conversion options for converting Digital's package data into
GOT900 series data.
Folder of GT Designer Designates the folder having the execution file of the GT Designer
to be started.
Execute GT Designer Starts the GT Designer.
Exit Ends the data GT Converter.
Start Conversion Executes the conversion of the monitor screen data for GOT900.
Screen Log display Displays the result of conversion to the monitor screen data for GOT900.
Help Help topics Operation help for the GT Converter.
About Displays the software version of the installed GT Converter.

(3) GT Debugger
File Open Opens the debugging file.
Close Closes the debugging file.
Save Saves the debugging file.
Save As Saves the current debugging file and editing continues.
Exit Ends the GT Debugger.

Communication Start Starts communication with the GOT.

End Ends communication with the GOT.

Setting Registration Device Registers device for debugging.

Delete Device Deletes registered device from device registration.
Option Sets the communication port and the communication speed.

Help Reference topics Operation help for GT Debugger.

About Displays software version of installed GT Debugger.

(4) GT Manager
Project Execute Starts GT Designer.
Renumber Changes the drawing data screen number.
Delete .Deletes the drawing data.
Exit Ends the GT Manager.

Edit Cut Cuts the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard.
Copy Copies the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard.
Paste Pastes the drawing data stored in the clipboard.

Help Reference topics Operation help of GT Manager.

About Displays software version of installed GT Manager.

3 - 10 3 - 10
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box

(1) Tab

(2) Command button

(3) List box

(4) Check box

(5) Radio button

(6) Text box

(7) Spin box

3 - 11 3 - 11
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(1) Tab
To change the tab, click ( ) where the setting item is displayed.

(2) Command button

OK or Cancel is available for the command button. Click the appropriate
button for execution.

(3) List box

Click to display the list for selection and click the desired item.

(4) Check box

To execute the item, click to put mark.

(5) Radio button

Click for the desired item.

(6) Text box

Input characters from the keyboard.

(7) Spin box

There are two cases; one is direct input of the value and the other is changing
the value by clicking . To input the value directly, click the spin box and
input the value from the keyboard.
To change the value by clicking , click and the value increases. Click
and the value decreases.

3 - 12 3 - 12
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.4 Operation of Template

POINT
In the template function, Mitsubishi Electric Corp. owns the copyright for design
of all parts, including 256 color BMP parts provided with the GT Designer.
Use of these parts is strictly prohibited for the purpose other than the GOT.

In the template function, figures or objects can be easily registered or pasted on the
screen as parts (panelkit, parts).
A template has parts display area and tree display area.

(1) Parts/tree display area

(a) Parts display area
This displays parts (panelkit, parts) in the library registered in each folder
(parts library, panelkit, parts).
1) 3) 4) 5)

2) 6)

7)

8)

1) Displays the library name.

2) Click this to display or not display the panelkit name and the parts name.
3) Click this to delete the selected panelkit or parts.
4) Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected
panelkit or parts.
5) Select the figure or the object on the screen, and click it. It is then
registered in the library as a panelkit or part.
6) Click this and the tree display area of the template appears.
7) Panelkit or parts are displayed.
8) Panelkit name or parts names are displayed.

POINTS
• Panelkit in the part library folder cannot be deleted and their attributes cannot
be changed.
• Panelkit cannot be registered in the part library folder.

3 - 13 3 - 13
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(b) Tree display area

The library where the panelkit or parts on the parts display area is
registered is displayed.
1) 2) 3)

4)
5)

7)

6)

8)

1) Click this to create the library of the panelkit folder.

Up to 50 libraries can be created.
2) Click this to delete the library of the selected panelkit folder.
3) Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected
panelkit folder library.
4) Parts (not changed by user) provided by the GT Designer are registered.
Some parts in the parts library folder show objects and others show
figures only. Reading and pasting of these parts allow easy setting of
lamp figure or switch figure.
5) Figures and objects drawn by a user can be registered as panelkit.
6) A figure registered by a user can be registered as a part.
Parts registered in this step are used in the parts display function and
the parts movement function.
7) Displays the library.
8) Click this to close the tree display area.

POINT
Only the panelkit folder library is used for creation, deletion and change of
attribute.

3 - 14 3 - 14
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(2) Pasting method of parts

1) Bring up the tree display area and double
click the name where the panelkit or parts for
pasting is registered.

2) Click the desired panelkit or part on the parts

display area.

3) Move the cursor to the position of pasting and

click the mouse. The part is then pasted.

4) Perform either of the following operations:

<Continue pasting>
1) Hold down the [Ctrl] key and press the [C] key
( Ctrl C ).
2) Holding down the [Ctrl] key and pressing the
[V] key pastes the part ( Ctrl V ). Drag
and move it to the pasting position.
You can continue pasting by repeating the
operations in step 2) and later.
<Change the attribute>
Right-click and click the [Attribute] menu.

3 - 15 3 - 15
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.5 Operation of Tool Palette

Click each button to draw figures or to set objects.

Line attributes or figure painting pattern can be selected from the list box.

(Tool palette for GOT-A900 series) (Tool palette for GOT-F900 series)

(1) Cursor button

1) 2) 3) 4)

1) Panelkit 3) Cursor for placing template

2) Cursor for editing figure and object 4) Cursor for editing report range

(2) Figure drawing button

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10) 11) 12) 13) 14)

1) Line 8) Scale
2) Line Freeform 9) Text
3) Rectangle 10) Paint
4) Polygon 11) Report figure (line)
5) Circle 12) Report figure (text)
6) Arc 13) Insert BMP format file
7) Sector 14) Insert DXF format file

3 - 16 3 - 16
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(3) Object setting button

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) 10)

11) 12) 13) 14) 15) 16) 17) 18) 19) 20) 21) 22)

1) Numerical display function 12) Trend/Line/Bar graph display

2) Data list display function function
3) ASCII display function 13) Statistics graph display function
4) Clock display function 14) Scatter chart display function
5) Comment display function 15) Level display function
6) Alarm history display function 16) Touch key function
7) Alarm list display function 17) Numerical input function
8) Part display function 18) ASCII input function
9) Part movement display function 19) Print object (numerical) function
10) Lamp display function 20) Print object (comment) function
11) Panelmeter display function 21) Setting report header line
22) Setting report repeat line

(4) Attribute setting list box

1) 2) 3)

4) 5) 6)

7) 8) 9)

1) Set/change of line style 6) Set/change of painting background

2) Set/change of line width color
3) Set/change of line color 7) Set/change of character color
4) Set/change of painting pattern 8) Set/change of character decoration
5) Set/change of painting color 9) Set/change of character shade
color

3 - 17 3 - 17
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.6 How to Use Help

Help is installed together with the corresponding software of GT Designer Version5.

Help includes not only how to operate the corresponding software but also GOT
screen data creating/editing methods and other information.

Example: When checking the [Numeral] item of the Numerical Display dialog box
(Basic tab setting)
<GT Designer setting dialog box>

Check
[Numeral] item.

1) Enter keyword.

Explanation of "Numeral" item in setting item

list appears.

2) Choose display item from Topics Found.

3) If there are multiple [Numeral] items in
Topics Found, those multiple candidates
appear.
Here, choose "Numeral" in
[Numerical Display] dialog box.

4) Display

3 - 18 3 - 18
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.6.1 Help menu makeup

The help menu is made up as described below.

(1) GT Designer help

Update..................................Lists the additional functions made available by
updating GT Designer to Version5.
Firstly....................................Describes the screen and project operations and
common setting items.
Figure ...................................Describes figure drawing and editing operations.
Object ...................................Describes object setting and editing operations.
Transfer/Print .......................Describes information required for data transfer and
download/upload operations.
About ....................................Describes the version information of GT Designer.

(2) GT Converter/GT Debugger/GT Manager help

Reference topics ..................Describes operations for GT Converter/GT
Debugger/GT Manager.
About ....................................Describes the version information of GT
Converter/GT Debugger/GT Manager.

3.6.2 Printing the help screen

(1) Printing from the contents
Click or of the item to be printed to make selection, and click the Print
button.

(2) Printing the current topic

Click the Print button.

3 - 19 3 - 19
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

3.7 Contents of Help

Some items are changed or added in Help as described below.

Check the details below before using GT Designer.

(1) Change of described contents

The described contents of the recipe function and hard copy function are
changed as shown below.

Function Before change After change

Recipe function When multiple recipe functions have been set and the The restriction shown left is not applied.
operation of the recipe function having the specified
file register name is being performed (access to the
CPU file register is being made), the operation of
another recipe function is not started if its trigger
device turns on/off.
Hard copy function Be sure to turn on bit devices specified as start and Be sure to turn on/off bit devices specified
abort triggers for 2 seconds or more. as start and abort triggers for the period
set at Trigger Watch Cycle or more.

3 - 20 3 - 20
3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER
MELSOFT

(2) Addition of description

The following descriptions regarding the cursor move setting in [Auxiliary Setting]
are added.
(a) When the cursor is not moved as designed
The following diagram shows the example of which the cursor is moved to
the opposite position with the cursor direction of the touched arrow key.
When changing the setting of [Position to specify area] from [Top-Left] to
[Bottom-Right], the cursor is enabled to move the same cursor direction as
the direction of the touched arrow key.

(Before setting change) (After setting change)

[Position to specify area] [Position to specify area]

1) 012345 3) 012345

2) 0123456 2) 0123456

3) 01234567 1) 01234567
Actual specified Touched button Actual specified Touched button
direction of cursor direction of cursor

The cursor is moved in the order, 3) 2) 1). The cursor is moved in the order, 1) 2) 3).

As the bottom-right parts of three objects

As the top-left parts of three objects are not
are on the same x-coordinate, the cursor is
on the same x-coordinate, the cursor is
moved to the same direction as the arrow
moved to the closest object on the left when
key when changing [Position to specify area]
operating to move the cursor to top direction.
from [Top-Left] to [Bottom-Right].

(b) When the cursor is not moved as designed even if changing

the setting of above (a)
Readjust the arrangement of the objects as follows.

(Before setting change) (After setting change)

[Position to specify area] [Position to specify area]

1) 012345 3) 012345

2) 012345 2) 012345

3) 012345 Touched button 1) 012345 Touched button

The cursor is moved in the order, 1) 3) 2). The cursor is moved in the order, 1) 2) 3).

Arrange the objects so that the [Position to

As the [Position to specify area] is not on specify area] may be on the same x-coordinate.
the same x-coordinate, the cursor is moved (When moving the cursor from side to side,
in the order, 1) 3) 3). arrange the objects so that the [Position to
specify area] may be on the same y-coordinate.)

(c) When the cursor is not moved as designed even if readjust the
arrangement of the objects
Directly touch the object to input.

3 - 21 3 - 21
 4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION

(1) Table at top right of each section

The table at top right of each section indicates the following meanings.
GOT Type

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

: Function available, : Function unavailable

4.1 Types and Number of Screens Created

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

When the GOT-A900 series is used, the base screen, window screen (two display
methods: overlap window and superimpose window) and report screen are created.
4
When the GOT-F900 series is used, the base screen and key window screen (display
method: overlap window) can be created.

Close key Movement key window screen

Touch the close key of the overlap

window screen and the overlap
window closes. To move the overlap window
screen, touch the movement
key and then touch the desired
position for movement.

Base screen

4.1.1 Base screen

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This screen is the basic display of the GOT. Each screen operates as an individual
screen.

Max. Number Registerable

GOT Type A (Dots) B (Dots)
of Screens Screen Number
GT SoftGOT 1280 1024
GT SoftGOT 1024 768
Base screen B
A985GOT/ GT SoftGOT 800 600
A97 GOT/ GT SoftGOT 480 4096 1 to 32767
640
A960GOT 400
A956WGOT 480 234
A A95 GOT 320 240
F940WGOT 480 234
F940GOT 320 240
500 1 to 500
F930GOT 240 80
F920GOT 128 64

4-1 4-1
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.1.2 Window screen

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

POINT
The GOT-F900 series (except the F920GOT) allows only the key window to be
created.

There are 2 window screens; the overlap window that pops up on the base screen, and
the superimpose window that compose contents.
Up to 1024 window screens can be created. (Screen numbers can be registered from
1 to 32767.)

(1) Setting range of screen size

Window Screen
Base Screen
GOT Type
(Horizontal × vertical dots)
(Horizontal × vertical dots) 4
Maximum Minimum
GT SoftGOT 1280×1024/1024×768
800×480
A985GOT/GT SoftGOT 800×600
A97 GOT/GT SoftGOT 640×480
640×400
A960GOT 640×400
A956WGOT 480×234 480×234 94×81
A95 GOT 320×240 320×240
F940WGOT 480×234 480×234
F940GOT 320×240 320×240
F930GOT 240×80 240×80
F920GOT 128×64
For the overlap window, the above values indicate the maximum setting range
applicable when the close and move keys are hidden.
When the close and move keys are displayed, the maximum setting range is as
follows.
When using GT SoftGOT/A985GOT: Maximum width 798 × length 463 dots
When using A97 /960GOT: Maximum width 638 × length 383 dots
When using A956WGOT: Maximum width 478 × length 217 dots
When using A95 GOT: Maximum width 318 × length 223 dots
When using F940WGOT, F940GOT and F930GOT: Functions as a key
window.

Setting range for the width : Minimum 94 dots - Maximum 800 dots
Setting range for the length : Minimum 81 dots - Maximum 480 dots

POINT
The initial value of the window screen size is set as follows:
• When using model other than A95 GOT: Width 318 × Length 176 dots
• When using A95 GOT/A956WGOT: Width 190 × Length 126 dots

4-2 4-2
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(2) Display method of window screen

A window screen with the value stored in the window switching device is
displayed at the designated display position.
(Set the display position by directly specifying it. Alternatively, it may be specified
by the value of the specified device. (Overlap window only))

The window screen is closed when you touch the close button (overlap window
only) or the window switching device turns to "0".

(Ex.) Overlap window 1

Screen switching device = 3

Overlap window 1 display position

Window screen 3

Overlap window is displayed at the left top of the window position.

(3) Movement of window screen (Overlap window only)

Touch the movement bar on the window screen to go into the movement mode.
Touch the movement bar again at the desired position for movement.
Movement key area

Touch the movement key area of the window The window screen moves to the desired
screen. position where touched.

4-3 4-3
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(4) Overlap window

(a) Display type of overlap window
The overlap window has a close (close screen) and a move bar (move
screen) bar to perform manual window operation.
You can make setting to display or hide these close key and move bar.
<Close and move keys displayed> <Close and move keys hidden>

Overlap window screen Overlap window screen

Screen can be moved or Screen cannot be moved.

closed manually. Set screen switching device
value to close.

(b) When overlap windows are overlaid

Two overlap windows can be displayed together.
When two windows are overlaid, touch the lower hidden window to bring it
up.

Overlap window 1 display position

Overlap window 2 Overlap window 2

Overlap window 1 Overlap wind

Overlap window 2 display position

Touch the lower hidden window screen. The lower window comes up.

(c) Relationships between overlap windows and touch keys

Touch keys are invalid around overlap windows in the area equivalent to
one key (16 dots).
Therefore, note that touch keys hidden under the overlap windows are
invalid if pressed.

: Valid touch key area

Overlap window 1 : Invalid touch key area

Overlap window 2

Single key-equivalent
touch key invalid areas

4-4 4-4
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

The surrounding single key (16 dots)-equivalent touch key invalid areas
may be eliminated only when the following conditions are satisfied.
• The close and move keys are set to be hidden.
• The window size is set to a multiple of 16 dots.

: Valid touch key area

Overlap window 1 : Invalid touch key area

Overlap window 2

(5) Superimpose window

Retrieve one window screen on the base screen for composition. It can be used
as part of the base screen.
While the superimpose window is displayed, changing the window screen
number can change the part of the base screen dynamically.

(Ex. 1) Add color to line A where abnormality has occurred.

Operation for abnormality in line A Store 3 in the screen switching device

Figure of window screen number 3

A Current
production
quantity:300

B Current
production quantity:256

Set "3" in the screen switching device

Abnormality
of the superimpose window.

A Abnormality

B Current
production quantity:256

POINT
Note that the touch key underneath the overlap window does not function properly.

4-5 4-5
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(Ex. 2) Switch the display method of manufacturing quantity with buttons.

Button A Display the window screen of screen number 1
Operation of each button Button B Display the window screen of screen number 5
Button C Display the window screen of screen number 10

A Superimpose window
display position
Main screen B
C

Window screen Numerical display Graph display Statistical display

Window screen number 1 5 10
Current production Current production Current production
quantity quantity quantity

A line 135Unit
Screen B line 89Unit
C line 106Unit
A B C

1) Touch button A to display window screen 1.

Current production
quantity Current production
A A
quantity
A line 135Unit
B + B line 89Unit = B
A line 135Unit

B line 89Unit
C C line 106Unit
C C line 106Unit

2) Touch button B to display window screen 5.

Current production Current production

quantity quantity
A A
B + = B
C C
A B C A B C

3) Touch button C to display window screen 10.

Current production
Current production
quantity
A A
quantity

B + = B
C C

4-6 4-6
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(Ex. 3) Switch the display/non-display of buttons for additional product option

parts.
Button A Display the window screen of screen number 3
Operation of each button Button B Display the window screen of screen number 7
Button C Display the window screen of screen number 10
Superimpose window display position
The added options are available.
Name

A A
C
B

Main screen B
C

Window screen Options of product A Options of product B Options of product C

Window screen number 3 7 10

D D

E F F
Screen
G G H H

I I J

1) Touch button A to display window screen 3.

The added options are available.

Name The added options are available.
Name
A A
C
B
D A A B
C D
B + E F
= B E F
G
C I
C
G
I

2) Touch button B to display window screen 7.

The added options are available.
Name The added options are available.
Name
A A B
A B
C A
B + =
C

G H
B
C G H
I J C I J

3) Touch button C to display window screen 10.

The added options are available.
Name The added options are available.
Name
A A B
A B
C D A
B + F
=
C D
B F
C H
H
C

4-7 4-7
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(6) Precautions for display of the superimpose window screen

If the superimpose window screen overlaps the base screen, be careful for the
following points:
(a) Contents of each screen overlaps
1) Figure data
Figures of superimpose window screen are brought to front.

+
Superimpose window
screen
Base screen Screen display

2) Object data
The object with changed values out of objects in the base screen and
the Superimpose Window screen is brought to front.

12345 12345
000001
+ 000001

Superimpose window
Base screen screen Screen display
When the value of the object
changes, the object with changed
value is brought to front.

3) Touch key
The touch key of the superimpose window screen is brought to front.
If the touch keys overlap, both touch key functions of the base screen
and the superimpose window screen become effective when touched.

+
Superimpose window
Base screen screen Screen display

POINT
If the touch keys of the superimpose window screen and the base screen overlap
and the touch keys are briefly touched, only the touch key of the superimpose
window screen may function.

4-8 4-8
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(b) If the superimpose window screen is displayed out of the base

screen
With the reference point "+" at the upper left for the superimpose window
screen, the limited area can be displayed on the base screen.

+
Superimpose window
Base screen screen
Screen display
(not displayed for touch key)

(c) If only one object that can be displayed in one screen overlaps
If only one object, such as data list or alarm list, that can be displayed in
one screen overlaps, the objects can be displayed for the number of
screens. However, the functions are limited and the display may not be
correct.

4-9 4-9
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.1.3 About the report screen

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

POINT
The A950 handy GOT / GOT-F900 series has no report screens.

The report screen is used to set the format and layout of data printed by a printer with
the report function of the GOT.
Hence, only the functions usable with the report function may be set on this screen.
For details of the report function, refer to Section 6.7.

(1) Screen size setting range

Left
Item Setting Range
space
lines 1 to 127
Format
Top columns 1 to 255
space
Top space 0 to 30
Report screen lines Margins
Left space 0 to 254

Number of screens 1 to 8
columns

(2) Setting for each printer

The screen size (print format settings) of the report screen must be changed
according to the printable area of the printer.
You can use the following expressions to find the settings.
For more information on the print format settings, refer to the GT Designer Help.

• To find the maximum setting of the columns + left space (width)

(Printable area width of printer [mm]) ÷ 25.4 × 15

Example) Printable area width of printer is "204mm"

204 ÷ 25.4 × 15 = 120.47…
Hence, set the columns + left space to within 120 in the GOT print
format setting.

• To find the maximum setting of the lines + top space (height)

(Printable area height of printer [mm]) ÷ 4.23

Example) Printable area height of printer is "280mm"

280 ÷ 4.23 = 66.19…
Hence, set the lines + top space to within 66 in the GOT print format
setting.

POINT
The printable area of the printer changes with the printer used.
For details of the specifications, refer to the instruction manual of the printer used.

4 - 10 4 - 10
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.1.4 Video window

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

A video window displays a picture taken with a video camera.

The video window has two different modes: the full mode in which a picture taken with
a video camera is displayed as-is; and the clip mode in which part of a picture taken
with a video camera is displayed.
Since video windows are independent of other screens, the base screen can be
switched with the video windows open.
This section explains video windows.
Refer to Section 4.1.6 for video window settings.

Video camera
(Cannnel.No1)

A 1254 Video camera

(Cannnel.No2)
B 348
Video camera
(Cannnel.No3)

Video camera
(Cannnel.No4)

Video window4
Video window3
Video window2
Video window1

POINT
• Video windows may be used only when the A9GT-80V4/A9GT-80V4R1 is fitted
to the A985GOT-V.
• No objects can be placed in a video window.
• The video signal format (NTSC/PAL) specified on the GOT side should be the
same as the format of the video signal input from a video camera.
If the video signal formats are different, a video picture may not be displayed
properly.
Refer to Section 4.1.6 for the way to choose the video signal format.
• A video picture is not displayed if a video signal is not input to the specified
channel due to cable disconnection, camera power-off or the like.

4 - 11 4 - 11
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(1) How to display the video window

(a) When the data of the device set as the "Channel No." turns to any of 1 to 4,
the corresponding video window appears in the then states (Channel No.,
Size, Coordinates (X axis, Y axis)) of the monitored devices set on GT
Designer.

(Example) When the picture of channel No. 1 is displayed in video window 1

• Channel No.: D105 • X axis: D107
• Size: D106 • Y axis: D108

D105 0 1 (Channel No.)

D106 0 0 (Size : 640 480)
D107 0 32 (X axis)
D108 0 32 (Y axis)

Video window 1 is displayed with

the specified channel, size and
coordinates.

POINT
There is no close button for a video window.
Use the device (reset the channel No. to 0) to close the video window.

(2) Video window display position

You can specify a video window display position within the following range.
A video window appears at the specified coordinates.
The video window can be placed on the base screen or in overlap window 1.

A Type A [dots] B [dots]

Base screen 0 to 784 0 to 584
As the display coordinates, Overlap window 1 0 to 784 0 to 464
specify the coordinates at top
left of the video window.

Video window

4 - 12 4 - 12
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

POINT
• Set the display coordinates as multiples of 16 (dots).
If you set the coordinates which are not multiples of 16, they are automatically
changed to multiples of 16.
• If the video window displayed on the base screen overflow the GOT screen, it is
automatically placed within the GOT screen.
• If the video window displayed in overlap window 1 overflows the window screen,
its video picture does not appear.
• The following indication and windows are displayed in front of video windows.
Floating alarm function, key window, comment window, overlap windows (1, 2),
test window
(The priorities of the overlap windows (1, 2) and test window can be changed by
making setting.)

(3) How to move video windows

There is no move button for a video window.
To move a video window, change the device values used to set the coordinates
(X axis, Y axis).
In case more then two video windows are moved frequently, there might be no
response to move by the overlap window touch.

(4) When placing video window in overlap window

(a) A video window may be placed only in the overlap window 1.
(b) All windows displayed in front of the overlap window 1 are shown in front of
the video window.
(c) The video window placed in the overlap window 1 is transparency -processed
automatically.
(Refer to (8) for the transparency processing.)
(d) When the screen specified to place the video window is changed from the
base screen to the overlap window 1 while the video window is being
displayed, the video window is closed once and then opened in the overlap
window 1.

4 - 13 4 - 13
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(5) Full mode

In the full mode, the picture taken with a video camera is displayed on the GOT
as-is.
When the full mode is used, up to four video windows can be displayed
simultaneously.
A single video window can display pictures by changing one channel number to
another.

Video picture

Video-taken picture appears as-is.

(a) Resolution (effective pixels) and size

In the full mode, a video window can be displayed at the resolution of
720×480 dots or 640×480 dots, and its size can be changed in three steps
(100%, 50%, 25%) at each resolution.
Resolution
Size
At 720×480 dots At 640×480 dots
At 100% 720×480 dots 640×480 dots
At 50% 360×240 dots 320×240 dots
At 25% 180×120 dots 160×120 dots
*1 Set the same resolution to four channels.

(b) Size change

The video window size can be changed in the following procedure.
1) Touch the video window.
(You can disable size change through touching operation by turning b4
of “Video/RGB Common” device on. (See Section 4.6.1, item (2).))

Size : 25% Size : 50% Size : 100%

Touching operation changes the video window size as described
below.
<Size change>
Size : 50% For example, when a video window is
displayed at the size of 25%, the first touching
operation changes the size to 50%.
Size : 25% Size : 100% When the video window is displayed at
50%, the first touching operation always
changes the size to 100%.
Size : 50%

4 - 14 4 - 14
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

2) Change the value of the device where the size has been
set.
D105 1 1 1 (Channel No.)
D106 2 1 0 (Size)
D107 32 32 32 (X axis)
D108 32 32 32 (Y axis)

Size : 25% Size : 50% Size : 100%

(c) When multiple video windows are displayed

1) When opened, the video window appears in the forefront.
2) When the coordinates and/or size of the video window is changed, a new
video window appears in the forefront.
3) When video windows are overlapping, touching the lower video window
shows it in the forefront.
4) When you attempt to display the picture of the same channel in multiple
video windows, it appears only in the last specified video window and the
other windows are displayed blue.

(d) Touch key disable areas around the video window

The displayed video windows of specific sizes have touch key disable
areas as indicated below.

Video widow

Right

Bottom

Resolution
Size
At 720×480 dots At 640×480 dots
720×480 dots 640×480 dots
At 100%
(No disable areas) (No disable areas)
320×240 dots
At 50% 360×240 dots
(No disable areas)
180×120 dots
160×120 dots
At 25% (Disable area: 12 dots at right, 8
(Disable area: 8 dots at bottom)
dots at bottom)

4 - 15 4 - 15
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

POINT
• When touching operation is performed to return the size to that at the video
window opening time, the display position also returns to the position at the
video window opening time.
• The resolution of the video picture input from a video camera should be the
same as that of the video window displayed on the GOT.
The following cases will be happened due to different resolutions.

(Example 1)
Video picture resolution: 720 480 dots
Video window resolution: 640 480 dots
Video window Video picture
(640 480 dots) (720 480 dots)

Not displayed partly.

(Example 2)
Video picture resolution: 640 480 dots
Video window resolution: 720 480 dots
Video window Video picture
(720 180 dots) (640 480 dots)

Not displayed correctly.

Refer to Section 4.1.6 for the way to select the video window resolution.

4 - 16 4 - 16
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(6) Clip mode

In the clip mode, the specified part (clip area) of the picture taken with a video
camera is displayed on the GOT in full size.
The display area of the video window can be decreased without the displayed
picture being reduced.
In the clip mode, you can use only video window 1 and cannot use video
windows 2 to 4.

Specified
part

Video picture

Specified video picture part appears as-is.

(a) Clip area selection

As a clip area, specify the coordinates at top left of the part you want to
display from the video picture and set the height (64 to 720 dots) and width
(64 to 480 dots).
Set coordinates at top left of
part to be displayed in clip mode
Set width.

Set height.

Video picture

POINT
• In the clip mode, video windows 2 to 4 are closed and cannot be opened.
• In the clip mode, the displayed video window will not operate if touched.
• When video windows 2 to 4 are open, changing the full mode to the clip mode
forces them to be closed.
• When the clip mode is returned to the full mode, video windows 2 to 4 are
displayed in accordance with the specified channel numbers, coordinates and
sizes valid at that point.

4 - 17 4 - 17
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(7) Freeze-frame picture

The video picture displayed in the full or clip mode can be changed to a freeze-
frame picture.
When two or more video windows are displayed in the full mode, all of them are
changed to freeze-frame pictures.
(Moving picture/freeze-frame
picture selection bit ON: b5)
Turning the bit on changes
moving picture into freeze-frame
picture.
D10 ... b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

OFF ON

POINT
• While the screen is still, touching operation for a video window and switching
from the PLC are invalid.
Hence, note that the following operations are disabled while the screen is still.
Window channel changing, size changing, display position changing, closing
and opening of video window
• If the picture of the video window placed in the overlap window is changed to a
freeze-frame picture, moving the overlap window causes the video picture to be
hidden.

(8) Transparency processing

You can specify the through color to display the objects and figures located under
a video window.
You can choose either of "Other than specified color is transmitted through" and
"Specified color is transmitted through".
When two or more video windows are displayed, all windows are transmission-
processed.
(Transmission processing
selection bit ON: b2)
Turning the bit on performs
transmission processing.
(Thru color specifying method
selection bit ON: b3)
Turning the bit on causes the
specified color to be transmitted
through. A FED A FED
D10 ............... b3 b2 b1 b0 B CDE B CDE

OFF ON
OFF ON
Figures and objects of specified
color can be transmitted through.

Through color specifying Through

Display
method selection bit: b3 Color
OFF Figures and objects of colors other than
0 (black)
(Other than specified color is transmitted through) black are displayed on the video window.
ON Black figures and objects are displayed on
0 (black)
(Specified color is transmitted through) the video window.

POINT
• The touch keys and numerical/ASCII input function under video windows are
made usable by performing transparency processing.
• When placing a video window in the overlap window 1, transparency processing is
performed automatically if the transmission processing selection bit (b2) is OFF.

4 - 18 4 - 18
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(9) Examples of using video windows

(a) Examples of using full mode
1) A single video window is used to display channels 1 to 4, and a touch
key is used to switch between the channels.

Cannel1 Cannel2 Cannel3 Cannel4

Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting

Change from 1 to 2 to 3 to 4,
Set video input signal. D106 then again from 1 ... D108 32 (X axis)
D100
(NTSC or PAL) (Channel No.)
D107 0 (Size) D109 32 (Y axis)

2) While channel 1 is being displayed, change the video window size.

Size2 Size1 Size0

Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting

Set video input signal. D106 1 (Channel No.) D108 32 (X axis)
D100
(NTSC or PAL) D107 2→1→0 (Size) D109 64 (Y axis)

3) While channels 1 to 4 are being displayed in four video windows, change

the size of video window 3.

Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting

D106 1 (Channel No.) D114 3 (Channel No.)
D107 2 (Size) D115 2→0 (Size)
D108 32 (X axis) D116 384→32 (X axis)
Set video input signal. D109 480 (Y axis) D117 480→0 (Y axis)
D100
(NTSC or PAL) D110 2 (Channel No.) D118 4 (Channel No.)
D111 2 (Size) D119 2 (Size)
D112 208 (X axis) D120 560 (X axis)
D113 480 (Y axis) D121 480 (Y axis)

4 - 19 4 - 19
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4) While channels 1 to 4 are being displayed in four video windows, change

the video window sizes using the touch key function and script function.

Device Setting Device Setting Device Setting

D106 1 (Channel No.) D114 3 (Channel No.)
D107 2→0→2 (Size) D115 2 (Size)
D108 32 (X axis) D116 384 (X axis)
Set video input signal. D109 480→0→480 (Y axis) D117 480 (Y axis)
D100
(NTSC or PAL) D110 2 (Channel No.) D118 4 (Channel No.)
D111 2→0 (Size) D119 2 (Size)
D112 208→32 (X axis) D120 560 (X axis)
D113 480→0 (Y axis) D121 480 (Y axis)

Create a script which repeats the following every time the touch key is pressed.
1) Window 1: Small to large
2) Window 1: Large to small
Window 2: Small to large
3) Window 2: Large to small
Window 3: Small to large

(b) Examples of using clip mode

1) Using touch keys, change the clip coordinates of a video picture.

X 70
Y 50

Video picture

Specify clip coordinates

with touch keys.

Device Setting Device Setting

D100 Clip mode selection D105 1 (Channel No.)
70→75→80
D101 D106 0 (Size)
(X axis to be clipped)
50→55→60
D102 D107 112 (X axis)
(Y axis to be clipped)
D103 256 (Clip width) D108 112 (Y axis)
D104 256 (Clip height) — —

4 - 20 4 - 20
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.1.5 RGB screen

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The picture of a personal computer can be displayed on the GOT.

An RGB screen allows SVGA (800×600 dots) or VGA (640×480 dots) to be selected.
This section explains the RGB screen functions.
Refer to Section 4.1.6 for RGB screen settings.

POINT
An RGB screen is usable only when the A9GT-80R1/A9GT-80V4R1 is fitted to the
A985GOT-V.

(1) How to display RGB screen

(a) An RGB screen is switched from/to the GOT monitor screen depending on
whether the monitored RGB screen display/hide selection bit (bit device in
word device) set on GT Designer is on or off.
(RGB screen display/hide selection bit ON: b15)
Turning the bit on changes the GOT monitor
screen to the RGB screen.
D10 b15 .................b2 b1 b0

OFF ON

A FED
B CDE

RGB screen Monitor screen

(b) You can touch the RGB screen to return to the monitor screen.
This function can be selected from among the following six different
operations.
FULL L-UP L-DW

Touching any place in the The window changes to the The window changes to the
window switches it to monitor screen only when monitor screen only when
the monitor screen. you touch its top left. you touch its bottom left.

R-UP R-DW NONE

The window changes to the The window changes to the The window does not
monitor screen only when monitor screen only when change to the monitor
you touch its top right. you touch its bottom right. screen if you touch it.

4 - 21 4 - 21
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

1) Instructions for touching the RGB screen to change it to

the GOT monitor screen
When you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT
monitor screen, the RGB screen display/hide selection bit does not
turn off.
Hence, you cannot change the GOT monitor screen to the RGB
screen again since the RGB screen display/hide selection bit is on.
When you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT
monitor screen, turn off the RGB screen display/hide selection bit.

Using the script function allows you to turn off the RGB screen
display/hide selection bit when you have touched the RGB screen to
change it to the GOT monitor screen.
The following is the script function setting example to turn off the RGB
screen display/hide selection bit.

Setting Item Settings

Set the Switching screen Video/RGB Common Device: D100 (Selection of RGB screen display or hide bit: D100.b15)
Set the System information Write Device: Set 15 points starting from D33.
Type: Project Script
Trigger Type: Ordinary
Data Format: Signed BIN 16/32bit
Script description:
if(([b:D100.b15]==ON) //When the RGB screen display/hide selection bit is on and
&&([w:D35]==-1)){ // -1 (RGB screen) is in Base screen number storage area of System information
[b:TMP0000.b0]=ON ; //The RGB screen displaying flag is turned on
Set the Script Function
}
else{
if([b:TMP0000.b0]==ON){ //When the RGB screen is changed to the monitor screen
[b:D100.b15]=OFF ; //the RGB screen display/hide selection bit is turned off
[b:TMP0000.b0]=OFF ; //the RGB screen displaying flag is turned off
}
}

POINT
• When VGA (640×480 dots) is used, the margins are displayed black since the
resolution differs from that of the A985GOT-V (800×600 dots).
• When offline (e.g. when monitor screen data is downloaded from GT Designer),
the GOT shows a screen.
If the RGB screen display controlling bit is on when the GOT is switched from
offline to online, the monitor screen is displayed once and the RGB screen is
then displayed.
• Each object operates while the RGB screen is being displayed.
• While the RGB screen is being displayed, the RGB screen cannot be printed or
a BMP file cannot be saved on a PC card if you use the hardcopy function.

4 - 22 4 - 22
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(2) Screen save for RGB screen

To use the screen save function while the RGB screen is being displayed, the
display power-saving function of the personal computer must be active.
If it is inactive, the screen save function set on the GOT is invalid.
Screen save for an RGB screen is performed in the following sequence.
(Only when human sensor setting is made)

The above message appears The display (message) remains After elapse of screen save
after detection of display unchanged after elapse of human time set on GOT side,
power-saving status of personal sensor off delay time set on GOT enters screen save status.
computer. GOT side.

POINT
• When the GOT monitor screen is being displayed, screen save operates
independently of whether the display power-saving function of the personal
computer is active or not.
For details of the GOT screen save function, refer to the GOT-A900 series
operating manual (GT Works Version 5/GT Designer Version 5 compatible
Extended • Option Functions Manual).
• If the RGB signal is not input to the GOT due to cable disconnection or the like,
the screen displayed is the same as in the power saving status of the personal
computer display.

4.1.6 Video window/RGB screen settings

The video window/RGB screen operates in accordance with the monitored devices set
on GT Designer.
The following table indicates the contents of the devices set on GT Designer.

(1) Contents of devices set on GT Designer

Item Description Setting Details
Video/RGB Device used to control the operation of a video or RGB screen.
Common 1 (Refer to (2) for device contents.)
Thru Color 0 (Black) to 255 (White) Specify the color for transparency processing.
X axis Specify the X axis where a video picture will be clipped in the clip mode.
Y axis Specify the Y axis where a video picture will be clipped in the clip mode.
Clip
Width Specify the width of the clipped picture.
Height Specify the height of the clipped picture.
Channel No. Specify the channel number to be displayed in video window 1. (0 to 4)
Specify the size of the video window.
Size 3
(0: 100% display, 1: 50% display, 2: 25% display)
Video Window 1 2 Specify the X axis of the video window to be displayed on the base screen or in
X axis
overlap window 1.
Specify the Y axis of the video window to be displayed on the base screen or in
Y axis
overlap window 1.
1 When an RGB screen is displayed, the devices other than "Video/RGB Common" cannot be set.
2 Set video windows 2 to 4 to set multiple video windows.(Settings are the same as those of video window 1.)
3 When the display size is changed by PLC CPU, the set device value will be altered.
When the display size is changed by touching the video window, the set device value will not be altered.When the size on the display is
changed by the video window touch, the device will not be altered.

4 - 23 4 - 23
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(2) Contents of "Video/RGB Common" device

The device specified as "Video/RGB Common" stores the following data.
Turning on/off the corresponding bit device controls the operation of the
video/RGB screen.
Bit
Description Bit Status Remarks
Position
Valid when video window is open.
Selection of full or clip ON : Clip mode is selected.
b0 Can be changed while video window is being
mode OFF : Full mode is selected.
displayed.
Selection of video window ON : Overlap window 1 is selected. Transparency processing is performed
b1
placement screen OFF : Base screen is selected. automatically when the b1 is ON
ON : Transparency processing is performed.
Selection of transparency
b2 OFF : Transparency processing is not
processing
performed.
ON : Specified color is transmitted through.
Selection of thru color
b3 OFF : Other than specified color is transmitted Valid when b1 and b2 are on.
specifying method
through.
Selection of whether size Valid when Valid when video window is open.
ON : Size is not changed.
b4 is changed or not when Can be changed while video window is being
OFF : Size is changed.
video window is touched displayed.
ON : Valid only while video window is being
Selection of moving or
ON : Freeze-frame picture is selected. displayed as moving picture.
b5 freeze-frame picture
OFF : Moving picture is selected. OFF : Valid only while video window is being
2 3 4
displayed as freeze-frame picture.
ON : Video windows are displayed in front of
Valid when Valid when video window is open.
Selection of video window overlap and test windows.
b6 Can be changed while video window is being
display priority OFF : Video windows are displayed at rear of
displayed.
overlap and test windows.
b7 Reserved —
Valid when video window is opened first after
Selection of video input ON : Input in PAL system.
b8 power-on of GOT.
signal (format) OFF : Input in NTSC system.
Cannot be changed thereafter.
Valid when video window is opened first after
Selection of video picture ON : 720 480 dots are selected.
b9 power-on of GOT.
resolution OFF : 640 480 dots are selected.
Cannot be changed thereafter.
b10 to
Reserved —
b14
ON : Valid only when GOT monitor screen is
Selection of RGB screen ON : RGB screen is displayed.
b15 displayed.
display or hide 5 OFF : GOT monitor screen is displayed.
OFF : Valid only when RGB screen is displayed.
1 With the exception of b15, selection is made for all video windows.
2 The following operations cannot be performed when the bit is on.
Open a video window. (The video window cannot be opened when it is not being displayed.)
Close the video window.
Change the display position of the video window.
3 In case the power supply of GOT is turned on while the bit is ON, the video window is not shown.
In order to show the video window, the power supply of GOT should be turned on while the bit is off.
4 In case the other bit is turned on simultaneously, it is with no effect.(the b5 takes priority.)
5 When any of the utility function, system monitor function, ladder monitor function, special module monitor function, network monitor
function and list editor function screens is displayed on the GOT, it does not change to the RGB window if the bit turns on.
It changes to the RGB screen after the corresponding function is terminated.

4 - 24 4 - 24
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.1.7 Wide display screen

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The wide size GOT has a wide screen (landscape monitor) to provide a wide display.
When drawing, refer to the following drawing method and precautions for the wide
screen.

(1) Drawing method effective for wide screen

A95*GOT screen A956WGOT screen

Line1 0
100 Line1 100
0
Line2 25 Line2 25
Line3 45 Line3 45

Input object: Input object:

Appears only when necessary. Always appears.

POINT
Though A95*GOT screen data can be used unchanged on the A956WGOT, note
that the data in the 6 dots at the bottom of the A95*GOT screen are not displayed.

234 A956WGOT
dots A95*GOT screen size
screen size

6 dots

(2) Precautions for drawing method on wide display

1) Because of the difference between the vertical and horizontal dot intervals on
a wide display, the actual screen display provided is 1.15 times greater
vertically than the drawing screen of GT Designer.
You can confirm the actual screen display using the preview display function
of GT Designer.

4 - 25 4 - 25
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

GT Designer screen

A956WGOT screen

2) If you run the monitor A956WGOT, the screen may flicker depending on the
type of object/shape fill pattern used when creating images.
This is due to the specifications of the LCD panel and not a malfunction.
Be sure to check the combination of type of pattern and color on the machine
before using.
(a) Examples of patterns where flicker is likely to occur
As in the following pattern examples, a pattern of lines, points or the like
whose colors change line-by-line (horizontal pattern) particularly tends to
cause a screen to flicker.
(A basic figure or the like that uses a horizontal pattern may also flicker.)
Also a figure or the like that is clear in light and shade is likely to flicker.
(When "Background: black", "Foreground: white", and others are selected.)
<Examples of patterns where flicker is likely to occur>

(b) How to prevent flicker

• Flicker is reduced by selecting a solid color pattern. • When using a horizontal pattern or the like, flicker is
reduced by selecting similar colors for foreground
and background.
(Example1) Select a solid color pattern for "Pattern" (Example2) Select similar colors for "Foreground" and
Pattern: A solid color pattern (8) "Background"
Foreground: Blue (3), Background: Light blue (31)

4 - 26 4 - 26
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

4.2.1 Types of drawing figures

Figures and character types are as follows:

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Figures Example of drawing Attributes for selection

Line

Line style, line width, line color

Line Freedom

Rectangle

Line style, line width, line color,

Polygon painting pattern, painting color,
painting background

Circle (ellipse)

Arc (ellipse arc) Line style, line width, line color

Line style, line width, line color,

Sector painting pattern, painting color,
painting background

Painting of enclosed Painting pattern, painting color,

area painting background

Figure data in
bitmap / DXF
format

ABC ABC A BC Style , text color, solid color, size,

vertical, direction, alignment, high
A
B ABC
Text quality font (high quality font only for
multiple of 2, 4, 6 and 8 of length to
C width magnification)
Number of graduation, direction,
Scale centerline, line style, line width, line
color

Report figure (line)

Report figure(text) ABC

4 - 27 4 - 27
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

When "Raised" is selected for "Character decoration", the display provided on

the GT Designer screen is the same as when "Shadow" is selected, but the
correct display is provided on the GOT.
"Raised" is "Character decoration" as if "Boldface" ad "Shadow" are combined.
Uninfluenced by the character size, the shadow part of "Raised" is always 1 dot
large.
The shadow part of "Shadow" changes in proportion to the character size.
(Example: The shadow is 2 dots large when the character size is 2x2.)

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

Figures Example of drawing Attributes for selection

Line Line style, line color

Rectangle
Line style, painting pattern, painting
color
Circle

Figure data in
bitmap / DXF ⎯⎯⎯
format

Text ABC ABC A BC Text color, size, alignment

4 - 28 4 - 28
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.2.2 Attribute type for selection

Attribute types for drawing are as follows:

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Attribute Example of drawing
Full line , Broken line , Dotted line ,
Line style Alternate long and short dash line , Alternate long and two short dash line

1 dot , 2 dot , 3 dot ,

Line width 4 dot , 5 dot , 7 dot

256 colors
Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is
compatible with 256 color display.
Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is
compatible with 16 color display.
Display color
Display on GOT Displayed in reduced 8 colors when the GOT used is
compatible with 8 color display.
All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (orange / white) when the GOT used has a
monochrome display.

Painting
pattern

256 colors
Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is
compatible with 256 color display.
Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is
Painting color,
compatible with 16 color display.
painting
Display on GOT Displayed in reduced 8 colors when the GOT used is
background
compatible with 8 color display.
All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (orange / white) when the GOT used has a
monochrome display.

POINT
• Colors that can be displayed on each GOT
When the GOT used can display 16 or less colors, the following colors can be
Displayed.
GOT Display Colors Displayable Colors
16-color display 255,0,3,224,227,28,31,252,109,182,2,160,162,20,22,180
8-color display 255,0,3,224,227,28,31,252
Monochrome display All colors other than black are displayed as the same color (orange/white).

The GOT display can be confirmed on the preview screen of GT Designer.

For the preview screen, refer to the help function of GT Designer.

4 - 29 4 - 29
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

Attribute Example of drawing
Full line , Broken line , Dotted line ,
Line style Alternate long and short dash line , Alternate long and two short dash line

Line width 1 dot

256 colors
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Color liquid crystal)
Displayed in reduced 256 colors.
F940GOT-SWD-E(Color liquid crystal)
Displayed in reduced 8 colors.
F940GOT-LWD-E(Monochrome liquid crystal)
Display color
Display on GOT All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (white).
F930GOT-BWD-E, F920GOT-BB5-K-E (Blue liquid
crystal)
All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (white), and black is displayed in blue.
Painting
pattern
256 colors
F940WGOT-TWD-E (Color liquid crystal)
Displayed in reduced 256 colors.
F940GOT-SWD-E(Color liquid crystal)
Displayed in reduced 8 colors.
F940GOT-LWD-E(Monochrome liquid crystal)
Painting color
Display on GOT All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (white).
F930GOT-BWD-E, F920GOT-BB5-K-E (Blue liquid
crystal)
All colors other than black are displayed in the same
color (white), and black is displayed in blue.

4 - 30 4 - 30
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.2.3 Figures in bitmap file format

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT-A900 series are 3 types; 256
colors, 16 colors and black-and-white.
There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they
are displayed in reduced colors.

(Ex.)
• 256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 16 color/black-and-white
GOT-A900 series.
• 16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the black-and-white GOT-
A900 series.

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT-F900 series are 3 types; 256
colors, 16 colors and black-and-white.
There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they
are displayed in reduced colors.

(Ex.)
• 256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color/black-and-white/
white-and-blue GOT-F900 series.
• 16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color/black-and-white/
white-and-blue GOT-F900 series.

4 - 31 4 - 31
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.2.4 Character size by magnification

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Length × Width (dot)

Length
magnification
× 0.5 ×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6 ×7 ×8
Width
magnification
× 0.5 8×8 8 × 16 8 × 32 8 × 48 8 × 64 8 × 80 8 × 96 8 × 112 8 × 128
×1 16 × 8 16 × 16 16 × 32 16 × 48 16 × 64 16 × 80 16 × 96 16 × 112 16 × 128
×2 32 × 8 32 × 16 32 × 32 32 × 48 32 × 64 32 × 80 32 × 96 32 × 112 32 × 128
×3 48 × 8 48 × 16 48 × 32 48 × 48 48 × 64 48 × 80 48 × 96 48 × 112 48 × 128
×4 64 × 8 64 × 16 64 × 32 64 × 48 64 × 64 64 × 80 64 × 96 64 × 112 64 × 128
×5 80 × 8 80 × 16 80 × 32 80 × 48 80 × 64 80 × 80 80 × 96 80 × 112 80 × 128
×6 96 × 8 96 × 16 96 × 32 96 × 48 96 × 64 96 × 80 96 × 96 96 × 112 96 × 128
×7 112 × 8 112 × 16 112 × 32 112 × 48 112 × 64 112 × 80 112 × 96 112 × 112 112 × 128
×8 128 × 8 128 × 16 128 × 32 128 × 48 128 × 64 128 × 80 128 × 96 128 × 112 128 × 128

REMARKS
• Set the character magnification for both length and width to the multiple of 2, 4,
6 and 8 if high quality font is used.
• If a part with high quality font is displayed with the part display/part movement
display function on the screen which is not using high quality font, the part is
not displayed in high quality font.
When any of characters on the screen are changed to high quality font, the part
is displayed in high quality font.

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

Length × Width (dot)

Length
magnification
×1 ×2 ×3 ×4
Width
magnification
× 0.5 8 × 16 8 × 32 8 × 48 8 × 64
×1 16 × 16 16 × 32 16 × 48 16 × 64
×2 32 × 16 32 × 32 32 × 48 32 × 64
×3 48 × 16 48 × 32 48 × 48 48 × 64
×4 64 × 16 64 × 32 64 × 48 64 × 64

4 - 32 4 - 32
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.2.5 Data capacity of each figure

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

Memory capacity of figures and characters for drawing is as follows.

The following memory capacity applies to figures regardless of attribute types and
sizes.

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Figure Memory capacity (byte)
Line 20
16 + 4 × n
Line Freedom
n is the number of vertexes.
Rectangle 24
16 + 4 × n
Polygon n is the number of vertexes.
(Start and end points are counted as one of vertexes.)
Circle (ellipse) 24
Arc (ellipse arc) 32
Sector 36
Painting of enclosed area 16
Figure data in bitmap file
20 + data capacity of bitmap file
format
28 + 2 (n + 1)
n is the number of characters
Text
(memory capacity in the left regardless of 2 byte/1 byte
character)
128 × n
High quality font
n is the number of characters.
Scale 24
Report figure (line) 64 for rules of 32 × 32 dots
Report figure (text) 16 + 4 × (number of characters ÷ 2)

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

Figure Memory capacity (byte)
Line 20
Rectangle 24
Circle 24
Figure data in bitmap file
20 + data capacity of bitmap file
format
34 + n
Text
n is the number of characters

4 - 33 4 - 33
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions

4.3.1 Types of and restrictions on object functions for setting

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This section explains the object function types.

Restrictions on the object functions are marked " ".
Refer to Chapter5 for details of the object functions.
: Allowed for setting, : Not allowed for setting
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900
Function Details Refer To
A9 GOT GT SoftGOT series
Function that displays the data stored in the word device in a
numerical value.
Numerical
The display color and attributes can be changed according to Section 5.1.1
display
the monitor device value or specified device status (ON/OFF,
device value).
Function that displays the status of multiple word devices in
Data list numerical values on the table.
Section 5.1.2
display Designation of one row out of 5 rows maximum as a sort key
allows sorting of display according to the set priority.
Function that displays character strings, acknowledging data
ASCII display stored continuously in the word device as character code Section 5.1.3
(ASCII code).
Function that displays the clock data of the PLC CPU.
(When GT SoftGOT is used, the clock data of the personal
Clock display computer appears. When the GOT-F900 series is used, the Section 5.1.4
clock data of the GOT appears.)
This can be displayed in the form of time/date.
Function that displays comments in relation to the bit device
Comment ON/OFF and the designated range of the word device.
Section 5.2.1
display Comment can be displayed in multiple lines for the display
area.
Function that displays the time and the comment of ON status
Alarm history 7 and being in the designated range in relation to the comment
Section 5.2.2
display of the ON status of the designated bit device and the
designated range of the word device.
Alarm list Function that displays a warning for error on PLC CPU, data
display(sys- link/network and GOT. Section 5.2.3
tem alarm)
Alarm list Function that displays comment of the ON bit device in the
display(user order of priority in relation to the comments of multiple bit Section 5.2.3
alarm) devices.
Function that displays the specified part/screen or the
part/screen associated with the ON/OFF of the bit device or
the value of the word device. (The function to display a part
Part display Section 5.3.1
on the base screen is available for the GOT-A900 only.)
It can also displays the figure in BMP/DXF file format as a
part.
Function that displays the movement/locus of the part figure
Part
associated with the bit device ON/OFF, word device value or
movement Section 5.3.2
specified device status (ON/OFF, device value) in the
display
specified movement method.
Function that changes the lamp illumination color according to
Lamp display the monitor device value or specified device status (ON/OFF, Section 5.3.3
device value).
Function that displays the value of the word device on the
Panel meter meter with the ratio for the upper/lower limits.
Section 5.3.4
display When the value of the monitoring devices reaches a certain
value, the color of the meter panel can be changed.
Function that collects the data stored in the word device at the
Trend graph 5 designated timing and displays it on the trend graph. When
Section 5.4.1
display the graph is displayed to the screen range, the screen scrolls
for further display.

4 - 34 4 - 34
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900

Function Details Refer To
A9 GOT GT SoftGOT series
Line graph 5 Function that collects the data of multiple word devices in a
Section 5.4.2
display batch and displays the line graph.
Bar graph Function that displays the data stored in multiple word devices
Section 5.4.3
display with a bar graph.
Statistical 5 Function that collects the data of multiple word devices and
Section 5.4.4
graph display displays the percentage of each word device data in graph.
Function that gathers the data stored in the word devices
Scatter chart
associated with the X and Y axes and displays them as a Section 5.4.5
display
scatter chart.
Function that displays the word device value in level with the
Level display Section 5.4.6
ratio for upper/lower limits.
Function that performs bit device ON/OFF, word device value
5
Touch key changing, screen switching, etc. according to the touch keys Section 5.5
touched.
Numerical Function that inputs the desired value into the designated
Section 5.6.1
input word device.
Function that inputs the desired ASCII code into the
ASCII input Section 5.6.2
designated word device.
The hardcopy function enables you to capture and print out a
GOT monitor screen, and save to a PC card using
1, 5, 10 3, 5
Hardcopy BMP/JPEG-type data file by setting a bit device to ON/OFF or Section 5.8.1
by touching the touch key set in the Touch key (Extended)
settings
1 2, 5 Function that writes the data from the bar code reader into the
Barcode Section 5.8.8
PLC CPU.
System Function that checks the GOT operation status with the PLC
Section 5.8.2
information CPU.
Function that writes data to the PLC CPU when the specified
Observe
condition is enabled (ON/OFF of specified bit device, word Section 5.8.3
Status
device value range designation).
Function that displays the comments of the ON bit device in
Floating Alarm
the order of occurrence from right to left on the base screen in Section 5.8.4
display
relation to the comments of multiple bit devices.
Function that sets the device as a monitoring device, writes
7 the designated data into the device, saves the designated
Recipe Section 5.8.5
device range into the memory card, and writes it into the PLC
CPU.
Function that reproduces the voice file in WAV format and
4, 7
Sound provides a touch sound on the touch key or sounds in status Section 5.8.6
monitoring function.
2 Function that displays the test window during display of the
Test Section 5.8.7
monitoring screen to change the device value.
Function that retrieves other screen on the current screen for
Overlap
overlap display. The retrieved screen is displayed in green Section 5.9.1
screen
frames.
Operation 7 Function that allows operation from outside the GOT using an
Section 5.8.9
panel operation panel connected.
Function that gathers and prints numerical data stored in the
1, 7, 8 word devices or the buffer memory of a special function
Report Section 5.7
module, or to print numerical data and comments associated
with bit device ON/OFF.
9 3, 5 Function that performs operation, such as device write, at the
Time action Section 5.8.10
specified time of the day of the week.
Function that collects data in the specified cycle or under the
Sampling Section 5.8.11
bit condition and displays them in a graph or the like.
Function that can control the GOT display with the GOT's Section 5.8.12
Script
original programs (scripts). Chapter 7
1: Unusable on the A950 handy GOT.
2: Unusable on the F940 handy GOT.
3: Unusable on the F930GOT.
4: Not used on the A95 GOT/A956WGOT.

4 - 35 4 - 35
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

5: Unusable on the F920GOT.

6: When using any of the functions, you always need to install the corresponding extended OS in the GOT.

Function Extended function OS

Report function Extended function OS (report)
Hard copy function Extended function OS (ESC printer/PCL printer)
Recipe function Extended function OS (recipe)
Sound function Extended function OS (sound)
Bar code function Extended function OS (bar code)
Operation panel function Extended function OS (external key input)

7: When using any of the following object functions, you need to fit necessary equipment for the corresponding function.

A985GOT/A97 GOT/
Function name A956WGOT A95 GOT
A960GOT
When using SRAM card:
Memory card interface unit Memory card
Alarm history For PC card save Unnecessary When using compact flash interface unit
display function/ PC card: (SRAM card only)
hard copy function Option unit unnecessary
For history printing/
Unnecessary Printer interface unit
printout
Use the applicable model
Unnecessary Unnecessary (A95 GOT- BD-M3/
Report function
A950 handy GOT).
Report printing Unnecessary Printer interface unit
Use the applicable model
Memory board Memory board (A95 GOT- BD-M3/
Recipe function
A950 handy GOT).
For PC card save Unnecessary Printer interface unit
Memory board and
Sound function Unusable Unusable
external speaker
Operation panel External I/O unit

Among the above units, either only one memory card interface unit or one printer interface unit may be fitted to the A95 GOT/
A956WGOT.
When using the alarm history display function, therefore, note that PC card save and history printing cannot be functioned
simultaneously.
(Enabled when the compact flash PC card is used with the A956WGOT.)
8: Logging report cannot be used with the A95*GOT/A956WGOT.
(Enabled when the compact flash PC card is used with the A956WGOT.)
9: When the target PLC CPU has no clock data, the time action function is unusable.
(Since GT SoftGOT uses the clock data of the personal computer, the time action function can be used if the target PLC CPU has no
clock data.)
10: A95*GOT cannot do 256-color printing.
11: Can be used for setting the function switches of the F920GOT (with keypad), F930GOT (with keypad) and ET-940.

4 - 36 4 - 36
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.3.2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The following indicate the main specifications of the functions.

In the following tables, the maximum setting points and used memory spaces assume
that the setting items are all default values.
When data operation, display method and/or other settings are made to increase the
following memory space, the number of points that can be set may decrease.

(1) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

Max.

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
During ON/OFF

Word device
Function setting Used memory space

Expression
Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Display attributes Others

Rise/Fall
Ordinary

Security
Range

points per (bytes)

screen

Display format/number of display

digits
Shape, Frame, Plate, Decimal : 1 to 13
Numerical
512 24 Numeral, Blink, Hexadecimal : 1 to 8
Display
Reverse Octal : 1 to 6
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Display format/number of display
1 digits
(not Shape, Frame, Plate, Decimal : 1 to 13
Data list 32 + 12 (row + 1) 6
allowed for Title, Color, Rule, Hexadecimal : 1 to 8
display devices
window Reverse Octal : 1 to 6
screen) Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Shape, Frame, Plate,
ASCII display 256 8 + Text Digits:1 to 80
Color, Blink, Reverse
Data format
Shape, Frame, Plate, yy/mm/dd
Clock display 2 8
Color dd/mm/yy
mm/dd/yy
16 + 4 registered • Max. number of comments
comments + (2 total registered: 32767
Style, Color, Solid,
characters) • Max. number of characters set
Comment Reverse, Blink, High
(values in ( ) are to 1 comment: 512 characters
quality font
converted to the multiple (independently of character
number of 4.) size)
Max. number of characters set
Comment Shape, Frame, Size,
256 24 to 1 comment: 512 characters
display Blink
(independently of character size)
1 Max. number of monitor points
(not 80 + (2 title characters Bit Device: 3072
Alarm history Shape, Frame, Plate,
allowed for + 4) display items + Word Device
display Title, Rule
window 16 devices (16 Bit): 1024
screen) (32 Bit): 512

4 - 37 4 - 37
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

Max.

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
During ON/OFF

Word device
Function setting Used memory space

Expression
Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Rise/Fall
Display attributes Others

Ordinary

Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

Alarm list
display Shape, Frame, Plate, Max. number of display
1 184
(System Size characters: 60 characters
alarm)
Max. number of monitor points
24
Alarm list Consecutive bit device
(Memory Shape, Frame, Plate,
display 152 + devices 24 : 8192 points
saving Size
(User alarm) 3 Random bit device
16) 1
: 512 points
Display mode
(Overwrite/XOR), Type
Part Display 256 44 Positioning (Top- Part/Mark/Base Screen/Window
left/Center), Color, screen
Blink
Movement Mode
(Position/Line/Point),
Part Display mode
Type
Movement 256 60 (Locus/Movement),
Part/Mark
display Positioning (Top-
left/Center), Color,
Blink
Shape (Basic
figure/Free figure),
High quality font,
Lamp
256 24 Frame, Lamp,
display
Background, Pattern,
Blink, Text, Style,
Color, Solid, V H
Meter type
Shape, Frame, Plate,
1/4 Circle
Needle, Meter panel,
(Top/Bottom/Left/Right/Right
Panel meter Text, Size, Color,
256 40 top/Left top/Left Bottom)
display High quality font,
1/2 Circle
Scale display, Scale
(Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
points
3/4 Circle, Circle
24 Shape, Frame, Plate,
Trend graph (Memory Scale display, Scale • Max. number of graphs : 8
76 + devices 2
display saving points, Graph, Style, • Max. number of points : 100
3
16) Width
32
Shape, Frame, Plate,
(Locus
Line graph Scale display, Scale • Max. number of graphs : 8
Mode: 1 76 + devices 2
display points, Graph, Style, • Max. number of points : 500
per 1 4
Width
Project)
Shape, Frame, Plate,
Bar graph
256 220 Graph, Pattern, Max. number of graphs: 8
display
Background

4 - 38 4 - 38
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

Max.

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
During ON/OFF

Word device
Function setting Used memory space

Expression
Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Rise/Fall
Display attributes Others

Ordinary

Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

Shape, Frame, Plate,

No. of Partitions,
Statistical
Direciton, Scale Graph:
graph 32 444
display, Scale points, Rectangle graph/Circle graph
display
Graph, Pattern,
Background
• Graph type:
Sample/batch display
• Number of points that may be
saved into memory: 2000
points (For batch display, the
24 Shape, Frame, Graph
128 + 4 number of above number of points is the
(Memory frame, Plate, Display
Scatter chart stored memories total of the number of batch-
saving mode, Graph display
(number of points + 1) 3 3 displayed points the number
16) 1 form (type/size/color)
of collection times)
• Max. cumulative count (point
device data format):
9999 (16 bit, BCD value)
65535 (other than above)
Boundary, Level,
Level display 256 40 Pattern, Backgroud,
Graph, Pattern
• Display trigger
Shape, Frame,
Key/Bit/Word
Switch, Pattern,
256 (10) • Action
Touch key 40 Backgroud Style,
1 2 Key code/Bit/Word/
Color, Solid, V H, 5
Extended/Base/Window/
Text, High quality font
Station No./Buzzer
Format type/Format digits
Decimal : 1 to 13
Shape, Frame, Plate,
Numerical Hexadecimal : 1 to 8
256 32 Numeral, Blink,
Input Octal : 1 to 6
Reverse
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Shape, Frame, Plate, Digits
ASCII input 256 8 + characters
Color, Blink, Reverse 1 to 80
When stored onto PC card:
Hardcopy 1 44
Max. 9999 files
Barcode 32
System
1
information

4 - 39 4 - 39
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

Max.

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
During ON/OFF

Word device
Function setting Used memory space

Expression
Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Rise/Fall
Display attributes Others

Ordinary

Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

64 + 36 (set number
of conditions) + 16
512/ (number of indirect Max. number of points for write
Screen, device and bit ALT device operation
Observe 512/ points in all conditions) + Bit momentary, bit RST, bit SET,
Status Project 16 (total of write bit ALT: 40
in device points in all Data SET (16 bits): 20
common conditions) + 20 Data SET (32 bits): 10
(number of conditions
with word ranges)
8+4
sum of
When
devices in
stored in the
each recipe
internal
file + 108
memory
number
of recipe file
149
• Max. recipe operation:
number of
256 points
recipe files
• Max. number of points for write
Recipe +9
operation
sum of
16 bits: 8192
number of
When 32 bits: 4096
16 bit
stored in the
devices in
PC card
each recipe
file + 14
sum of 32
bit devices
in each
recipe file
Sound 100 128 Max. number of sound files: 100
Test
Max. number of monitor device
points
Floating
1 Consecutive bit devices:
alarm 80 Character size
(1Project) 512 points
display 4
Random bit devices:
255 points
Overlap
2047 80 + Depending on object
screen
Operation
1 128
panel
Print format, number • Report type
Numeri-
256 44 of print digits, number Real-time continuous/logging
cal
Report

of fraction digits page renewal

• Report screen:
Comment 256 48 number of print digits Up to 8 screens may be
created per project.

Time action operation

Time action 32 1592
Max. setting count: 32

4 - 40 4 - 40
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
Max.

During ON/OFF

Word device

Expression
Function setting Used memory space

Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Rise/Fall
Ordinary
Display attributes Others

Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

(36 + (40 number of

project scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
base screen calls set) +
(40 number of
displayed base screen
scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
window screen 1 calls
set) + (40 number of
displayed window screen
Script 256
1 scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
window screen 2 calls
set) + (40 number of
displayed window screen
2 scripts set) + (36
number of displayed
superimpose screen calls
set) + (40 number of
displayed superimpose
screen scripts set) 5
Gateway
setting
Server 20 + 20 number of
32768
setting assigned devices
Client 16 + 20 number of set
128
setting GOTs to be monitored
20 + 4 (number of
Mail send destinations + 2) + 2
96 (total number of
setting
destination, subject and
From characters)
FTP server 12 + 2 (total number
setting of login name and
password characters)

1 The number within parentheses indicates the maximum number of set points at the maximum setting of the setting item.
2 For the touch keys to which ON/OFF delays were set, the maximum number of set points is 100 points.
3 Unusable only when the memory storage function is used.
4 Operates only during ON.
5 The capacity of the script function set to each window is 0 bytes if the window screen is not displayed.

(a) Memory capacity for setting of high quality font

The memory capacity of high quality font is 128 bytes for 1 character
regardless of the character size.

(b) Maximum setting count when the cycle trigger is set for the
display
The maximum setting count in one screen for the cycle trigger is 100
points.

(c) Maximum setting count of objects

The maximum setting count of objects in one screen is 512 points.
If 513 or more objects are set in one screen, note that 513th object
becomes invalid.

4 - 41 4 - 41
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(d) Data capacity of object stored on PC card/Hard disk

1) Capacities of data stored on the PC card (When using the A985/97 /
960 / 95 /956WGOT)
Depending on the object used, it has a function which can store data on
the PC card.
The following table lists the capacity of data stored onto the PC card on
an object basis.
Object Name Data Capacity (Bytes)
Report function (Number of devices 8 + 36) + ((number of devices 8 + 8) collection count)
When 3072 points of alarm history displays are saved
Alarm history function In Cumulative mode (Store CSV format) : Approx,.97k bytes (Approx,.400k bytes)
In History mode (Store CSV format) : Approx,.72k bytes (Approx,.360k bytes)
Data capacity per screen (see below) number of screens stored
Data Capacity per Screen (Kbytes)
Model At BMP file At JPEG file
A985GOT-V 470.0 (video window: 1406.3) 133.4
A985GOT 470.0 113.9
A975GOT 301.0 86.6
A970GOT-TB 150.0 86.6
Hard copy function A970GOT-SB 150.0 84.5
A970GOT-LB 37.6
A960GOT 37.6
A956WGOT 110.0 33.2
A95 GOT-TBD 76.1 26.8
A95 GOT-SBD 37.6 27.6
A95 GOT-LBD 9.4

117 number of recipe files + 9 sum of 16-bit devices in each recipe file + 14 sum of 32-
Recipe function
bit devices in each recipe file
2) Capacities of data stored on the hard disk (When using the GT SoftGOT)
Some objects have the function to store data on the hard disk of the
personal computer.
The following table indicates the capacities of data stored on the
personal computer hard disk object-by-object.
Object Name Data Capacity (Bytes)
(Number of collection times + (number of 1 page-printable data collection times - 1))/
Report function number of 1 page-printable data collection times) ((number of header lines + 1) data
size on 1 line) + number of collection times (repeated lines data size on 1 line)
Data size per line (see below) (number of printing times (number of occurrence, recovery,
check times) + 1)
Model Data Capacity (Bytes)
History mode 80
Alarm history function Cumulative mode (status only) 79
Cumulative mode
88
(cumulative time or occurrence time, status)
Cumulative mode
97
(cumulative time, occurrence time, status)

Data capacity per screen (see below) number of screens stored

Data Capacity per Screen
Model (dot) Data Capacity (Kbytes)
Hard copy function SoftGOT (1280 1024) 1281.0
SoftGOT (1024 768) 767.0
SoftGOT (800 600) 469.8
SoftGOT (640 480) 301.0

117 number of recipe files + 9 sum of 16-bit device points of all recipe files + 14 sum of
Recipe function
32-bit device points of all recipe files

4 - 42 4 - 42
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(2) When the GOT-F900 series is used

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

Max.

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
During ON/OFF

Word device
Function setting Used memory space

Expression
Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Rise/Fall
Display attributes Others

Ordinary

Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

Display format/number of display

digits
Decimal : 1 to 32
Numerical Shape, Frame, Plate,
50 32 Hexadecimal : 1 to 32
Display Numeral
Octal : 1 to 32
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
ASCII Shape, Frame, Plate,
10 32 number of display digits: 1 to 40
display Color
Data format
Clock Shape, Frame, Plate,
10 28 yy/mm/dd, dd/mm/yy, mm/dd/yy,
display Color
Type1, Type2
Max. number of characters set
Comment Word: 36 to 1 comment:
50 Shape, Frame, Size
display Bit: 44 512 characters (independently of
character size)
Alarm history Shape, Frame, Plate, Max. number of monitor points
1 32
display Title Bit devices: 256 points
Alarm list Max. number of monitor points
Shape, Frame, Plate,
display 1 32 Consecutive bit devices:
Size
(User alarm) 255 points
Display mode (Replay),
Word: 32 Type
Part display 50 Positioning (Top-
Bit: 36 Part/Mark
left/Center), Color
Lamp Frame, Lamp, Text,
50 32
display Color, V H
Meter type
1/4 Circle
Shape, Frame, Plate, (Top/Bottom/Left/Right/Right
Panel meter
50 40 Needle, Meter panel, top/Left top/Left Bottom)
display
Scale display 1/2 Circle
(Top/Bottom/Left/Right)
3/4 Circle, Circle
Shape, Frame, Plate,
Trend graph 40 + 2 Number of • Max. number of graphs : 4
1 Graph, Style, Scale
display graph lines • Max. number of points : 50
display
Shape, Frame, Plate,
Line graph 36 + 2 Number of • Max. number of graphs : 4
1 Graph, Style, Scale
display graph lines • Max. number of points : 50
display
Bar graph Shape, Frame, Plate,
50 44 Max. number of graphs: 1
display Graph, Scale display

4 - 43 4 - 43
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Specifications
Display/operation Monitor/write Option
triggers devices functions

Station number changing

ON/OFF Sampling

Offset designation
Max.

During ON/OFF

Word device
Function setting Used memory space

Expression
Bit Trigger

Bit device
Sampling

Rise/Fall
Ordinary
Display attributes Others

Security
Range
points per (bytes)
screen

Shape, Frame, Plate,

Statistical
No. of Partitions, Graph:
graph 1 28 + devices
Direciton, Graph, Scale Rectangle graph/Circle graph
display
display
• Display trigger
Shape, Frame, Switch, Key/Bit
Touch key 50 28
Color, V H, Text • Action
Key code/Bit/Word/Base
Display format/number of display
digits
Decimal : 1 to 32
Numerical Shape, Frame, Plate,
50 48 Hexadecimal : 1 to 32
Input Numeral
Octal : 1 to 32
Binary : 1 to 32
Real : 1 to 32
Shape, Frame, Plate, number of display digits
ASCII input 10 32
Color 1 to 20
Hardcopy 1 24
40/ Max. number of points for write
Screen, operation
Observe 40/ Bit momentary, bit RST, bit SET,
8 + 28 setting points
Status Project bit ALT: 40
in Data SET (16 bits): 20
common Data SET (32 bits): 10
• Max. recipe operation:
256 points
Recipe • Max. number of points for write
operation
16 bits: 4000
Max. number of monitor device
Floating
points
alarm 1 80 Character size
Consecutive bit devices:
display
256 points
Overlap
Depending on object
Screen
Operation
panel
Time action operation
Time action
Max. setting count: 32
Sampling Storage count: Max. 2000 times

(a) The number of parts that may be displayed actually is as follows:

[Maximum setting points in the above list] = [base screen] + [overlap screen]
(b) The size of the memory capacity changes with the conditions (such as the
presence/absence of the display frame).
The above sizes are the minimum sizes of the corresponding parts.
(c) The built-in memory capacities of the GOT-F900 series are as follows.
• F940WGOT: 1M bytes
• F940GOT : 512k bytes
• F930GOT : 256k bytes
• F920GOT : 128k bytes

4 - 44 4 - 44
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.4 Overlap Setting

4.4.1 Figure and object

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

When the GOT is used for display, objects are displayed on figures regardless of the
setting order of objects.
4.4.2 About overlapping Objects

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

POINT
Make setting so that objects are not overlapped.
When the GOT is used for display, the overlap area is not displayed correctly.
However, overlapped objects can be set only in the case of the following
combinations.
(1) Combination of objects usable by overlapping with touch key
Objects created without the touch key, Numerical input and ASCII input can be
overlapped with the touch key.
POINT
When setting the touch key, set "Shape" to "No". Do not set "Text".
(2) Combination of objects usable by overlapping with level display
Objects created with numerical display and comment display can be overlapped
with the level display. (only one object for one level display function)
In this case, the display mode in numerical display and comment display must be
designated to "Transparent" or "XOR".
If not designated, "Transparent" becomes effective as the default.
(Ex. 1) When the display mode is designated to "Transparent"
It is effective when using a color display.

25 50 98

(Ex. 2) When the display mode is designated to "XOR"

In contrast to the object in "Transparent", the overlap area of the level can
be inverted.
It is effective when using a black and white display.

FULL FULL

POINT
Numerical display or comment display placed over level display
• A numerical/comment display is not blinked (flickered).
• A numerical/comment display is not highlighted.
• A numerical/comment display may not be provided properly if it comes out of the
display frame of a level display.
• A numerical/comment display may not be provided properly if a frame figure has
been set to the numerical or comment display function.
• A numerical/comment display is updated only when a level display has changed.
A numerical/ comment display is not updated if only the monitor device value set
to that display is changed.

4 - 45 4 - 45
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.5 Available Devices

4.5.1 Internal devices of GOT

(1) GOT bit registers (GB), GOT data registers (GD)

These are the GOT's internal devices which may be used only within the GOT.
The GOT bit registers (GB) are bit devices and the GOT data registers (GD) are
word devices.
These devices are useful when you want to use devices in the following
processings which need not be passed through the PLC CPU.
• Screen switching device
• Script function work area
• Bar-code read value storage area

(2) GOT special registers (GS)

These are special registers designed for the GOT.
They store the GOT's internal information, communication conditions, script error
information, etc.
By monitoring these devices with various object functions and script functions,
you can gather various information of the GOT easily.
The following table lists the GOT special registers and device functions.
(a) Read devices
Device Function
GS0 Common information 1
GS1 Base screen information
GS2 to GS5 Reserved
GS6 CC-Link G4 station number
GS7 1-second binary counter
GS8 Monitor scan time
GS9 Reserved
GS10 Monitor scan counter
GS11 to GS13 Reserved
GS14 Script common information
GS15 Script error pointer
GS16 Script number
GS17 Error code
: :
: :
GS46 Script number
GS47 Error code
GS48 Script execution pointer
GS49 to GS79 Script execution number
GS80 to GS199 Reserved
GS200 to GS229 Gateway information
GS230 to GS251 Reserved
GS252 Error detection common information
GS253 to 383 Must not be used

• Common information 1 (GS0)

b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b0

b0 : Alternates between ON and OFF per communication

cycle.
b1 : Remains ON from base/window screen switching until
one cycle of on-screen setting processing is completed.
(This also applies to station number changing and
security level changing.)

4 - 46 4 - 46
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

b2 : Turns ON from when the base/window screen is changed

until one cycle of the on-screen status watching object
processing is completed. (This also applies to the case
where the station number is changed or the security level
is changed.)
b3 : Remains ON while the power-on initial screen appears.
b4 : Normally ON.
b5 : Normally OFF.
b6 to b15 : Reserved
• Base screen information (GS1)
b15 to b3 b2 b1 b0

b0 : Alternates between ON and OFF per communication

cycle of the base screen.
b1 : Remains ON from base screen switching until one cycle
of on-base screen setting processing is completed. (This
also applies to station number changing and security
level changing.)
b2 : Turns ON from when the base screen is changed until
one cycle of the on-screen status watching object
processing is completed. (This also applies to the case
where the station number is changed or the security level
is changed.)
b3 to b15 : Reserved
• CC-Link G4 station number (GS6)
Stores the station number of the AJ65BT-G4-S3 only once when the
GOT connected to the CC-Link network via the AJ65BT-G4-S3 is
powered on.
• 1-second binary counter (GS7)
Incremented every second immediately after power-on.
The user can write a specific value, from which the counter will start
incrementing. The value is stored in binary.
• Monitor scan time (GS8)
Stores in binary the time (ms) until one cycle of processing set on the
display screen is completed.
The data is updated upon completion of all processings set on the
screen.
Errors of about ±10ms may occur depending on the processing setting.
Also, the object not processed by the security function will not be the
target.
• Monitor scan time counter (GS10)
Incremented every time one cycle of processing set on the display screen
is completed.
• Script common information (GS14)
Stores the error information of the script functions.
b15 to b13 b12 b11 to b9 b8 b7 b6 to b1 b0

b0 : Turns ON at error occurrence.

b1 to b6 : Reserved
b7 : Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
b8 : Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
b9 to b11 : Reserved
b12 : Turns ON at communication error occurrence.
b13 to b15 : Reserved
4 - 47 4 - 47
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

• Script error pointer (GS15)

Stores the pointer value (16 to 46) which indicates the address where the
script error data (GS16 to 47) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time error data is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated
below.
"-1" "16" "18" "20" ..... "46" "16"

The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data (GS16 to
47) as indicated below.
Example 1) When GS15 is 16, error data is stored into GS16, 17.
Example 2) When GS15 is 46, error data is stored into GS46, 47.
• Script error data (GS16 to GS47)
Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due
order, starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
When an error occurs, a script number and error code are stored on a 2-
word basis as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the upper addresses are overwritten
in order.
• Script execution pointer (GS48)
Stores the pointer value (49 to 79) which indicates the address where a
script execution number (GS49 to 79) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time an execution number is stored, the pointer value changes as
indicated below.
"-1" "49" "50" "51" ..... "79" "49"

The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number
(GS49 to 79) as indicated below.
Example 1) When GS48 is 49, the execution number is stored into GS49.
Example 2) When GS48 is 79, the execution number is stored into GS79.
• Script execution number (GS49 t GS79)
Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history.
• Gateway information (GS200 to GS229)
Stores the error information when the gateway functions are used.
For details of the error definition stored, refer to the GOT-A900 Series
Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5
Compatible Gateway functions).
• Error detection common information (GS252)
b15 to b1 b0

b0 : Turns ON if an error is detected in the alarm information

file to be stored when executing PC card storage function
by alarm history display function.
The alarm information file is not stored into a PC card
while this bit is ON.
Turns OFF when the error detection common control
(GS452.b0) is turned ON.
Useful for error detection during file storage.
b1 to b15 : Must not be used.

4 - 48 4 - 48
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(b) Write devices

Device Function
GS384 Script common information
GS385 Script monitor time
GS386 to 399 Reserved
GS400 Gateway common control
GS401 to 449 Reserved
GS450 Monitor common control
GS451 Reserved
GS452 Error detection common control
GS453 to 499 Reserved
GS500 GT SoftGOT common information
GS501 to 511 Reserved

• Script common information (GS384)

Clears the script error data (GS16 to 47) or re-executes the script at error
stop.
b15 to b2 b1 b0

b0 : Turned ON to clear the script error data.

b1 : Re-executes the script that was at a stop due to error
occurrence.
When re-executing it, check/execute the following.
• Before starting re-execution, turn ON the bit 0 to clear
the error.
• Execute the script from its beginning, not from where it
had stopped.
• Since the device values remain unchanged as in the
stop status,
check the device values of the script before starting re-
execution.
• When the "trigger type" of the script is the "rise/fall" of a
device, turn
the trigger device from ON to OFF/OFF to ON again to
re-execute the script.
• Script monitor time (GS385)
Set the monitor time of one script in seconds.
If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is
stopped. (Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.

Setting Example Monitor Time

0 (default) 10 seconds
1 1 second
10 10 seconds
11 11 seconds

• Screen script initial operation (GS386)

Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the
following conditions is enabled.

4 - 49 4 - 49
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

• The screen script function is used.

• The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".
• Switching to the screen having scripts takes place.
For example, when the trigger type is Bit OFF to ON and its trigger bit is
ON at the setting of "0", the screen is changed and the screen scripts are
then executed once.
Bit Value of
Setting Example Trigger Type Initial Operation
Trigger
Bit OFF to ON ON
0 Performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF
Bit OFF to ON ON
Other than 0 Not performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF

• Gateway common information (GS400)

Clears the error information on the gateway functions stored in the
gateway information (GS200 to 229).
For details of the error definition stored, refer to the GOT-A900 Series
Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible
Gateway functions).
• Monitor common control (GS450)
b15 to b13 b12 b11 to b0

b0 to b11 : Reserved.
b12 : Controls the timing when the screen/station No. changes
by touch switch operation. This applies when multiple
actions including either of the bit Set/Reset/Alternate and
either of screen switching/station No. switching have
been set for a touch switch.
b13 to b15 : Reserved.

1) When multiple actions including either of bit Set/Reset/Alternate and

either of screen switching/station No. switching are set for a touch switch
When multiple actions including either of bit Set/Reset/Alternate and
either of screen switching/station No. switching are set for a touch
switch, the timing when the screen or station No. changes will vary
depending on the standard monitor OS version in GOT, as shown below.

Standard monitor version Standard monitor version

Setting item
9.0.7 or earlier 9.1.1 or later
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Set released touched
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Reset released touched
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Alternate released touched
Screen switching/Station
When the touch switch is released
No. switching + Momentary
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Word touched touched
Standard monitor version 9.0.7: Stored in GT Designer Version5 30G
edition
Standard monitor version 9.1.1: Stored in GT Designer Version5 31H
edition.

4 - 50 4 - 50
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Example) When multiple actions including followings are set for a touch
switch.
When multiple actions including both screen switching and bit
Alternate are set for a touch switch, the device status after
screen change is reversed between standard monitor version
9.0.7 or earlier and 9.1.1 or later.
(However, when bit Momentary is set with other actions for a
touch switch, the same operation as standard monitor version
9.0.7 or earlier is performed.)
Bit Alternate : M100
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 2 when
M100 turns ON.
Screen switching : Screen changes to base screen 1 when
M100 turns OFF.

• Action when standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier is used.

For standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier, the screen or station No.
changes simultaneously when the specified bit device has turned
ON/OFF/ON OFF. The GOT operates based on the value after the bit
Set/Reset/Alternate is executed.

Base screen 50 Base screen 2 Base screen 2 Base screen 1

M100 M100 M100 M100

M100 turns ON when The screen changes M100 turns OFF when The screen changes
the touch switch is when the touch switch the touch switch is when the touch switch
touched. is released. touched again. is released.

• Action when standard monitor version 9.1.1 or earlier is used.

For standard monitor version 9.1.1 or later, the screen or station No.
changes simultaneously when the specified bit device has turned
ON/OFF/ON OFF. The GOT operates based on the value before the
bit Set/Reset/Alternate is executed.

Base screen 50 Base screen 1 Base screen 1 Base screen 2

M100 M100 M100 M100

M100 turns ON and the screen M100 turns OFF and the screen
changes when the touch switch changes when the touch switch
is touched. (The operation is is touched. (The operation is
based on the value (M100: OFF) based on the value (M100: ON)
before the bit Alternate is executed.) before the bit Alternate is executed.)

<Corrective action>
The same operation as standard monitor version 9.0.7 or earlier is
performed by turning the GOT internal device (GS450.b12) ON before
pressing the touch switch.

4 - 51 4 - 51
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

GS450.b12
Setting item
ON OFF
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Set released touched
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Reset released touched
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Alternate released touched
Screen switching/Station
When the touch switch is released
No. switching + Momentary
Screen switching/Station When the touch switch is When the touch switch is
No. switching + Word touched touched

The following example shows how to make the settings so that the status
observation function will work to automatically turn GS450.b12 ON after the
GOT is powered ON.

<Example of setting the status observation function>

Make the following settings in the “Status Observation” screen.
The GOT internal device (device that is always ON: GS0.b4) functions as
a trigger.
GS450.b12 turns ON when the trigger is ON.
With this settings, the status observation function works and GS450.b12
turns ON after the GOT is powered ON.
For details of observation function, refer to the .corresponding
information, which is obtainable by using the GT Designer Help function.
• Make the settings in the
“Project” tab within the
“Status Observation” screen.

• Put the settings in the first

line. (GS450.b12 turns ON
right after the GOT is
powered ON.)

• Set “Observe Cycle” to

“Ordinary”.

• Error detection common control (GS452)

b15 to b1 b0

b0 : Turns ON to turn the error detection common information

(GS252.b0) OFF.
b1 to b15 : Must not be used.
• GT SoftGOT common information (GS500)
b15 to b1 b0

b0 : Turning this bit ON displays the dialog box used to exit

from GT SoftGOT.
Turns OFF when exit is canceled in the dialog box.

4 - 52 4 - 52
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.5.2 Device ranges available for the GOT-A900 series

The devices available for each object function of the GOT-A900 series depend on the
connection target CPU and connection form.
Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form
bases.

(1) QCPU (A Mode), ACPU

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M8191
Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191
Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF
Special internal relay (M) M9000 to M9255
Bit device

Contact (TT) TT0 to TT2047

Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC2047
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF
Designated bit of the following word
Word device bit devices (except for index register and
buffer memory)
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Data register (D) D0 to D8191
Special data register (D) D9000 to D9255
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN2047
Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN1023
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF
File register (R) R0 to R8191
Word device

Block 1 to 255
Extended file register (ER)
Device R0 to R8191
(Z) Z0 to Z6 (Z0 = Z)
Index register 2
(V) V0 to V6 (V0 = V)
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1
Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM) 1 BM0 to BMn
Converting the above bit devices to words
Bit device word 3 4
(except for timer and counter)
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit.
2 Writing to the index register is prohibited during computer link connection.
3 Use a multiple of 16 for setting device number.
4 If converting the special internal relay (M) to a bit device word, regard 9000 as 0 and use a
multiple of 16 for the device number.
(Example) M9000, M9016, M9240

4 - 53 4 - 53
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(2) QCPU (Q Mode), QnACPU

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) 7 M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767
Timer 7
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Bit device

Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767

Counter 7
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF
Designated bit of the following word
Word device bit devices (except for index register and
buffer memory)
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Data register (D) 7 D0 to D32767
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF
Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN) SN0 to SN32767
Word device

Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF

File register (R) 1, 2 R0 to R32767
Block 0 to 31
Extended file register (ER) 1
Device R0 to R32767
Extended file register (ZR) 1, 3, 4 ZR0 to ZR1042431
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM) 5 BM0 to BMn
Bit device word 6 Converting the above bit devices to words
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer when multiple programs are executed with the file of the
file register set at "Use the same file name as the program" by the PLC parameter of GX
Developer. (With exceptions of MELSEC-QnA).
Otherwise, read/write at GOT will be erroneous.
2 Available for file register of block No. switched with the RSET instruction.
3 Available for file register of block No. of file name switched with the QDRSET instruction.
4 GOT treats them in units of 32k (32767 points).
Make the setting not to break up the 32k-unit block when specifying the extension file register
(ZR) in the object settings.
In the case of incorrect setting, the error message "The specified device is outside the valid
range" will be displayed in the system alarm.
There is no range limit for the read/write by specifying the file register name with the recipe
function.
[Setting example]: When devices are specified consecutively (e.g. line graph); when 10 points are
specified

Correct: Head device: ZR32768 Wrong: Head device: ZR32767

ZR0 ZR0
Block 0 Block 0
to to

ZR32767 ZR32767 10 points are set

ZR32768 ZR32768 beyond ZR32767.
to to
Block 1 Block 1

4 - 54 4 - 54
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

5 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated.
Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit.
6 Set the device numbers in multiples of 16.
7 Do not use the local device set in a QCPU (Q mode) system.
Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed.

(3) Motion controller CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) 6 M0 to M8191
Bit device

Latch relay (L) L0 to 8191

Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047
Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF
Special relay (SM) 1 SM0 to SM255
Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Data register (D) 2, 3, 6 D0 to D32767
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF
Word device

Motion device 4 #0 to #8191

Bit device word 5 Converting the above bit devices to words
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 When setting the special internal relays M9000 to M9255, use SM as the device name, and the
value decreased by 9000 (i.e. 0 to 255) as the device number.
2 When setting the special data registers (D9000 to D9255), set them as they are, D9000 to D9255.
3 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are outside the range.
4 Cannot be monitored using GT SoftGOT.
5 Set the device number as a multiple of 16.
6 Do not use the local device set in a motion controller CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU) system.
Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed.

4 - 55 4 - 55
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(4) MELSEC-Q (Multi) / Q Motion

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) 11 M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767
Timer 11
Bit device
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767
Counter 11
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Special relay (SM) 7 SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer 11
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF
Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit
(Except Index register and Buffer memory)
Data register (D) 8, 9, 11 D0 to D32767
Special data register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF
Timer (current value) (TN) 11 TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN) 11 CN0 to CN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN) 11 SN0 to SN32767
Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF
Word device

File register (R) 1, 2 R0 to R32767

Block 0 to 255
Extended file register (ER) 1
Device R0 to R32767
Extended file register (ZR) 1, 3, 4 ZR0 to ZR1042431
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
Buffer memory (special function unit) (BM) 5 BM0 to BM32767
Ww Ww0 to WwFF
Wr Wr0 to WrFF
Motion device (#) 10 #0 to #8191
Bit device word 6 Converting the above bit devices to words

1 to *6(1) For details of *1 to *5, refer to "(2) QCPU (Q mode), QnACPU".

Q Motion
7 When setting special internal relay M9000 to M9255, use SM for the device name and set the
value subtracted 9000 for the device number (0 to 255).
8 The setting range is D9000 to D9255 when setting the special data register.
9 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are out of the valid setting range.
10 Monitoring is not available with GT SoftGOT2.

11 Do not use the local device set in a MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q motion system.
Otherwise normal monitoring is not performed.

4 - 56 4 - 56
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(5) CC-Link connection (Remote device)

Device name Available range for monitoring
Remove input (RX) X0 to X7FF
Remote output (RY) Y0 to Y7FF

Bit device
Bit designation of remote register write area (RWw) Ww0 to WwFF
Bit designation of remote register read area (RWr) Wr0 to WrFF
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Bit designation of GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
Remote register write area (RWw) Ww0 to WwFF
Word device

Remote register read area (RWr) Wr0 to WrFF

GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
Converting GOT bit register to word (GB) GB64 to GB16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

(6) FXCPU
Device number
Device name Available range for monitoring
expression
Input relay (X) X0000 to X0377
Octal notation
Output relay (Y) Y0000 to Y0377
Auxiliary relay (M) M0000 to M3071
Bit device

State (S) S0000 to S0999

Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8255 Decimal notation
Timer contact (T) T000 to T255
Counter contact (C) C000 to C255
Word device bit 1 ⎯
⎯
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Timer (current value) (T) T000 to T255
Counter (current value) (C) C000 to C255
Word device

Data register (D) D000 to D0999

RAM file register (D) D1000 to D7999
Decimal notation
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8255
Bit device word 2 3 ⎯
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 While the touch key function to which a word device bit is designated as the monitor device is
executed, do not write the word device in a sequence program.
2 Bit devices of the timer contact (T) and counter contact (C) cannot be converted to words.
3 Use a multiple of 16 for designating the device number.

4 - 57 4 - 57
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(7) Omron PLC

Available range for
Device name
monitoring
I/O relay
..0000 to 614315
Internal auxiliary relay
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915
Auxiliary memory relay (AR) AR00000 to AR95915
Holding relay (HR) HR00000 to HR51115
Bit device Internal holding relay (W) WR00000 to WR51115
Timer contact (TIM) 1 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter contact (CNT) 1 CNT0000 to CNT2047
Data memory (DM) 2 DM00000 to DM9999
Timer (current value) (TIM) 2 TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter (current value) (CNT) 2 CNT0000 to CNT2047
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
I/O relay 0000 to 6143
Data link relay (LR) LR000 to LR199
Auxiliary memory relay (AR) AR000 to AR959
Holding relay (HR) HR000 to HR511
Word device

Internal holding relay (W) WR000 to WR511

Data memory (DM) DM0000 to DM9999
Timer (current value) (TIM) TIM0000 to TIM2047
Counter (current value) (CNT) CNT0000 to CNT2047
Extended data memory (EM current bank) 3
EM0000 to EM9999
Extended data memory (EM banks 0 to 12) 3 4
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 When CV1000, CS1 and CJ1 is used, write cannot be performed.

2 When executing the touch key function with a word device bit specified as the monitor device, do
not perform write to that word device in a sequence program.
3 On extended data memory, write/read cannot be performed across banks.
4 When the CJ1 is used, EM 0 to 2 are usable.

4 - 58 4 - 58
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(8) Yasukawa PLC

(a) When using GL60S, GL60H, GL70H, GL120 or GL130
Device name Available range for monitoring
Coil O01 to O63424
Input relay I1 to I63424

Bit device
D1 to D2048
Link coil D10001 to D12048
D20001 to D22048
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input register Z1 to Z31840 1
W1 to W28291 2
Holding register
SW1 to SW28291 4
R1 to R2048
Word device

R10001 to R12048
R20001 to R22048
Link register
SR1 to SR2048 4
SR10001 to SR12048 4
SR20001 to SR22048 4
Constant register K1 to K4096 3
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Change the input register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to Z512. (Example of setting in default)
2 Change the input register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999. (Example of setting in default)
3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096. (Example of setting in default)
3 SR and SW are data format-ready registers (imaginary registers) that display the internal data of
the PLC using R and W.
The following are differences between SR, SW and R, W display values according to the internal
data values of the PLC.
PLC internal data (for 16 bits) SR, SW R, W
9999 9999 9999
1001 1001 1001
1000 1000 1000
999 999 999
0 0 0
-1 -1 32769
-999 -999 33767
-1000 -1000 33768
-1001 -1001 33769
-9999 -9999 42767

(b) When using CP-9200SH, MP-920, MP-930, MP-940

Device name Available range for monitoring
MB0 to MB4095F
MB40960 to MB8191F1 1
Coil
Bit device

MB245760 to MB28671F1 1
MB286720 to MB32767F1 1
Input relay IB0000 to IBFFFF
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input register IW0 to IW7FFF
Word device

Holding register MW0 to MW32767

GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Usable by only MP-940.

4 - 59 4 - 59
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(c) When using CP-9300MS (CP-9300MC incompatible)

Device name Available range for monitoring

Word device Bit device

Coil MB0 to MB3071F
Input relay IB0000 to IB3FF
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input register IW0 to IW3F
Holding register MW0 to MW3071
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

(d) When using CP-9300MS (CP-9300MC compatible)

Device name Available range for monitoring
Bit device

Coil OB0 to OB1023

Input relay IB0 to IB1023
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input register I0 to I63
Word device

Data register M0 to M2047

Output register o0 to o63
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

(e) When using CP-9200(H)

Device name Available range for monitoring
Bit device

Coil OB00000 to OB007FF

Input relay IB00000 to IB007FF
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input register IW00000 to IW007F
Output register OW0000 to OW007F
Word device

DW0000 to DW02047
Data register
ZD0000 to ZD02047 1
Common register MW0000 to MW7694
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 May be set only when CP-9200 is used.

(f) When using PROGIC-8

Device name Available range for monitoring
Coil o0001 to o2048 1
Bit device

Input relay I0001 to I0512

Link coil D0001 to D1024
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input register Z0001 to Z0128
W0001 to W2048
Holding register
Word device

SW0001 to SW2048
R0001 to R1024
Link register
SR0001 to SR1024
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 Internal coils N1 to N1536 may be set as o513 to o2048.

However, make setting to avoid o1 to o0512 from overlapping o513 to o2048.

4 - 60 4 - 60
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(9) Allen-Bradley PLC

(a) When using SLC500 series
Device name Monitoring range Device No. notation
B3:0/0 to B3:255/15
Bit (B)
B10:0/0 to B255:255/15
T4:0/14 to T4:255/14
T4:0/TT to T4:255/TT
Timer (timing bit) (TT)
T10:0/14 to T255:255/14
T10:0/TT to T255:255/TT
T4:0/13 to T4:255/13
T4:0/DN to T4:255/DN
Timer (completion bit) (TN)
T10:0/13 to T255:255/13
T10:0/DN to T255:255/DN
C5:0/15 to C5:255/15
C5:0/CU to C5:255/CU
Counter (up counter) (CU)
Bit device

C10:0/15 to C255:255/15
C10:0/CU to C255:255/CU Decimal
C5:0/14 to C5:255/14
C5:0/CD to C5:255/CD
Counter (down counter) (CD)
C10:0/14 to C255:255/14
C10:0/CD to C255:255/CD
C5:0/13 to C5:255/13
C5:0/DN to C255:255/DN
Counter (completion bit) (CN)
C10:0/13 to C255:255/13
C10:0/DN to C255:255/DN
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N)
N10:0 to N255:255
Designated bit of the following word
Word device bit
devices
GOT internal bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Bit (B) B3:0 to B3:255
T4:0.1 to T4:255.1
T4:0.PRE to T4:255.PRE
Timer (set value) (TP) 1
T10:0.1 to T255:255.1
T10:0.PRE to T255:255.PRE
T4:0.2 to T4:255.2
T4:0.ACC to T4:255.ACC
Timer (current value) (TA) 1
T10:0.2 to T255:255.2
T10:0.ACC to T255:255.ACC
Word device

C5:0.1 to C5:255.1
C5:0.PRE to C5:255.PRE Decimal
Counter (set value) (CP) 1
C10:0.1 to C255:255.1
C10:0.PRE to C255:255.PRE
C5:0.2 to C5:255.2
C5:0.ACC to C5:255.ACC
Counter (current value) (CA) 1
C10:0.2 to C255:255.2
C10:0.ACC to C255:255.ACC
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N) 1
N10:0 to N255:255
GOT internal data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data.

2 If the device specified is outside the range, the object set to the out-of-range device may not be
displayed. In that case, check and correct the device.

4 - 61 4 - 61
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(b) When using Micrologix 1000 series

Device name Monitoring range Device No. notation
Bit (B) B3:0/0 to B3:31/15
T4:0/14 to T4:39/14
Timer (timing bit) (TT)
T4:0/TT to T4:39/TT
T4:0/13 to T4:39/13
Timer (completion bit) (TN)
T4:0/DN to T4:39/DN
C5:0/15 to C5:31/15
Bit device Counter (up counter) (CU)
C5:0/CU to C5:31/CU
C5:0/14 to C5:31/14 Decimal
Counter (down counter) (CD)
C5:0/CD to C5:31/CD
C5:0/13 to C5:31/13
Counter (completion bit) (CN)
C5:0/DN to C5:31/DN
Integer (N) N7:0 to N7:104
Designated bit of the following
Word device bit
word devices
GOT internal bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Bit (B) B3:0 to B3:31
T4:0.1 to T4:39.1
Timer (set value) (TP) 1
T4:0.PRE to T4:39.PRE
T4:0.2 to T4:39.2
Timer (current value) (TA) 1
Word device

T4:0.ACC to T4:39.ACC
C5:0.1 to C5:39.1
Counter (set value) (CP) 1 Decimal
C5:0.PRE to D5:39.PRE
C5:0.2 to C5:31.2
Counter (current value) (CA) 1
C5:0.ACC to C5:31.ACC
Integer (N) N7:0 to N7:14 1
GOT internal data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data.
2 If the device specified is outside the range, the object set to the out-of-range device may not be
displayed. In that case, check and correct the device.

(c) When using Micrologix 1500 series

Device name Monitoring range Device No. notation
Bit (B) B3:0/0 to B255:255/15
T3:0/14 to T255:255/14
Timer (timing bit) (TT)
T3:0/TT to T255:255/TT
T3:0/13 to T255:255/13
Timer (completion bit) (TN)
T3:0/DN to T255:255/DN
C3:0/15 to C255:255/15
Counter (up counter) (CU)
Bit device

C3:0/CU to C255:255/CU
C3:0/14 to C255:255/14 Decimal
Counter (down counter) (CD)
C3:0CD to C255:255/CD
C3:0/13 to C255:255/13
Counter (completion bit) (CN)
C3:0/DN to T255:255/DN
Integer (N) N3:0 to N255:255
Designated bit of the following
Word device bit
word devices
GOT internal bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Bit (B) B3:0 to B255:255
T3:0.1 to T255:255.1
Timer (set value) (TP) 1
T3:0.PRE to T255:255.PRE
T3:0.2 to T255:255.2
Timer (current value) (TA) 1
Word device

T3:0.ACC to T255:255.ACC
C3:0.1 to C255:255.1
Counter (set value) (CP) 1 Decimal
C3:0.PRE to C255:255.PRE
C3:0.2 to C255:255.2
Counter (current value) (CA) 1
C3:0.ACC to C255:255.ACC
Integer (N) N3:0 to N255:255 1
GOT internal data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data.
2 If the device specified is outside the range, the object set to the out-of-range device may not be
displayed. In that case, check and correct the device.

4 - 62 4 - 62
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(10) Sharp PLC

Device name Setting monitor Device No. notation
0 to 15777
I/O relay
20000 to 75777
Timer counter (contact) T/C0000 to T/C1777
T/C0000 to T/C1777
Timer counter (current value)
(b0000 to b3776)
09000 to 09776
19000 to 19776
29000 to 29776
39000 to 39776
49000 to 49776
59000 to 59776
69000 to 69776
79000 to 79776
89000 to 89776
Register
99000 to 99776
Octal
E0000 to E0776
E1000 to E1776
E2000 to E2776
E3000 to E3776
E4000 to E4776
E5000 to E5776
E6000 to E6776
E7000 to E7776
1000000 to 1177776
2000000 to 2177776
3000000 to 3177776
File register 4000000 to 4177776
5000000 to 5177776
6000000 to 6177776
7000000 to 7177776

4 - 63 4 - 63
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(11) Toshiba PLC

(a) PROSEC T Series
Device name Available range for setting monitor
External input (X) X0000 to X511F
External output (Y) Y0000 to Y511F
Internal relay (R) R0000 to R999F
Bit device Special relay (S) S0000 to S255F
Link register relay (Z) Z0000 to Z999F
Link relay (L) L0000 to L255F
Timer (contact) (T) 4 T000 to T999
Counter (contact) (C) 4 C000 to C511
Designated bit of the following word devices (except timer
Word device bit 5
(current value) and counter (current value))
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
External input (X) XW000 to XW511
External output (Y) YW000 to YW511
Internal relay (R) RW000 to RW999
Special relay (S) SW000 to SW255
Link register relay (Z) ⎯ 3
Link relay (L) LW000 to LW255
Word device

Timer (current value) (T) 4 T000 to T999

Counter (current value) (C) 4 C000 to C511
Data register (D) 2 D0000 to D8191
Link register (W) W0000 to W2047
File register (F) F0000 to F32467 1
Conversion of the above bit devices to words (except link
Bit device word register relay, timer (contact) and counter (contact))
GOT data register (GD)
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 The extended file register is not supported.
2 When the mode switch on the CPU module is set to "P-RUN", D0000 to D4095 are write disabled.
3 The Z relay corresponds to 1 bit in 1000 words from W registers 0 to 999.
4 The contacts and current values of the timers/counters are written after they have been read
once. During that period, therefore, do not change them in the sequence program.
5 The bit of the word device is designated after it has been read once. During that period, therefore,
do not change it in the sequence program.

4 - 64 4 - 64
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(b) PROSEC V Series

The representations of the device addresses set differ between Toshiba
PLC's peripheral software and GOT as indicated below. Make setting after
converting the Toshiba side addresses into the GOT side addresses.

Available range for setting/monitoring Available range for setting/monitoring

Device name
(GOT side address) (Toshiba side address)
Special register (S) 3 S0000 to S511F S0000 to S8191
Bit device

Data register (R) 3 R00000 to R4095F R00000 to R65535

Specified bit of the following word devices
Word device bit 1, 3
(Except data register (R))
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383 -
16 bits: SW000 to SW511
SW000 to SW511
Special register (SW) 4 32 bits: SD000 to SD255 (integer)
(SW000 to SW510: 32 bits)
32 bits: SF000 to SF255 (real number)
16 bits: RW0000 to RW4095
Data register (RW) RW0000 to RW4095
Word device

32 bits: RD0000 to RD2047 (integer)

2, 4 (RW0000 to RW4094: 32 bits)
32 bits: RF0000 to RF2047 (real number)
16 bits: DW0000 to DW4095
Data register (D) D0000 to D4095
32 bits: DD0000 to DD2047 (integer)
2, 4 (D0000 to D4094: 32 bits)
32 bits: DF0000 to DF2047 (real number)
Bit device word Converting the above bit devices into words
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383 -
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511 -

1 Specify the word device bit after the GOT has read it once.
Note that if you make a change in the sequence program before that, the specifying
destination will be changed.
2 RW0000 and D0000 differ in representation but indicate the data registers in the same
region.
3 Use the following method to convert the device address into the one represented by the
GOT for bit data.
Toshiba address representation/16=word address (quotient) ... bit address (remainder)

Toshiba side address representation GOT side address representation Conversion expression
S511 F
S8191 8191/16=511...15
(Decimal)(Hexadecimal)
R4095 F
R65535 65535/16=4095...15
(Decimal)(Hexadecimal)

4 Use the following method to convert the device address into the one represented by the
GOT for word data.

Data format Toshiba side address representation GOT side address representation
16-bit data DW10 D10
DD10
(Integer) D20
(Calculate device No. in increments of 32 bits)
32-bit data
DF10
(Real number) D20
(Calculate device No. in increments of 32 bits)

4 - 65 4 - 65
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(12) SIEMENS PLC connection

(a) SIMATIC S7-300 series
Device name Available range for monitoring
Input relay I0000 to I1277

Bit device
Output relay Q0000 to Q1277
Bit memory M0000 to M2557
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input relay IW000 to IW126
Output relay QW000 to QW126
Bit memory MW000 to MW254
Timer (present value) T000 to T127
Counter (present value) C00 to C63
D000100000 to D000108190
Word device

D000200000 to D000208190
D000300000 to D000308190
•
Data register
•
•
D012600000 to D012608190
D012700000 to D012708190
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

(b) SIMATIC S7-400 series

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input relay I0000 to I5117
Bit device

Output relay Q0000 to Q5117

Bit memory M00000 to M20477
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
Input relay IW000 to IW510
Output relay QW000 to QW510
Bit memory MW0000 to MW2046
Timer (present value) T000 to T511
Counter (present value) C000 to C511
D000100000 to D000165534
Word device

D000200000 to D000265534
D000300000 to D000365534
•
Data register
•
•
D409400000 to D409465534
D409500000 to D409565534
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

4 - 66 4 - 66
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(13) Hitachi PLC connection

Device name Monitoring range Device No. notation
External input (X) X00000 to X05A95 Hexadecimal +
External output (Y) Y00000 to Y05A95 decimal
Remote external input (X) X10000 to X49995
Decimal
Remote external output (Y) Y10000 to Y49995
First CPU link (L) L0000 to L3FFF
Second CPU link (L) L10000 to L13FFF Hexadecimal
Data area (M) M0000 to M3FFF
On-delay timer (TD) 1 TD000 to TD255
Bit device

Single-shot timer (SS) 1 SS000 to SS255

Watchdog timer (WDT) 1 WDT000 to WDT255
Monostable timer (MS) 1 MS000 to MS255
Decimal
Retentive timer (TMR) 1 TMR000 to TMR255
Up counter (CU) 1 CU000 to CU511
Ring counter (RCU) 1 RCU000 to RCU511
Up/down counter (CT) 1 CT000 to CT511
Bit internal output (R) R000 to R7BF Hexadecimal
DIF (leading edge detection) 1 DIF000 to DIF511
DFN (trailing edge detection) 1 DFN000 to DFN511 Decimal
GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383
External input (WX) WX0000 to WX05A7 Hexadecimal +
External output (WY) WY0000 to WY05A7 decimal
Remote external input (WX) WX1000 to WX4997
Decimal
Remote external output (WY) WY1000 to WY4997
First CPU link (WL) WL000 to WL3FF
Word device

Second CPU link (WL) WL1000 to WL13FF Hexadecimal

Data area (WM) WM000 to WM3FF
Timer/counter (elapsed value)(TC)
TC000 to TC511 Decimal
1
Word internal output (WR) WR000 to WR3FF Hexadecimal
GOT data register GD64 to GD16383
Decimal
GOT special register (GS) GS0 toGS511

1 The same number cannot be used.

2 If the device specified is outside the range, the object set to the out-of-range device may not be
displayed. In that case, check and correct the device.

4 - 67 4 - 67
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(14) Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection 1

Device name Available range for setting monitor
Input relay (X) 2, 3 X0000 to X511F
Output relay (Y) 3 Y0000 to Y511F
Internal relay (R) R0000 to R886F

Bit device
Link relay (L) 5 L0000 to L639F
Special relay (R) 2 R9000 to R910F
Timer contact (T) 2, 4 T0000 to T3071
Counter contact (C) 2, 4 C0000 to C3071
GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383
Input relay (WX) 2 WX000 to WX511
Output relay (WY) WY000 to WY511
Internal relay (WR) WR000 to WR886
Link relay (WL) WL000 to WL639
Special relay (WR) WR900 to WR910
Word device

Timer/counter (elapsed
EV0000 to EV3071
value)(EV) 4
Timer/counter (set value)(SV) 4 SV0000 to SV3071
Data register (DT) DT00000 to DT10239
Link register (LD) 5 LD0000 to LD8447
File register (FL) 5 FL00000 to FL32764
GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383
GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511
1 Device ranges for use of the FP10SH. When the FP0, FP1, FP2, FP3, FP5, FP10(S) or FP-M is
used, the device ranges vary with the CPU.
2 Write to device cannot be performed.
3 Only the devices assigned to the I/O contacts using the peripheral software are usable.
4 The number of timer and counter devices varies with the first number of the counters set with the
system register (No. 5) value.
5 There are no corresponding devices on the FP0/FP1/FP-M.

(15) Microcomputer connection

Device name Available range for monitoring

GOT bit register (GB) GB64 to GB16383 1

Bit device

Data register (D) D0 to D2047

Specified bit of word device ⎯

Data register (D) D0 to D2047

Word device

GOT data register (GD) GD64 to GD16383 1

GOT special register (GS) GS0 to GS511

1 Write and read operations for GB and GD devices cannot be performed from the host.

4 - 68 4 - 68
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.5.3 Device ranges available for the GOT-F900 series

The devices available for each object function of the GOT-F900 series depend on the
connection target CPU and connection form.
Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form
bases.
(1) QCPU(A Mode), ACPU
Device name Available range for setting/monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X0FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y0FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M8191
Latch relay (L) L0 to L8191
Annunciator (F) F0 to F2047
Bit device

Link relay (B) B0 to B1FFF

Special internal relay (M) M9000 to M9255
Contact (TT) TT0 to TT2047
Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC2047
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT1023
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC1023
GOT bit register (GB) GB132 to GB1023
Data register (D) D0 to D8191
Special data register (D) D9000 to D9255
Link register (W) W0 to W1FFF
Timer (set value) (TS) TS0 to TS2047
Word device

Timer (current value) (TN) TN0 to TN2047

Counter (set value) (CS) CS0 to CS1023
Counter (current value) (CN) CN0 to CN1023
File register (R) R0 to R8191
Accumulator (A) A0 to A1
(Z) Z0 to Z6 (Z0 = Z)
Index register 1
(V) V0 to V6 (V0 = V)
GOT data register (GD) GD100 to GD1023

1 Write to the index register cannot be performed during computer link connection.

(2) FXCPU
(a) MELSEC-FX
Device No.
Device name Setting range
Notation
Input (X) X0 to X377
Octal
Output (Y) Y0 to Y377
Bit device

Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M3071

Special auxiliary relay (M) M8000 to M8255
State (S) S0 to S999 Decimal
Timer contact (T) T0 to T255
Counter contact (C) C0 to C255
Data register (D) (Including file register) D0 to D7999
Special data register (D) D8000 to D8255
Current value (T) T0 to T255
Timer (T)
Set value (TS) 2 TS0 to TS255
Current value (C) C0 to C199
Word device

16bit
Set value (CS) CS0 to CS199
Counter (C) Current value (C) Decimal
C200 to C255
32bit 1
Set value (CS) 1 CS200 to CS255
Z Available in
Index register (Z)
DU/WIN/unavailable in GTD
V Available in
Index register (V)
DU/WIN/unavailable in GTD
1 Bar code reader cannot be specified as word device.

4 - 69 4 - 69
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

Condition enabling data changes

While the GOT is connected to the A Series CPU or A Series computer link
unit, data cannot be changed in set values (specified directly) of timers and
counters and file registers in the following condition.
PLC status While PLC is stopped While PLC is running
Memory Memory type RAM EPROM EEPROM RAM EPROM EEPROM
cassette
Write protect
attached ON OFF ON OFF
switch status
to PLC
Not present 1 1 1 1 3
Keyword
Present 2 2

The following error messages are displayed on the screen only when a
timer, counter or file register is
accessed through a Numeric Input or ASCII input.
1 When data of a set value (specified directly) of a timer or counter is tried to be changed, the error
message "CAN NOT WRITE." is displayed.
(Set values of timers and counters can be changed if they are specified indirectly using data
registers.)
When data of a file register is tried to be changed, the error message "CAN NOT WRITE." is
displayed.
2 The error message "CAN NOT USE THE FUNCTION WHILE PROTECTED." is displayed.
3 The error message "PLC IS RUNNING." is displayed.

(b) FX series GM positioning

Device No.
Device name Setting range
Notation
Input (X) 1 X0 to X377
Octal
Bit device

Output (Y) Y0 to Y67

Auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M511
Decimal
Special auxiliary relay (M) M0 to M9175
Data register (D) D0 to D3999
Word device

Special data register (D) D9000 to D9313

File register (D) D4000 to D6999 Decimal
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z6 (32 bits)
Index register (V) V0 to V6 (32 bits)

1 Writing to device is not executable.

4 - 70 4 - 70
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(3) QCPU(Q Mode), QnACPU

Device name Available range for setting/monitoring
Input (X) X0 to X1FFF
Output (Y) Y0 to Y1FFF
Internal relay (M) M0 to M32767
Latch relay (L) L0 to L32767
Annunciator (F) F0 to F32767
Link relay (B) B0 to B7FFF
Link special relay (SB) SB0 to SB7FF
Bit device

Contact (TT) TT0 to TT32767

Timer
Coil (TC) TC0 to TC32767
Contact (CT) CT0 to CT32767
Counter
Coil (CC) CC0 to CC32767
Special internal relay (M) M9000 to M9255
Special relay (SM) SM0 to SM2047
Contact (SS) SS0 to SS32767
Retentive timer
Coil (SC) SC0 to SC32767
Step relay (S) S0 to S32767
GOT bit register (GB) GB132 to GB1023
Data register (D) D0 to D32767
Special data register (D) D9000 to D9255
Special register (SD) SD0 to SD2047
Link register (W) W0 to W7FFF
Word device

Link special register (SW) SW0 to SW7FF

Timer (current value) (TN) 2 TN0 to TN32767
Counter (current value) (CN) 2 CN0 to CN32767
Retentive timer (current value) (SN) SN0 to SN32767
File register (R) 2 R0 to R32767 1
Index register (Z) Z0 to Z15
GOT data register (GD) GD100 to GD1023

1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is set/monitored.

2 When the GOT-F900 series is connected to the system where the A series computer link module
is loaded in the QnACPU, monitoring and write cannot be performed on the timers, counters and
file registers.
Also note that the available range for setting/monitoring will be the range of the ACPU (AnACPU
equivalent).

4 - 71 4 - 71
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(4) Omron PLC

Device name Available range for setting/monitoring
I/O relay ..0000 to 614315
Internal auxiliary relay WR0000 to WR51115
Data link relay (LR) LR00000 to LR19915

Bit device
Auxiliary memory relay (AR) AR00000 to AR51115
Holding relay (HR) HR0000 to HR9915
Timer contact (TIM) TIM000 to TIM2047
Counter contact (CNT) CNT000 to CNT2047
GOT bit register GB132 to GB1023
Data memory (DM) DM0000 to DM9999
Word device

Timer (current value) (TIM) TIM000 to TIM2047

Counter (current value) (CNT) CNT000 to CNT2047
Extended data memory (EM current bank)
EM0000 to EM9999
Extended data memory (EM banks 0 to 12)
GOT data register GD100 to GD1023

(5) Microcomputer board

Device name Available range for setting/monitoring

Bit data (M) M0 to M2047

Bit device

Special internal relay 1 M8000 to M8063

GOT bit device (GB) GB132 to GB1023

Word device

Word data D0 to D4095

Special data register 1 D8000 to D8015

GOT word device (GD) GD100 to GD1023

1 Special is a device used for special applications (such as interrupt output and communication
error information) of the GOT.

4 - 72 4 - 72
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(6) Allen-Bradley PLC

Device
Available range for
Device name number
setting/monitoring
notation
B3:0/0 to B3:255/15
Bit (B) Octal
B10:0/0 to B255:255/15
T4:0/14 to T4:255/14
T4:0/TT to T4:255/TT
Timer (timing bit) (TT)
T10:0/14 to T255:255/14
T10:0/TT to T255:255/TT
T4:0/13 to T4:255/13
T4:0/DN to T4:255/DN
Timer (timing bit) (TN)
T10:0/13 to T255:255/13
T10:0/DN to T255:255/DN
C5:0/15 to C5:255/15
Bit device

C5:0/CU to C5:255/CU
Counter (up counter) (CU)
C10:0/15 to C255:255/15
C10:0/CU to C255:255/CU
C5:0/14 to C5:255/14
C5:0/CD to C5:255/CD
Counter (down counter) (CD)
C10:0/14 to C255:255/14
C10:0/CD to C255:255/CD
C5:0/13 to C5:255/13
C5:0/DN to C255:255/DN
Counter (completion bit) (CN)
C10:0/13 to C255:255/13
C10:0/DN to C255:255/DN
Designated bit of the following
Word device bit Decimal
word devices
GOT internal bit register (GB) GB64 to GB1023
T4:0.1 to T4:255.1
T4:0.PRE to T4:255.PRE
Timer (set value) (TP) 1
T10:0.1 to T255:255.1
T10:0.PRE to T255:255.PRE
T4:0.2 to T4:255.2
T4:0.ACC to T4:255.ACC
Timer (current value) (TA) 1
T10:0.2 to T255:255.2
T10:0.ACC to T255:255.ACC
Word device

C5:0.1 to C5:255.1
C5:0.PRE to C5:255.PRE
Counter (set value) (CP) 1
C10:0.1 to C255:255.1
C10:0.PRE to C255:255.PRE
C5:0.2 to C5:255.2
C5:0.ACC to C5:255.ACC
Counter (current value) (CA) 1
C10:0.2 to C255:255.2
C10:0.ACC to C255:255.ACC
N7:0 to N7:255
Integer (N)
N10:0 to N255:255
GOT internal data register (GD) GD100 to GD1023

1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data.

4 - 73 4 - 73
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(7) SIEMENS PLC (S7-200) connection

Device name Available range for monitoring
Variable memory V0000.0 to V5119.7
Input I0.0 to I7.7
Output Q0.0 to Q7.7

Bit device
Bit memory M00.0 to M31.7
Special memory SM000.0 to SM194.7
Timer T000 to T255
Counter C000 to C255
PLC control relay S00.0 to S31.7
GOT bit register GB132 to GB1023
Variable memory VW0000 to VW5118
Input IW0 to IW6
Output QW0 to QW6
Analog input AIW00 to AIW30
Analog output AQW00 to AQW30
Word device

Bit memory MW00 to MW30

Special memory SMW000 to SMW192
Timer T000 to T255
Counter C000 to C255
High-speed counter HC0 to HC2
PLC control relay S00 to S30
GOT data register GD100 to GD1023

4 - 74 4 - 74
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(8) SIEMENS PLC (S7-300) connection

Device name Available range for monitoring
Input relay I0000 to I5117

Bit device
Output relay Q0000 to Q5117
Bit memory M00000 to M20477
GOT bit register GB132 to GB1023
Timer (present value) T000 to T511
Word device
Counter (present value) C000 to C511
Data register D000100000 to D102365534
GOT data register GD100 to GD1023

(9) Matsushita PLC (FP0, FP2SH, FP2-CCU)

Device name Available range for setting/monitoring
Input relay (X) 3 X0000 to X511F
Output relay (Y) Y0000 to X511F
Internal relay (R) 4 R0000 to R910F
Link relay (L)*1 L0000 to L639F
Device name
Alarm warning relay (E) 2 3 E0 to E2047
Timer contact (T) 3 T0 to T3017
Counter contact (C) 3 C0 to C3071
GOT bit register GB132 to GB1023
Timer/counter elapsed value (EV) EV0 to EV3071
Timer/counter set value (SV) SV0 to SV3071
Data register (DT) 4 DT0 to DT16383
Word device
Link register (LD) 1 LD0 to LD8447
File register (FL) 1 5 FL0 to FL32764
GOT data register GD100 to GD1023
1 Except the FP0.
2 Available for the FP2SH only.
3 Data cannot be written.
4 The special relays (R9000 to R910F) and special data registers (D9000 top D9255) are also
included. For the FP2SH, however, access to the special data registers cannot be made.
5 For the FP2SH, access to only bank 0 can be made.

4 - 75 4 - 75
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

(10) Inverter (FREQROL series (A500 series, E500 series, F500 series))
Device name Available range for setting/monitoring
Bit device Control status (S) 1 S0: to S7:
Alarm code (A) 1 A0: to A7:
Parameter (Pr) 1 Pr000: to Pr993:
Word device
Program operation (PG) 1 PG000: to PG89:
Special parameter (SP) 1 SP108: to SP127:

1 Set the station number in .

4 - 76 4 - 76
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

4.5.4 Numeric Data that can be Handled with GOT

GOT supports and handles the following 7 types of numeric data.

• 16- or 32-bit signed binary (binary including a sign)
• 16- or 32-bit unsigned binary (binary including no sign)
• 16- or 32-bit BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)
• 32-bit real number (floating point data)

The range of each numeric data type is shown below.

The data range varies depending on the data length (16 or 32 bits).

Data range
Data type
Data length: 16 bits Data length: 32 bits
Signed BIN -32768 to 32767 -2147483648 to 2147483647
Unsigned BIN 0 to 65535 0 to 4294967295
BCD 0 to 9999 0 to 99999999
Real number Not used Signed 13-digit notation (floating point format only) 1

1: The real number precision is given up to the sixth decimal place. The accuracy of the 7th
and later decimal places cannot be guaranteed.
If a number having 7th and later digits is displayed on GOT, there are cases the displayed
value differs from the value displayed on GX Developer.
Example:
When the value of a real number (floating point data) of the connected PLCs is 4.123
• Display on GX Developer : 4.123000
• Display on GOT (display of up to 6th digit) : 4.123000
• Display on GOT (display of up to 13th digit) : 4.1230001449585
For details of real number (floating point data), refer to the following.
QCPU User's Manual (Function Explanation, Program Fundamentals) (Section 3.9.4
Real numbers (floating decimal point data))

The following shows an example where the data length and data type are set on the
Trigger tab in the Numerical Input.

4 - 77 4 - 77
4 SPECIFICATION
MELSOFT

MEMO

4 - 78 4 - 78
 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

CHAPTER5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS

(1) About object item settings

Each object item has settings to be made to achieve function outline examples.
The settings given are specifically only the items where the default values of that
object must be changed.

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Graph : Sample <Device/Attribute> X axis Device: D100
<Basic>tab
Display mode : Locus tab Y axis Device: D200

(2) About setting item list

The items marked " " in the setting item list of each object item are registered to
the keyword function of the help.
By entering a keyword to make a search, you can directly display the explanation
of the corresponding portion.
"Numerical display" dialog box
Basic
Basics tab

Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the DeviceNo.

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real

5 Shape
Data length 16bit/32bit
Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Numeral Designation of Color (0 to 255)

1) Enter keyword.

Explanation of "Numeral" item in setting item

list appears.

2) Search.
3) As a result of search, multiple candidates
for the[Numeral] item appear.
Here, choose "Numeral" in
[Numerical Display] dialog box.

4) Display.

5-1 5-1
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.1 Data Display Functions

The data display functions show the PLC CPU's memory data in real time. They are
available in the following types.
• Numerical display function...........Shows a numerical value.
• Data list display function ..............Shows numerical values in tabular form.
• ASCII display function..................Shows a text.
• Clock display function ..................Shows time.

5.1.1 Numerical display function (shows word device data as a numerical value)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows data stored in a PLC CPU device as a numerical value.
(1) Function outline
(a) Reads the data stored in a PLC CPU device to the GOT and displays it as a
numerical value in real time.

D100 150

150
5
Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Device: D100

(b) Changes the displayed numerical color/background color according to the

current value of a monitor device.
Present temperature Present temperature Present temperature

58 -20 125
(Monitor device: D0)
Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings
Case1: Defined case($V<0), Numeral: 3
<Basic>tab Device : D0 <Case>tab Case2: Defined case(100<$V), Numeral: 0
Plate: 255

(c) Used with the level display function (refer to Section 5.4.6).
(Only when using the GOT-A900 series)

25 98
(Monitor device: D0)

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D0 Numeral: 0 <Option>tab Display mode: XOR

POINT
• The numerical display function allows only one value to be superimposed on one
level indication provided by the level display function.
• A numerical value on a level indication does not blink (flicker).

5-2 5-2
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The numerical display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Numerical display" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Basic tab

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real

Data length 16bit/32bit
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Numeral Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Numeral/Numeral and Plate
Reverse Unchecked/checked
Form
Format Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Right alignment/Left alignment/Center
Disp all digits (add 0) Unchecked/checked
High quality font Unchecked/checked
Size (Height width size setting)
Digits (Digit count setting)
Decimal point (Digit count setting)
Adjust decimal point range

Case
Extended tab

Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ..Set the display attribute changing
(Setting for each case) conditional expression and display attribute.
Delete

Option
Security
Offset Checked/Unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Display mode Transparent/XOR

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5-3 5-3
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Data length 16bit/32bit
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Numeral Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Form
Format Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Right alignment/Left alignment/Center
Disp all digits (add 0) Unchecked/checked
Size (Height width size setting)
Digits (Digit count setting)
Decimal point (Digit count setting)

Expression
Gain 1 (Gain 1 value setting)
Gain 2 (Gain 2 value setting)
Offset (Offset value setting)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up numerical display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• The display color and attributes can be changed according to the monitor
device value or specified device status (ON/OFF, device value).
• The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display.
Only one value may be superimposed on a level display.
• Values including decimal points can be displayed or calculated.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Expression can be set.

5-4 5-4
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.1.2 Data list display function (lists multiple word device states as numerical values)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function gathers the states of multiple word devices periodically and lists them as
numerical values.
(1) Function outline
(a) Sorts a list in the preset priority according to the states of the corresponding
word devices (D11, D21, D31, D41).
GOT display setting
Machining
count result Plan Output Failure
D10: 100 D30: 100 D10: 100 D30: 100
Machine
D11: 10 D31: 30 D11: 30 D31: 32 1 (D10) (D11) (D12)
D12: 3 D32: 3 D12: 3 D32: 5 Machine (D20) (D21) (D22)
2
Machine
D20: 100 D40: 100 (D30) (D31) (D32)
D20: 100 D40: 100 3
D21: 25 D41: 40 D21: 25 D41: 41 Machine (D40) (D41) (D42)
4
D22: 3 D42: 3 D22: 3 D42: 3
Sorted in ascending order
on the basis of this column.
List is sorted every time the display is updated.
Machining Machining
No. count result Plan Output Failure No. count result Plan Output Failure

1 Machine 100 10 3 1 Machine

1 2 100 25 3

2 Machine 100 20 2 Machine

2 3 100 30 3
1
3 Machine 100 30 3 3 Machine
3 3 100 32 3

4 Machine 100 40 3 4 Machine

4 4 100 41 3

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Rows :4 Row1: Columns 2 Device(D10)
Display rows :4 Row2: Columns 2 Device(D20)
<Form>tab Columns :4 <List>tab Row3: Columns 2 Device(D30)
Sort: : Ascending Row4: Columns 2 Device(D40)
Sort/Attr. column :3 Device: Random

(b) Using the data list display function and graph display (statistical graph in the
example) together shows multiple device states effectively.
Machine
No. name Target Output
Machine
1 1 100 24
Machine
2 2 100 42
Machine
3 3 100 22
Machine
4 4 100 22

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Row1: Columns 2 Device (D10), Label
foreground: 255 (White)
Row2: Columns 2 Device (D20), Label
Rows :4
foreground: 224 (Red)
Display rows :4
Row3: Columns 2 Device (D30), Label
Columns :3
<Form>tab <List>tab foreground: 3 (Blue)
Label :2
Row4: Columns 2 Device (D40), Label
Sort: : Number
foreground: 252 (Yellow)
Sort/Attr. column :3
Device: Random
: In a statistic graph, set the monitor devices
and display colors to match the above.

5-5 5-5
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The data list display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Data List" dialog box
Basic
Shape Unchecked/checked
Basic tab

Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.

Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Title Designation of Title (0 to 255)
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Rule Designation of Rule (0 to 255)

Reverse Checked/unchecked
Form
Rows
Display rows (Row count setting)
Columns (Column count setting)
Label Checked/unchecked
Interval (Vertical horizontal spacing setting)
Size (Height width size setting)
Sort Number/Ascending/Descending/No sort
Sort/Attr. column
High quality font Checked/unchecked
List
Row.n Edit Rows dialog box
Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Comment No. Comment List dialog box ..Set the display comment.
Label pattern Designation of Label pattern
Label foreground Designation of Label foreground (0 to 255)
Label background Designation of Label background (0 to 255)
Col.n Edit Columus dialog box
Format
Format Signed decimal/Unsigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Right alignment/Left alignment/Center
Disp. all digits (add 0)
Digits (Digit count setting)
Decimal point (Digit count setting)
Device BCD/Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Title (Set the column item name)
Color (0 to 255) 16bit/32bit

Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.
Device Continuous/Random
Comment Continuous/Random

Case

Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ..Set the display attribute changing conditional
Delete expression and display attribute.

5-6 5-6
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Option
Extended tab

Security
Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.
Initial display Unchecked/checked
Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up data list display" from Contents
of Help.

POINT
• Security and offset can be set.
• Display Label rows can be set. Combining the label rows and statistical or bar
graphs makes effective display.
• Display sequence can be sorted in the ascending or descending order of number
or device values.
• Display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor device value
reaches the specified value.

5-7 5-7
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.1.3 ASCII display function (shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character
string)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function regards the data stored consecutively in word devices as text data (ASCII
code) and shows them as a character string.
(1) Function outline
(a) Recognizes the data stored consecutively within the corresponding word
devices (D10 to D14) as text data and shows them as a character string on
the GOT.

D10: 5841H (XA)

D11: 342DH (4-)
D12: 0031H (1)

AX-41

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Size :8 8
<Basic>tab Device: D10 <Form>tab
Digits :5

(b) Updates the characters according to the condition with the monitor device
value changed from a peripheral device, sequence program or the like.
D10: 504FH (PO) D10: 5453H (TS)
D11: 5245H (RE) D11: 504FH (PO)
D12: 5441H (TA) D12: 2020H ( )
D13: 2045H ( E) D13: 2020H ( )

Operating condition Operating condition

Line 1 OPERATE Line 1 STOP

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D10 <Form>tab Digits: 8

5-8 5-8
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The ASCII display function consists of the following setting items.
• "ASCII display" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Basic tab

Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Text/Text and Plate
Reverse Unchecked/checked

Form

Size (Height width size setting)

Digits (Digit count setting)

Option
Extended tab

Security

Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

5-9 5-9
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Form

Size (Height width size setting)

Digits (Digit count setting)

Alignment Left/Right/Center

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up ASCII display" from Contents of
Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security and offset can be set.

5 - 10 5 - 10
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.1.4 Clock display function (reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function displays the PLC CPU's clock data (GOT-A900 series) or GOT's built-in
clock data (GOT-F900 series) on the GOT.
(1) Function outline
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
The clock data of the PLC CPU is read and displayed at power-on, and
thereafter, the clock data of the PLC CPU is read every hour.
Between when the clock data is read from the PLC CPU and when the
clock data is read next, the time counted in the GOT is displayed.
Either the date or time can be displayed.
(When GT SoftGOT is used, the clock data of the personal computer is
displayed in real time.)

00/08/11

13:48

1) Clock display object (date indication) 2) Clock display object (time indication)
Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Display style: Date Shape: checked <Basic>tab Display style: Time
<Form>tab Data format: yy/mm/dd

POINT
The GOT reads the clock data of the PLC CPU once an hour. If the clock data of
the PLC CPU is changed, therefore, the clock indication of the GOT may not be
updated for an hour at the longest.

REMARK
• When the date is selected, the year is displayed as the two lower digits of the year.
• When the time is selected, the time is displayed on a 24-hour basis.

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Shows the GOT's built-in clock data.
Either the date or time can be displayed.

11/AUG/2000(FRI)

13:48:40

1) Clock display object (date indication) 2) Clock display object (time indication)
Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Display style: Date Shape: checked <Basic>tab Display style: Time
<Form>tab Data format: Type1 <Form>tab Data format: Type1

5 - 11 5 - 11
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The clock display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Clock" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Display Date
style
Time
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Form
Data format yy/mm/dd
dd/mm/yy
mm/dd/yy
Size (Height width size setting)

High quality font Checked/unchecked

Extended tab

Option
Security

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Display Date
style
Time
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Form
Data format yy/mm/dd
dd/mm/yy
mm/dd/yy
Type1
Type2

Size (Height width size setting)

5 - 12 5 - 12
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up data display" "Setting up clock display" from Contents of
Help.

5 - 13 5 - 13
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.2 Message Display Functions

The message display functions show comments or error messages corresponding to

the PLC CPU status.
They are available in the following types.
• Comment display function .........Shows a comment corresponding to a device state.
• Alarm history display function....Shows occurrence times and comments when
condition is enabled.
• Alarm list display function ..........Shows error messages or comments in list form.

5.2.1 Comment display function (shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF or value of

monitor device)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device or the

specified range of a word device.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows a comment corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).
OFF
X0

ON
X0 is OFF X0 is ON

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: X0

(b) Shows a comment corresponding to the value of a word device (D100).

When the GOT-F900 series is used, this function shows the comment of the
comment number equal to the value of the word device (D100).

D100 1 10 100

Current production Current production Today's production

quantity is 1. quantity is 10. is completed.

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100

(c) Changes the entire on-screen comment display according to ON/OFF of the
bit device (X0). (Example: Changing between Japanese and English)

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: X0(Set the same device to all objects)
ON time setting : Direct(Enter comment data in Japanese)
<Case(Bit)>tab
OFF time setting : Direct(Enter comment data in English)

5 - 14 5 - 14
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The comment display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Comment Display" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Device Device dialog box

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Size Specify (height width size).
Blink (Text/Text and Plate)
Alignment (Left/Right/Center)
Case (Bit)

ON/Off No. Comment List dialog box ...Setting of display comment

Direct Unchecked/checked

Copy from ON(OFF only)

Attribute(ON)/ Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)

Attribute(OFF) Change attribute Unchecked/checked
Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised
Text Designation of Color
Solid Designation of Solid of characters.
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Reverse Unchecked/checked
High quality font (Direct only) Unchecked/checked
Case (Word)

Edit Display Format Edit range dialog box

Edit Range
dialog box
...Set the conditional expression.
Indication No./ Indirect/ Hold
Attribute Plate Designation of Plate
Change Unchecked/checked
attribute
Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised
Text Designation of Color
Solid Designation of Solid
of characters.
Blink None/Low
Delete Deletion of setting Middle/High
Reverse Unchecked
/checked

5 - 15 5 - 15
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Option
Extended tab

Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)

Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Display mode Transparent/XOR
Preview Unchecked/checked
comment Browse Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment
Disp.head Fixed (1 to 32767)
Device Device dialog box
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 16 5 - 16
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device dialog box
Data type Bit/Word
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Size (Height width size setting)
Case (Bit)

ON/Off No. Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment

Direct Unchecked/checked

Copy from ON (OFF only)

Attribute(ON)/ Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)

Attribute(OFF) Change attribute Unchecked/checked
Text Designation of Color

Case (Word)

Edit Display Format

Edit Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
dialog box
Change attribute
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Start No. Set the first device number of comment to be displayed.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up message display" "Setting up comment display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security and offset can be set.
• Comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.
• Multiple line comments can be displayed.
• Display color and attributes of a comment can be changed when the monitor
device (bit) value turns ON/OFF.
• The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display.
Refer to Section 4.4.2 for superimposing on the level display function.

5 - 17 5 - 17
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.2.2 Alarm history display function (shows a history of occurrence times, comments and
others when a condition is enabled)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
This function shows as history data the occurrence times, comments and other
information when the specified bit device turns on or the condition of a word device
value is enabled.
(1) Function outline
(a) Error history display
Shows a history list of dates and times, messages and others when a
device is confirmed to have turned on (error occurrence). (On the GOT-
F900 series, shows only the occurrence dates and times, messages and
occurrence counts.)
OFF
X0 OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS CUMLAT COUNT
98/06/01 10:25 Conveyor 1 error 11:25 10:45 01:00 1
ON 98/06/01 12:05 Conveyor 2 error 12:40 12:28 00:20 5
98/06/01 12:35 Conveyor 3 error 13:20 12:50 00:15 2
Shows the history when the monitor device turns on.
Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Mode: Cumulation
Alarm History (Common) dialog box
<Monitor Device>tab Delete No.: Continuous, Comment No.: Continuous, Device: X10
Display style: Occurences, Restorations, Checks, Cumulative, Occur
Alarm History (Form) dialog box <Form>tab
frequency

(b) Error detail display (only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
Details and action for the comment turned on (when an error occurred) can
be displayed on the base window, window screen or comment window.
OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS
98/06/01 10:25 Line 1 error 11:25 10:45
98/06/01 12:05 Line 2 error 12:28
98/06/01 12:35 Line 3 error
Move Detailed Delete
upward display display

Detailed display screen appears by one touch/touch key entry.

When detail display is provided by one touch, the above
message selection cursors do not appear.

The specified comment is Window screen of the Base screen of the

displayed on the special designated number is designated number is
window screen for alarm displayed. displayed.
history display.

X0
Line 1 CHECK
Line 1 CHECK
Line 1 CHECK
ON
Alarm history display Alarm history display

Register as comments the detailed Display on the specified window screen or base screen the detailed
contents and corrective actions for contents and corrective actions for when the specified devices turn
when the specified devices turn to to ON status.
ON status.

Setting Portion Settings

Alarm History (Common) dialog box <Basic>tab Detailed display: Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen

5 - 18 5 - 18
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The alarm history display function consists of the following setting items.
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
• "Alarm History (Common)" dialog box
Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Mode History
Cumulation
Alarm Set the number of device points to be monitored (1 to 3072).
Watch cycle Set the monitoring cycle (6 to 800).
Detailed display Not display/Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen
History store Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
History erase Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Memory store Unchecked/checked
Set the storage cycle (1 to 60).
Store CSV format Unchecked/checked
When number of alarm occurences exceed set Unchecked/checked
value, delete oldest alarm occurences
History print Unchecked/checked
Print Format Print Format dialog box
Delete Delete the setting. ...Set the row count, column count, margins, etc.

Monitor Device
Device No. Continuous/Random/Fixed
Comment No. Continuous/Random
Display No. Continuous/Random
Edit Alarm History
Edit Type Bit/Bit of Word/Signed(BIN16)/
dialog box
Unsigned(BIN16)/Signed(BIN32)/
Unsigned(BIN32)/BCD16/BCD32/Real
Device Device dialog box
...Setting of Device No.
Range Setting of Defined case
Comment No. Designation of Comment No.
Display No. Designation of Detailed display No.
Device reset Unchecked/checked
Send mail Occurred, Restored, Occurred/Restored

Copy Alarm History

Copy Set the history copy destination, copy source, copy count,
dialog box copied data, etc.
Print Condition
Title Unchecked/checked
Date Set the text printed in date field.
Time Set the text printed in time field.
Message Set the text printed in message field.
Cumulative time Set the text printed in cumulative time field.
Occur frequency Unchecked/
checked
Set the text printed in
occurrence count field.
State Set text displayed in status field.
State Occurred Unchecked/checked
print out Set the text printed at occurrence.
Restored Unchecked/checked
Set the text printed at restoration.
Checks Unchecked/checked
Set the text printed at checking.

5 - 19 5 - 19
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

• "Alarm History (Form)" dialog box

Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function.

Basic
Basic tab

Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255) ...Choose the Image List.
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Title Designation of Title (0 to 255)
Rule Unchecked/checked
Designation of Rule (0 to 255)
Common Display the alarm common setting dialog box.

Form
Disp. rows Designation of Disp. rows (1 to 27)
Disp. head Designation of Disp. head (1 to 3072)
Sort Oldest/Latest
Size Designation of Size (V H)

Interval Designation of Interval (V H)

Display style Occurences

Restorations Unchecked/checked
Checks Unchecked/checked
Cumulative Unchecked/checked
Occur frequency Unchecked/checked
One touch Unchecked/checked
High quality font Unchecked/checked

Format
Title Set the history item title.
Wide Set the width of history item field.
Color Specify the history item color (0 to 255).

Contents Date,Time / Date / Time / string

yy/mm/dd / mm/dd/yy / dd/mm/yy / mm/dd
hh:mm:ss / hh:mm
Text Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence.
Extended tab

Option
Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)

5 - 20 5 - 20
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

• "Alarm History (Common)" dialog box
Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Mode History
Cumulation
Alarm Set the number of device points to be monitored (1 to 1024).
Watch cycle Set the monitoring cycle (6 to 800).
Detailed display Not display/Comment window/Base Screen
History store Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

History erase Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
When number of alarm occurences exceed set value, Unchecked/checked
delete oldest alarm occurences
Delete Delete the setting.

Monitor Device

Display No. Continuous/Random

Edit Alarm History

Edit Type Bit
dialog box
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Comment No. Designation of Comment No.
Display No. Designation of Detailed display No.
Device reset Unchecked/checked
Copy Alarm History
Copy Set the history copy destination, copy source, copy count, copied data, etc.
dialog box
Print Condition
Print condition setting is fixed.

5 - 21 5 - 21
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

• "Alarm History (Form)" dialog box

Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function.
Basic
Basic tab

Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Title Designation of Title (0 to 255)
Common Display the alarm common setting dialog box.

Form
Disp. rows Designation of Disp. rows (1 to 27)
Sort Oldest
Latest
Size Designation of Size (V H)

Display style Occurences

Restorations Unchecked/checked
Occur frequency Unchecked/checked

Format
Title Set the history item title.
Wide Set the width of history item field.

Color Specify the history item color (0 to 255).

Contents Date,Time / Date / Time / String

yy/mm/dd / mm/dd/yy / dd/mm/yy / mm/dd
hh:mm:ss / hh:mm
Text Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence.

5 - 22 5 - 22
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up alarm history display" "Setting up alarm history display"
from Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security can be set.
• By using the PC card, the history data can be backed up.
• The ladder monitor function can be started while the device corresponding to
the one which turned ON or fell within the designated range is being searched.
• Alarm history can be printed out.
• The current number of alarm history data can be stored into the designated
word device.
• The display for the restored device can be deleted using the designated bit
device as trigger.
• When the specified bit device/word device turns on (at error occurrence, for
example)/off (at restoration), the date and time of occurrence/restoration,
comment and others can be sent as electronic mail.
• For details of the mail send function, refer to the following corresponding
manual.
• When GOT is used : GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual
(GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5
Compatible Gateway functions)
• When GT SoftGOT is used : GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual
• For restrictions on the alarm history display function, refer to Section 4.3.1.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• The current status of the alarm history display can be printed out.
• The number of errors entered into the monitoring devices can be stored.

5 - 23 5 - 23
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.2.3 Alarm list display function (shows the error information of the system at error
occurrence)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows error information at error occurrence or shows comments

corresponding to multiple devices in priority order.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows error information at error occurrence. (Only when the GOT-A900
series is used)
Monitors GOT/PLC CPU/MELSECNET communication at intervals of three
seconds to check for errors, and shows an error code or error message at
error occurrence. You need not create error messages and numbers as they
are registered in the GOT. (Occurrence time is also displayed at occurrence
of a GOT error.) Use this function to detect PLC CPU/MELSECNET
communication errors.

Voltage dropped below

rated value

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Type: System

(b) Shows comments corresponding to multiple bit devices, which are ON, in the
specified priority order (order of ascending ON bit device numbers for the
GOT-F900 series).

Occurrence Occurrence
order order
Message Message
2) X1 X3 Check products
2) X1 X3 Check products
X2 X1 Conveyor fault 3) X2 X1 Conveyor fault
X2 Inspect conveyor
1) X3 1) X3

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Type: User
<Form>tab Device points: 4 Device: X1 Continuous: checked

5 - 24 5 - 24
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The alarm list display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Alarm List" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Type System
Basic tab

User
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background
Size Designation of Comment Size (V H)

Form
Device points Set the Device points
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Storage Unchecked/checked
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Comment No. Set the first device number Comment List dialog box ...Setting of comment
of comment to be displayed.
offset Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Number Plural/Single
Sort Ascending/Descending/Oldest/Latest
Alignment Left/Right/Center
Extended tab

Option
Security Specify of Security (0 to 15)
Detailed display Comment window/Window screen/Base Screen
Store memory Unchecked/checked
Scroll on Unchecked/checked
Display date Unchecked/checked

Detail
Disp. Set the Comment No.
Display No. Continuous/Random
One touch Unchecked/checked
offset Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set bit device and condition enabling.

5 - 25 5 - 25
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Set the background color (0 to 255)
Size Designation of Comment Size (V H)

Form
Device points Set the Device points
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Storage Unchecked/checked
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Comment No. Set the first device number of Comment List dialog box ...Setting of Indication
comment to be displayed.
Number Plural/Single
Sort Ascending/Descending

Option

Detailed display Comment window/Base Screen

Store memory Unchecked/checked
Scroll on Unchecked/checked
Display date Unchecked/checked

Detail
Disp. Set the Comment No.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up message display" "Setting up alarm list display (system
alarms/user alarms)" from Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security can be set.
• Priority can be displayed in the order of occurrence/number.
• Multiple or single comments can be displayed in the order of priority.
• A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.
(If single comment is selected for display)
• The GOT can count the bit devices turned ON and store the count in the word
device.
• Details and actions for the comment turned ON can be displayed on the base
screen, window screen or comment window.
• The ladder monitor function screen can be activated while the device
corresponding to the bit device turned ON is being searched.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area.
(If single comment is selected for display)
• The number of bit devices which are now ON can be stored.

5 - 26 5 - 26
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.3 Animation Display Functions

5.3.1 Part display function (shows a part/screen corresponding to a device)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows a registered part/screen corresponding to a device.

(Screen display is provided only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows a part corresponding to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).

OFF

X0
ON
Switch ON

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: X0
<Case(Bit)>tab ON Part No.: 1 OFF Part No.: 2

(b) Shows a part corresponding to ON/OFF of a word device (D100).

D100 1 10 100
GOT

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100
Range: $V==1 Indicate Part No.: 1
<Case(Word)>tab Range: $V==10 Indicate Part No.: 2
Range: $V==100 Indicate Part No.: 3

(c) Shows the specified part according to ON/OFF of a bit device (X1, X2).
OFF ON OFF
X1 X1 X1
OFF OFF ON
X2 X2 X2

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Parts switching: Fixed Part No.: 1 Device: X1
<Basic>tab <Trigger>tab
Parts switching: Fixed Part No.: 2 Device: X2

5 - 27 5 - 27
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The part display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Part Display" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Parts Fixed No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
switching
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)
Display mode Replay/XOR/Overwrite
Positioning Top-left/Center
Type Part
Mark Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Base Screen
Window screen
Fixed Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Color (0 to 255)
Case (Bit)
On/Off-Time setting
No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Case(Word)

Edit Edit Display Format Bit Device Device dialog box

dialog box
Range Edit range
dialog box ...Set the device value range.

Delete (Deletion of display setting) Indicate No./Indirect/Color/Hold

Attribute Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Extended tab

Option
Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)
Offset Device dialog box ...Designation of offset value

Preview Image List dialog box

comment

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 28 5 - 28
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Parts Fixed No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
switching
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Data type Bit/Word
Display mode Replay
Positioning Top-left/Center
Type Part
Mark Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Fixed Color (0 to 255)
Case(Bit)

No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.

Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Case(Word)

Start No.
Preview comment Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up part display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression (for display method "case (word) " only) can be
set.
• Parts/screens registered by the user can be displayed.
• The user-created base/window screen can be displayed as a part.
• According to the change of the device, only the white area of the registered
part figure can be displayed in a different color.
Only one part can be used.
• Part, display color and attributes can be changed according to the value of the
monitor device. (For display method "case (word)" only)
• The displayed parts, display colors and attributes can be changed according to
ON/OFF of the bit devices.
• By setting the part/screen number to "0", the displayed part/screen can be
deleted.
• When switching between parts/screens of different sizes (large to small),
unnecessary display is automatically deleted.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Parts registered by the user can be displayed.
• Part, display color and attributes can be changed according to the ON/OFF of
the bit device. (For display method "case (bit)" only)
• The displayed parts can be erased by setting their numbers to unregistered
numbers.
• When switching between parts/screens of different sizes (large to small),
unnecessary display is automatically deleted.

5 - 29 5 - 29
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.3.2 Part movement display function (shows the movement of a part corresponding to a
device)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows the movement or locus of a part figure, which corresponds to
ON/OFF of a bit device or the value of a word device, in the specified moving method.

(1) Function outline

(a) Specifies movement display coordinates with the values of two word devices
(D100, D101).
Regarding the values of the two word devices (D100, D101) as the X and Y
coordinates, this function changes the values of the two word devices (D100,
D101) to display the movement of a part figure.
100 250 400
D100 100 250 400
D101 100 200 300 100 Y coordinate
(D101) 200
Parts
Parts
X coordinate (D100) 300
Parts

Setting Portion Settings

Part Movement dialog box <Basic>tab Move way: Position Position: D100

The position of the coordinate (origin) set as the reference of parts

movement display is set as below.
1) For parts displayed on an overlap window
The upper-left of the overlap window is the reference coordinate (origin).
2) For parts displayed on other than overlap window (such as a base
screen, superimpose window)
The upper-left of the base screen being displayed is the reference
coordinate (origin).
(b) Shows a part at a point position in the specified path.
Presetting the path and point numbers shows a part in the position of the point
number corresponding to the word device (D100) value.
The word device (D100) value is changed to move the part.
Preset path Point number: 1 Point number: 2 Point number: 4

1 3
D100 1 2 4 Parts

2 4 Parts Parts
Numbers are point
numbers.

Setting Portion Settings

Part Movement dialog box <Basic>tab Move way: Point Position: D100 Route No.: 1
Parts Move Route dialog box Route No.: 1 Points: 4

5 - 30 5 - 30
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(c) Shows a part at any position on a line defined by the specified starting and
end points.
Shows a part on a line which is defined by the starting point (0%) and the end
point (100%) by changing the word device (D100) value relative to the upper
and lower limits.
The word device (D100) value is changed to move the part.
The move distance of the part is in increments of 1% the range 0 to 100%.
Preset starting and Part is displayed with starting point Displayed at position Displayed at position Displayed at position
end points preset as 0% and end point as 100%. of 70%. of 30%. of 50%.

Starting End
point point D100 70 30 50 End End End
point point point
Parts Parts Parts
Starting point Starting point Starting point
Preset upper limit : 100
Preset lower limit : 0

Setting Portion Settings

Move way: Line Position: D100 Maximum: 100
Part Movement dialog box <Basic>tab
Minimum: 0

(2) Setting items

The part movement function consists of the following setting items.
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
• "Part Movement" dialog box
Set the part movement display function.
Basic
Basic tab

Parts Fixed No. Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
switching
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)
Move way Position/Line/Point
Route No.
Position Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Maximum/Minimum
Display mode Movement/Locus
Positioning Top-left/Center
Type Part
Mark Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Fixed Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Color (0 to 255)
Case(Bit)
ON/OFF-Time setting
No. Image List dialog box ...Set the Part No.
Color Setting of part color (0 to 255)
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Case(Word)

Edit Edit Display Format Bit Device Device dialog box

dialog box
Edit range
Range ...Set the device value range.
dialog box
Indicate No.
Indirect
Delete (Deletion of display setting) Color
Hold
Attribute Blink No/Low/Middle/High

5 - 31 5 - 31
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Option
Extended tab

Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)

Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.
Initial display Unchecked/checked
Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

• "Part Move Route" dialog box

Set the path which is used to display a part at point positions in the
specified path.
Route No. Set the Route No.
Points Set the Points
Arrange in a line

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up part movement display"
from Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• Displayed parts can be changed according to the device value.
• Display part, display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor
device value (word device) reaches a given value.

5 - 32 5 - 32
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.3.3 Lamp display function (changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function changes the lit-up color of a lamp with a device value.
(1) Function outline
(a) Lights/extinguishes a lamp according to ON/OFF of a bit device (X0).

OFF

X0 Lamp 1 Lamp 1
ON

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: X0

POINT
The lamp figure, display color, attributes and character string can be changed
according to ON/OFF of the bit device.

(b) Changes the lit-up color of a lamp according to the value of a word device
(D100).
(Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
D100=0 D100=1 to 100 D100=100 over

D100 0 1 100 101

Off On Warning on

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100
Range: $V==0 Lamp: 0 Blink: No
<Case(Word)>tab Range: 0<=$V<=100 Lamp: 224 Blink: No
Range: 100<$V Lamp: 224 Blink: High

POINT
The lamp figure, display color, attributes and character string can be changed
according to the word device value.

5 - 33 5 - 33
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The lamp display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Lamp" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Device Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)
Shape Basic figure/ Free figure
Case(Bit)
ON/OFF-time setting
Shape (Free figure/Basic figure)
Image List dialog box ...Set the figure number.

Panelkit dialog box ...Set the figure from

Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255) parts library/panelkit.
Lamp Designation of Lamp color (0 to 255)
Background Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern (No/1 to 37).
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Text Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.
Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Solid Designation of Solid of characters.
V H Designation of Size (V H)
Copy from ON Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.
High quality font Checked/unchecked
Case(Word)

Edit Edit Display Format Shape (Free figure/Basic figure)

dialog box
Panelkit dialog box Image List dialog box
...Set the figure from parts library/panelkit. ...Set the figure number.
Bit Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Lamp Designation of Lamp color (0 to 255)
Background Designation of Backgroud (0 to 255)
Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Text Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and
spacing from frame.
Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Solid Designation of Solid of characters.
V H Designation of Size (V H)
High quality Checked/unchecked
Delete (Deletion of display setting) font
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ...Display setting made when conditional expression
is not applicable
Option
Extended tab

Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)

Offset Device dialog box ...Specify the device to be offset.
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Setting of Defined case

5 - 34 5 - 34
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Shapes Basic figuer
Parts
Lamp Unchecked/checked
(External)
Case(Bit)
ON/OFF-time setting
Shape Image List dialog box ...Set the figure number.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Lamp Designation of Lamp color (0 to 255)
Text Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.

Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

V H Designation of Size (V H)
Copy from ON Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up lamp display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security and offset can be set.
• Basic figures provided by GT Designer and the free figures set by the user can
be used as lamps.
• A character string can be displayed on the top, center, bottom, right or left of
the lamp.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Basic figures provided by GT Designer can be used as lamps.
• A character string can be displayed in the center of the lamp.

5 - 35 5 - 35
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.3.4 Panelmeter display function (shows a meter according to a word device value)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows a meter at the ratio of a word device value to the upper and lower
limits.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows a meter at the ratio of a word device (D100) value to the upper limit
(300) and lower limit (0).

D100 50 100 200 150 150 150

0 300 0 300 0 300

Meter 1 Meter 1 Meter 1

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100 Text: Meter 1
<Form>tab Type: Top1/2 Upper: Fixed 300 Lower: Fixed 0
<Graph>tab Scale value display (V H) 1 Upper: 300 Lower: 0
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• A character string can be displayed on the top, center, bottom, right or left of
the panel meter.
• Scale and scale values can be set above the arc of the panel meter.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Scale can be set above the arc of the panel meter.

(b) Changes the needle color when the monitor device value reaches a given
value.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

D100 50 100 230 150 150 150

0 300 0 300 0 300

Meter 1 Meter 1 Meter 1

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100 Needle: 255 Meter panel: 109 Text: Meter 1
<Form>tab Type: Top1/2 Upper: Fixed 300 Lower: Fixed 0
<Case>tab Range: 200<$V Needle: 0
<Graph>tab Scale value display (V H) 1 Upper: 300 Lower: 0
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

5 - 36 5 - 36
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The panelmeter display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Panelmeter" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Device Device Device dialog box ...Designation of device to be monitor.

16bit/32bit
Shape Image List dialog box ...Specify the panel meter display frame.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Needle Specify the panel meter display Needle. (0 to 255)
Meter panel Unchecked/checked Specify the panel meter display Plate. (0 to 255)
Text Text dialog box ...Set the text, display position and spacing from frame.
Size Designation of Size (V H). (0.5 to 8)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
High quality font Unchecked/checked
Form
Type 1/4 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right,Top-Right,Top-Left,Bottom-Left,Bottom-Right)/
1/2 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right)/3/4/Full circle
Direciton Clockwise/Counterclockwise
Point 0 /90 /180 /270
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real/BCD
Meter frame Unchecked/checked
Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Case
Extended tab

Edit Edit Display Format dialog box

Range Edit range dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Needle Specify the needle color (0 to 255)
Delete Deletion of table setting

Graph
Scale display Unchecked/checked
Scale points
Color
Scale value display Unchecked/checked
Size Designation of size (height width) of
numerical value to be displayed
Value no. Designation of number of numerical
values to be displayed (2 to 11)
Upper/Lower Designation of upper/lower limit value
to be displayed
Option Color Designation of display color of numerical
Security Setting of Security (0 to 15) value (0 to 255)

Offset Device dialog box ...Specify the device to be offset.

Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Setting of Defined case

5 - 37 5 - 37
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ...Designation of device to be monitor.
16bit/32bit
Shape Unchecked/checked

Image List dialog box ...Specify the panel meter display frame.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Needle Specify the panel meter display Needle. (0 to 255)
Meter panel Specify the panel meter display Plate. (0 to 255)

Form
Type 1/4 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right,Top-Right,Top-Left,Bottom-Left,Bottom-Right)/
1/2 (Top,Bottom,Left,Right)/3/4/Full circle
Direciton Clockwise/Counterclockwise
Point 0 /90 /180 /270
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Graph
Scale display Unchecked/checked

Scale points
Color

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up animation display" "Setting up panelmeter display" from
Contents of Help.

5 - 38 5 - 38
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.4 Graph Display Functions

The graph display functions collect word device values and show them in graph format.
They are available in the following types.
• Trend graph display function • Line graph display function
.... Shows data in trend graph .... Shows data in line graph
format. format.

• Bar graph display function • Statistical graph display function

.... Shows data in bar graph .... Shows the ratio of each
format. data to the total in statistical
graph format.
• Scattered chart display function • Level display function
.... Shows the X and Y axis .... Shows data as a level at
device values in scattered the ratio to upper/lower
chart format. limit.

5.4.1 Trend graph display function (shows a word device value on trend graph)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function gathers data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph.
(1) Function outline
(a) Collects data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph. After the
last part of the display range is reached, the screen is scrolled.

D100 100 300 200

Scrolling at display
range end
400 400
400
300 300 300
200
200 200
100
0 100 100
1 2 3
0 0
1 2 3 1 2 3

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Graph: Trend <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100
Number: 1 <Graph>tab Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 3
<Form>tab
Points: 3 (GOT-A900 series) Scale value display (V H) 1
<Others>tab : Value no.: 5 3
<Case>tab Upper: 400 Lower: 0
(GOT-F900 series) Upper: 400 3 Lower: 0 1
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

5 - 39 5 - 39
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The trend graph display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Line/Trend/Bar Chart" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Graph Trend
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Form
Direciton Right/Left
Number Designation of Number (1 to 8)
Points Designation of Points (2 to 100)
Frame Checked/unchecked
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Style Designation of Style
Delete Deletion of setting Width Designation of Width
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
16bit/32bit
Device Continuous/Random
Case
Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Graph
Extended tab

Scale Unchecked/checked
display
Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H) (0, 2 to 11)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Scale Checked/unchecked
value display Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of number of numerical values (V H)
to be displayed (0,2 to 11).
Upper/Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value
Option /displayed lower limit value (V H)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)
Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Store Unchecked/checked
memory
No clear trigger/
Trigger Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall
Trigger type Rise/Fall Device Device dialog box
Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) ...Set the Device No.
ON Sampling/OFF Sampling
Initial display Unchecked/checked

Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 40 5 - 40
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Graph Trend
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Form
Direciton Right/Left
Number Designation of Number (1 to 4)
Points Designation of Points (2 to 50)
Frame Unchecked/checked

Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Style Designation of Style
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Delete Deletion of setting

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN

16bit/32bit

Case

Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Others
Scale display Unchecked/checked
Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Trigger type Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600).
Store memory No clear trigger/
Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall

Device Device dialog box

...Setting of Device No.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up trend graph display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• As the condition for graphing the specified word device value, you can combine
and set the monitoring cycle and bit condition (ON/OFF).
• Up to eight graphs (for eight devices) can be displayed on one trend graph.
• Up to 100 pieces of collected data can be displayed on the screen.
• Scales and scale values can be set.
• Graph frame can be set.

5 - 41 5 - 41
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) Store memory

The trend graph collects data only when the screen including the graph is
displayed. When switching to other screen, the collected data will be cleared.
Make sure to check [Store Memory] to collect data even after switching to other
screen.
The status of device value is usually monitored and stored in the internal memory
of GOT.
Set [Store Memory] on basic tab.

Example: Monitored device: D10, D11

Base screen 1
Device value
100
D10 50 D11 25
50

0
0 60 120

Switch display screen Change device value

Base screen 5
D10 50 D11 25
Produce menu
Line 1
D10 25 D11 50
Line 2

D10 75 D11 90

Display base screen 1 again

Store memory Do not store memory

100 100

50 50

0 0
0 60 120 0 60 120

Display the device value Display current device value

before switching to other only after collecting and
screen, as well as the one displaying new data.
displayed on other screen
on the graph.

POINT
Timing of erasing the display stored in memory
The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
• When the condition for clearing trigger is enabled
• When GOT is reset or power supply is OFF.
• Download of project
• Display of build-in memory information
• Execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language
switching)

5 - 42 5 - 42
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(5) Timing for recognizing clear trigger

The timing of recognizing clear trigger in GOT is same as that set on [Trigger
Type] (trigger tab).
When [Sampling], [ON Sampling], [OFF Sampling] is set in [Trigger Type], the
device ON/OFF status set for clear trigger must be retained longer that the cycle
set in [Trigger Type].

Example of data retention for a period longer than that specified for "Trigger
Type"
Clear trigger : Set the timing to "Rise" and the device to "M10".
Trigger type : Set "Sampling (3 s)."
Touch switch : Set the device to "M10", and the action to "bit momentary"
and "OFF Delay (4 s)."

The "sampling (3 s)" trigger type condition is met during the time from pressing
the touch switch until the clear trigger (M10) is turned off by the OFF delay (4 s),
and the graph is deleted.

100 100

50 50

0 0
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4 5

Touch the touch switch The previously displayed

where a clear trigger is set. graph is deleted.

The graph is
deleted.

Sampling (3 s) OFF Delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)

5 - 43 5 - 43
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(6) Causes and measures when the trend graph display is not updated
in the set sampling cycle.
(a) Setting of Sampling
When data cannot be collected or graph display cannot be updated in the
set sampling cycle, the trend graph will be displayed with the value different
from actual one.
To display the trend graph correctly, check whether the trend graph is
displayed based on the actual device value, and make adjustment to
prolong setting sampling.
(b) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling"
When "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling" is set, there are cases the graph
is not updated in the set sampling cycle.
The causes for this problem and the measures to be taken are explained
below.
(i) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling cycle set in
the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is
not updated.

(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling cycle to one second)
one one one
second second second
Sampling cycle set in "Trigger Type"
ON

OFF
Status of the device set in "Trigger Device"
3)

1) 2) 4) 5)

At the timing of 1), the trend graph is updated.

At the timing of 2), the trend graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the trend graph is not updated because is
unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the trend graph is not updated because is
unmatchable to the device condition.
At the timing of 5), the trend graph is updated.
(ii) Measures
The sampling cycle set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on
the status of the device.
(The sampling cycle is not changed even if turning on or off the
device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1. Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2. Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the
display using the sequence program.

5 - 44 5 - 44
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(c) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling,

"Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling"
If store memory is used when [Sampling], [ON Sampling] or [OFF
Sampling] is set, the graph update timing will differ from the set sampling
cycle.
(i) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
• At trend graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security
level change etc.)
• At station No. switching
• At security level change
(ii) With setting store memory
Counting the sampling is started and reset at the following timing.
• At starting GOT
• At project download
• At build-in memory information displaying
• At execution of utility setup and message display switching (display
language switching)

5 - 45 5 - 45
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.4.2 Line graph display function (shows word device values on line graph)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function gathers the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph.
(1) Function outline
(a) Batch-collects the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph.
D100 100 200 300
D101 50 0 400
D102 300 400 100
D103 0 100 0
D104 400 400 300

400
400 400
300 300 300
200
200 200
100
0 100 100
100 101 102 103 104
0 0
100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Graph: Line <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)
Number :1 <Graph>tab Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 5
<Form>tab
Points :5 (GOT-A900 series) Scale value display (V H) 1
<Others>tab : Value no.: 5 5
<Case>tab Upper: 400 Lower: 0
(GOT-F900 series) Upper: 400 104 Lower: 0 100
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

(b) When the line graph display is updated, the old graph is not erased but a new
graph is overlaid on the old one. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is
displayed)
D100 100 200 300
D101 50 0 400
D102 300 400 100
D103 0 100 0
D104 400 400 300
Cleared by
erase trigger
400
400 400 400
300 300 300 300
200
200 200 200
100
0
100 100 100
100 101 102 103 104
0 0 0
100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Graph: Line <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)
Number :1
<Form>tab Scale display (V H): Scale points: 5 5
Points :5
<Graph>tab Scale value display (V H)
<Case>tab Upper: 400 Lower: 0
(GOT-A900 series) : Value no.: 5 5
Locus: checked: Clear on trigger rise
<Option>tab Upper: 400 104 Lower: 0 100
Device (Clear trigger): X0

POINT
Note the following when setting a line graph which is specified to show a locus.
• Only one graph may be set to one project.
• It cannot be set to a window screen.
• When there is line graph setting, the window screen's overlap window 2 or test
window cannot be displayed.
• The base screen where line graph setting has been made cannot be displayed as
multiple called screens simultaneously by the screen call function.
• The maximum size of a line graph is equal to the maximum size of an overlap
window.

5 - 46 5 - 46
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The line graph display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Line/Trend/Bar Chart" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Graph Line
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Form
Direciton Right/Left
Number Designation of Number (1 to 8)
Points Designation of Points (2 to 500)
Frame Checked/unchecked
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Edit Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Continuous/Random
2 Device point Unchecked/checked
Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Style Designation of Style
Delete Deletion of setting Width Designation of Width
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Case 16bit/32bit
Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Graph Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Extended tab

Scale display Unchecked/checked

Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H) (0, 2 to 11)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Scale value Checked/unchecked
display Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of number of numerical values (V H)
to be displayed (0, 2 to 11).
Upper/Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value/displayed
lower limit value (V H)
Option Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)
Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box
Locus Unchecked/checked ...Set the Device No.
No clear trigger
Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall
Value not unchecked/Checked Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
displayed
Designation of Value not displayed
Trigger
Trigger type Rise/Fall/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling
Initial display Unchecked/checked
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ......Set the calculation expression.

5 - 47 5 - 47
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Graph Line
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Form
Direciton Right/Left
Number Designation of Number (1 to 4)
Points Designation of Points (2 to 50)
Frame Unchecked/checked
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Edit Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)

Style Designation of Style
Delete Deletion of setting
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
16bit/32bit
Case
Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Others
Scale display Unchecked/checked
Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Trigger type Specify the cycle time (1 to 3600).
Store memory Unchecked/checked
No clear trigger/
Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Value not Unchecked/checked

displayed
Designation of Value not displayed

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up line graph display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset, expression and hidden values can be set.
• Up to eight graphs can be displayed.
• Up to 500 devices can be monitored with one graph.
• Scales and scale values can be set.
• Graph frame can be set.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Up to four graphs can be displayed.
• Up to 50 devices can be monitored with one graph.
• Scales can be set.
• Graph frame can be set.

5 - 48 5 - 48
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the
timing set in "Trigger Type" (Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger
Type", hold the ON/OFF status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling
set in "Trigger Type" or longer.

5 - 49 5 - 49
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(5) Causes and measures when the line graph display is not updated
in the set sampling cycle.
(a) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF sampling"
When "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" is set, there are cases the graph is
not updated in the set sampling cycle.
The causes for this problem and the measures to be taken are explained
below.
(i) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling cycle set in
the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is
not updated.
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling cycle to one second)
one one one
second second second
Sampling cycle set in "Trigger Type"
ON

OFF
Status of the device set in "Trigger Device"
3)

1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the line graph is updated.
At the timing of 2), the line graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the line graph is not updated because is
unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the line graph is not updated because is
unmatchable to the device condition.
At the timing of 5), the line graph is updated.
(ii) Measures
The sampling cycle set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on
the status of the device.
(The sampling cycle is not changed even if turning on or off the
device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1. Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2. Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the
display using the sequence program.
(b) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling
cycle, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling"
If locus display is used when "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF
Sampling" is set, the graph update timing will differ from the set sampling
cycle.
(i) Without setting locus
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following
timing.
• At line graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security
level change etc.)
• At security level change
(b) With setting locus
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following
timing.
• At starting GOT
• At project download
• At build-in memory information displaying
• At execution of utility setup and message display switching (display
language switching)

5 - 50 5 - 50
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.4.3 Bar graph display function (shows word device values on bar graph)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows data stored in word devices on a bar graph.

(1) Function outline
(a) Batch-collects the data stored in multiple word devices and shows them on a
bar graph.
D100 -200 -400 200
D101 400 300 400
D102 200 300 -400
D103 -200 100 -200

400 400
400 200 200
200 0 0
0 -200 -200
-200 -400 -400
D100 D101 D102 D103 D100 D101 D102 D103
-400
D100 D200 D300 D400

Drawn as figures/texts.

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Graph: Bar <Monitor Device>tab Device: D100 (Continuous)
<Form>tab Number: 4 Scale display (Vertical): Scale points: 5
<Graph>tab
(Vertical)
(GOT-A900 series)
Scale value display (Vertical) 1
<Case>tab Upper: 400 Lower: -400 <Others>tab
: Value no.: 5 (Vertical)
(GOT-F900 series)
Upper: 400 (Vertical) Lower: -400 (Vertical)
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

(b) Sorts the bar graph (ascending order, descending order) according to the
word device values. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is displayed)
D100 300 200 400
D101 200 300 100
D102 400 100 200
D103 100 400 300

400 400
400 300 300
300 200 200
200 100 100
100
0

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Base : Fixed 0
<Basic>tab Graph: Bar <Case>tab Upper : Fixed 400
Lower : Fixed 0
Scale display (Vertical): Scale points: 5
Device: D100 (Graph: 0) (Vertical)
<Monitor Device>
D101 (Graph: 3) <Graph>tab Scale value display (Vertical)
tab
D102 (Graph: 255) : Value no.: 5 (Vertical)
Upper: 400 (Vertical) Lower: 0 (Vertical)
<Form>tab Number: 3 <Option>tab Sort: Ascending

5 - 51 5 - 51
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The bar graph display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Line/Trend/Bar Chart" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Graph Bar
Basic tab

Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Form
Direciton Vertical/Horizontal
Number Designation of Number (1 to 8)
Offset Designation of offset value (0 to 100)
Width Designation of bar width in bar graph (1 to 500)
Width + Space Designation of spacing including bar width. (1 to 500)
Frame
Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Pattern Designation of Pattern
Background Designation of Background
Delete Deletion of setting
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
16bit/32bit
Device Continuous/Random
Case
Base/Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Graph Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Extended tab

Scale display Unchecked/checked

Scale points Designation of Scale points (0, 2 to 11)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Scale value Unchecked/checked
display Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of number of numerical values
to be displayed (0, 2 to 11).
Upper/Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value/
displayed lower limit value
Option Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Color
Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)
Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Sort Unchecked/checked
Ascending/Descending Specify the order of bar graph sorting.
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.
Initial display Unchecked/checked
Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 52 5 - 52
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Graph Bar
Shape Unchecked/checked
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape No.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
Form
Direciton Vertical/Horizontal
Frame Unchecked/checked
Scale Position Left/Down/Right/Up

Monitor Device
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Delete Deletion of setting
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
16bit/32bit
Case
Base/Upper/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Others Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Scale display Unchecked/checked

Scale points Designation of Scale points (V H)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up bar graph display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• Bar graphs can be displayed above/under the designated base value.
• Up to eight graphs (for eight devices) can be displayed.
• Graphs can be sorted in ascending/descending order.
• Scales and scale values can be set.
• Graph frame can be set.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Bar graphs can be displayed above/under the designated base value.
• Up to one graph (for one device) can be displayed.
• Scales can be set.
• Graph frame can be set.

5 - 53 5 - 53
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.4.4 Statistical graph display function (shows word device values on statistical graph)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function graphs the ratios of the collected word device data to the total.
(1) Function outline
(a) Collects the data of multiple word devices and shows the ratios of the word
device data to the total on a circle graph.
D0 40 20 50
D1 60 30 70
D2 70 90 40
D3 30 60 40
0 0
0

75 25 75 25 75 25

50
50 50

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Graph : Circle graph Device

<Basic>tab : D0 (Graph 255, Pattern 8)
No. of Partitions :4
<Division>tab D1 (Graph 182, Pattern 8)
Scale display: Scale points: 4 D2 (Graph 109, Pattern 8)
<Graph>tab
Scale value display 1: Value no.: 4 D3 (Graph 0, Pattern 8)
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

(b) Shows the ratios of the gathered multiple word device data to the total on a
percentage bar graph.
D0 40 20 50
D1 60 30 70
D2 70 90 40
D3 30 60 40

100 100
100

50
50 50

0 0 0

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Graph : Rectangle graph Device
<Basic>tab : D0 (Graph 255, Pattern 8)
No. of Partitions :4
<Division>tab D1 (Graph 182, Pattern 8)
Scale display: Scale points: 3 D2 (Graph 109, Pattern 8)
<Graph>tab
Scale value display 1: Value no.: 3 D3 (Graph 0, Pattern 8)
1: Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT-A900 series.

5 - 54 5 - 54
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The statistical graph display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Statistics Chart" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Graph Rectangle graph

Circle graph
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
No. of Designation of No. of Partitions (0 to 255)
Partitions
Direciton Up/Down/Right/Left
Division
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Pattern Designation of Pattern
Background Designation of Background (0 to 250)
Device Device dialog box
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
16bit/32bit
Device Continuous/ Random

Graph
Extended tab

Scale display Unchecked/checked

Scale points Designation of Scale points (0, 2 to 11)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Scale value Unchecked/checked
display
Size Designation of Size (V H)
Value no. Designation of Value no.
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Option
Security Designation of Security (0 to 15)
Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Sort Unchecked/checked
Ascending/Descending
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.
Initial display Unchecked/checked
Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 55 5 - 55
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Graph Rectangle graph
Circle graph
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Image List.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Plate (0 to 255)
No. of Designation of No. of Partitions (0 to 8)
Partitions
Direction Up/Right
Division
Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph (0 to 255)
Device Device dialog box

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN

16bit/32bit
Graph
Scale display Unchecked/checked
Scale points Designation of Scale points (2 to 50)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up statistical graph display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• Statistical graphs of up to 32 divisions (for 32 devices) can be displayed.
• Graphs can be sorted in ascending/descending order.
• Scales and scale values can be set.
• Rectangle graph or circle graph is available.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Statistical graphs of up to eight divisions (for eight devices) can be displayed.
• Graphs can be sorted in ascending/descending order.
• Scales can be set.
• Rectangle graph or circle graph is available.

5 - 56 5 - 56
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.4.5 Scattered chart display function (shows word device values on scattered chart)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function gathers data stored in word devices associated with the X and Y axes
and shows them on a scattered chart.
(1) Function outline
(a) Collects and shows the data of one point device. By updating the display with
the previous display remaining, shows the variation of the point device value
as a locus.

X axis device 400

D100 200 300 50 300
200

Y axis device 100

0
D200 50 200 300 0 100 200 300

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

<Device/Attribute> X axis Device: D100
<Basic>tab Graph : Sample
tab Y axis Device: D200
Scale display: Scale point: 5 5
X: Upper (400)
Scale value display
X: Lower (0)
<Case>tab <Graph>tab : Size: 5 5
Y: Upper (400)
Upper: 400 400
Y: Lower (0)
Lower: 0 0

(b) Batch-collects and shows the data of multiple point devices. By changing the
display switching device value, shows different data as different point figures.
X axis devices
D100 100 50
D101 250 125 400
D102 150 300 300
D103 300 350 200
100

Y axis devices 0
0 100 200 300

D200 100 300

D201 200 340
D202 250 50 Display switching device Point figures are changed
D203 300 100 D300 1 2 according to display
switching device value.

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Graph : Batch
<Basic>tab
Mode : Locus Display trigger: ”Device” (D300)
<Device/Attribute>
Case1: Defined case (2==$V), Type: , Points: 4
tab
<Case(Word)>tab Color: 224 X axis Device: D100, Y axis Device: D200
Normally: Type: , Color: 255
Scale display: Scale point: 5 5
X: Upper (400)
Scale value display
X: Lower (0)
<Case>tab <Graph>tab : Size: 5 5
Y: Upper (400)
Upper: 400 400
Y: Lower (0)
Lower: 0 0

5 - 57 5 - 57
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The scattered chart display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Scatter Chart" dialog box

Basic
Graph Sample/Batch
Basic tab

Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ......Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Graph Frame Unchecked/checked
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Mode Replace/Locus

Device/Attribute
Display switching Fixed/Device
Device Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/Word (BCD16)
Display Attribute Point/Line
Fixed Attribute Type / / / / / / /
Size Small/Medium/Large
Color 0 to 255
Points Numerical setting
Device Continuous/Random
16 Bit/32 Bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Device (X axis) Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Device (Y axis) Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Case
X: Upper Fixed (Numerical setting)
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
X: Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Y: Upper Fixed (Numerical setting)

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Y: Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Case (Bit)
ON Type / / / / / / /
Size Small/Medium/Large
Color 0 to 255
OFF Type / / / / / / /
Size Small/Medium/Large
Color 0 to 255

Case (Word)
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ...Set the display range, type, size and color.
(Setting for each case)
Delete

Edit Edit Display Format dialog box ...Set the display range, type, size and color.
(Ordinary)

5 - 58 5 - 58
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Graph
Extended tab

Scale display Checked Scale points

/unchecked
Color
Scale value display Size, Value No., Upper, Lower, Color

Option
Security
Offset Checked Device Device dialog box
/unchecked ...Set the Device No.
Store memory Checked/unchecked
Clear trigger Checked Clear on trigger rise/Clear on trigger fall
/unchecked
Device Device dialog box

Value not X: Unchecked/checked (Hidden value setting) ...Set the Device No.
displayed
Y: Unchecked/checked (Hidden value setting)

Operation at frequency Interrupt

over time Initialize and continue
Accumulate/Average Checked Writing interval
/unchecked Device Device dialog box
Trigger ...Set the Device No.
Trigger Type Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval)/Rise/Fall/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling

Device Device dialog box

...Set the Device No.
Expression Initial display
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ......Set the calculation expression.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up scattered chart display" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• The scattered chart display function allows up to 24 points to be set on one
screen.
• Make setting to avoid a superimpose window to be overlaid on the scattered chart
which is not stored into memory.
If it is overlaid, the overlaid scattered chart part is erased.

5 - 59 5 - 59
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) Store memory

Check the store memory before collecting data after the screen has been
switched to another.
Be sure to save device values into the internal memory of GOT.
The contents stored in the memory will be erased in the case of GOT reset or
power OFF.
The setting for Store Memory is made on the Extended tab.
When no setting is made for Store Memory, the scatter graph executes data
collection only when displaying the screen with the graph arranged. If switched to
other screen, the collected data will be cleared.
Example: Screen switching operation
Graph type [Sample], X-device: D100, Y-device: D101
Store memory

100

Device value 50

D100 50 0
0 50 100
Device value changes
D101 50
D100 50 100 0 Base screen 1
Display both the device value (before being
100 D101 50 25 100 switched to other screen) and the device value
50 in the display of other screen.
0 Switch to Display base
0 50 100
and display screen 1 again. Do not store memory
base screen 5.
Base screen 1 100

50

Production menu 0
0 50 100
Line 1

Line 2 Base screen 1

Only graph display current device value
Base screen 5 after collecting and displaying new data.

<The maximum sampling results which can be stored in the memory>

Up to 2000 points displayed in scatter graph can be saved in the internal
memory.
The following shows the upper limit for each graph type of the scatter graph
(sample, batch).
• Sample .............. 2000 times
2000
• Batch ................. times (Round off the part after decimal point)
Points
For the case that the number of displayed points exceed 2000, make setting for
[Operation at frequency over time] on the Extended tab.
• Interrupt ............................. Interrupts data collection
• Initialize and continue ....... Clears the internal memory, erase the scatter
graph display and collects data again.

POINT
(1) An error message can be displayed when the storage sampling number has
reached the maximum. (refer to Section 5.2.3)
(2) The data stored in memory will be erased according to the following timing.
• When the clear trigger condition is satisfied
• When the number of sampling data available for storage in memory exceeds the
maximum (Only when setting [Operation at frequency over time] to [Initialize and
continue])
• When GOT is reset or power supply is turned OFF
• Download of project
• Display of build-in memory information
• Execution of utility setup and message display switching (display language
switching)

5 - 60 5 - 60
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(5) Causes and measures when the graph display is not updated in the
set sampling cycle.
(a) Updated timing at setting "ON Sampling" or "OFF sampling"
When "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling" is set, there are cases the graph
is not updated in the set sampling cycle.
The causes for this problem and the measures to be taken are explained
below.
(i) Causes
The status of the device is checked at the each sampling cycle set in
the "Trigger Type".
When the device condition is not satisfied at checking, the display is
not updated.
(When setting both "Trigger Type" to "On Sampling" and sampling cycle to one second)
one one one
second second second
Sampling cycle set in "Trigger Type"
ON

OFF
Status of the device set in "Trigger Device"
3)

1) 2) 4) 5)
At the timing of 1), the scatter graph is updated.
At the timing of 2), the scatter graph is updated.
At the timing of 3), the scatter graph is not updated because is
unmatchable to Sampling.
At the timing of 4), the scatter graph is not updated because is
unmatchable to the device condition.
At the timing of 5), the scatter graph is updated.
(ii) Measures
The sampling cycle set using the "Trigger Type" is not depending on
the status of the device.
(The sampling cycle is not changed even if turning on or off the
device.)
To start the sampling using the device, set as follows.
1. Set "Rise" or "Fall" using "Trigger Type".
2. Program so that turn on or off the device at the timing to update the
display using the sequence program.
(b) Updated timing when setting the either following sampling
cycle, "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF Sampling"
If store memory is used when "Sampling", "ON Sampling" or "OFF
Sampling" is set, the graph update timing will differ from the set sampling
cycle.
(i) Without setting store memory
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following
timing.
• At scatter graph displaying (displaying by screen switching or security
level change etc.)
• At security level change
(ii) With setting store memory
Counting the sampling cycle is started and reset at the following
timing.
• At starting GOT
• At project download
• At build-in memory information displaying
• At execution of utility setup and message display switching (display
language switching)

5 - 61 5 - 61
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(6) Clear ON trigger recognition timing

The timing when the GOT recognizes a clear ON trigger is the same as the
timing set in "Trigger Type" (Trigger tab).
When "Sampling", "ON sampling" or "OFF sampling" has been set in "Trigger
Type", hold the ON/OFF status of the device set to clear trigger at the sampling
set in "Trigger Type" or longer.

Example of holding the display for the sampling period set by [Display Trigger
Type] or longer
Clear Trigger : Set rise timing and M10 for the device
Display Trigger Type : Set to sampling (3 s)
Touch Switch : Set M10 for the device, bit momentary for Action
and 4 s for OFF Delay

The condition of [Display Trigger Type]: Sampling (3 s) is met after pressing

touch switch until the clear trigger (M10) turns off by the OFF Delay (4 s), and the
graph is erased.

400 400
300 300
200 200
100 100
0 0
0 100 200 300 0 100 200 300

T ouch the switch set for The graph displaed previously

the clear trigger erased.

Erase
the graph.

Sampling (3 s) OFF Delay touch switch: M10 (4 s)

5 - 62 5 - 62
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.4.6 Level display function (shows a word device value as a level)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows a word device value as a level at the ratio to the upper/ lower limit.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows a word device value as a level in any closed figure at the ratio to the
upper/lower limit.

D100 100 200 300

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Upper: 300
<Basic>tab Device: D100 <Form>tab
Lower: 0

(b) Used with the numerical display function (refer to Section 5.1.1) or comment
display function (refer to Section 5.2.1). 1

25 98
(Monitor device: D0)

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D0

1: On an object of the numerical or comment display function, set the drawing mode (transparent/XOR) which is used to superimpose the
object on the level display.

POINT
• Level display can be overlapped with a value or comment of the numerical or
comment display function.
• Refer to Section 4.4.2 for overlapping with an object.

5 - 63 5 - 63
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The level display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Level" dialog box
Basic
Basic tab

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

16bit/32bit
Boundary Set the device value range. (0 to 255)
Level Designation of Level (0 to 255)
Pattern Designation of Pattern (0 to 255)
Background Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Form

Direction Right/Left/Up/Down

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real

Uppe/Lower Fixed (Numerical setting)

Case Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Extended tab

Edit E Edit
‰ ‚ ^ Display
Ö ‚ ^ Format
¶ Ö ‚ ^ dialog
ã Ö ‰
º Ö‚ box Range Edit range dialog box
...Set the device range.
Delete Deletion of setting
Level Designation of Level (0 to 255)
Pattern Designation of Pattern
Background Designation of Background
Option (0 to 255)
Security Setting of Security

Offset Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Range/Sampling (Setting of Sampling Interval) /Bit trigger

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Range Edit Range dialog box ..Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Initial display Unchecked/checked

Hold display Unchecked/checked
Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)
Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 64 5 - 64
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up graph display" "Setting up level display" from Contents of
Help.

POINT
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• A level can be displayed at top, bottom, left or right of a figure.
• The level display color and filling pattern can be changed when the monitor device
value reaches a given value.

5 - 65 5 - 65
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.5 Touch Key Functions (When Touched, Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device
Value Change and Screen Switching)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
The touch functions are designed to perform the following operations when the
corresponding touch keys are touched.
GOT-A900 GOT-F900
Function name Operation Refer to
series series
Bit function Turns the bit device ON/OFF by touching the key. (a)
Word function Changes the word device value by touching the key. (b)
Base switching function Switches the base screen by touching the key. (c), (d), (e), (f),
Window switching function Switches the window screen by touching the key. (g)
Switches to the extended function screen such as ladder monitor or test
Extended function (h)
window by touching the key.
Station switching function Switches the station by touching the key. (i)
Creation of numerical/ASCII input
Creates the key for numerical or ASCII input. (j)
key

(1) Function outline

(a) Turns a bit device ON/OFF.
By changing the operation type, any of the following four operations can be
performed.
Bit SET
Bit

When touched, the

specified bit turns ON.
Setting Portion Settings
<Action>tab Bit Device: X1 Action: Set
Bit RST
Bit

When touched, the

specified bit turns OFF.
Setting Portion Settings
<Action>tab Bit Device: X2 Action: Reset
Bit ALT
Bit
ON OFF
OFF ON

When touched, the currently

specified bit status is reversed.
Setting Portion Settings
<Action>tab Bit Device: X3 Action: Alternate
Bit momentary
Bit

Only while touched, the

specified bit turns ON.
Setting Portion Settings
<Action>tab Bit Device: X4 Action: Momentary

5 - 66 5 - 66
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) Changes the word device value.

By changing the operation type, any of the following three operations can be
performed.
Fixed Fixed value 20

D100
100 20
Touching writes
the specified value.

Setting Portion Settings

<Action>tab Word Device: D101 Action: Fixed (20)

Device
D100 200
D102
100 200
Touching writes the present
value of the specified word
device.

Setting Portion Settings

<Action>tab Word Device: D102 Action: Device (D100)

Fixed + device Fixed + D100

100 + 30 = 130
D103
100 130
Touching writes the present value
of the specified word device +
the fixed value.

Setting Portion Settings

<Action>tab Word Device: D103 Action: Fixed (100) + Device (D100)

(c) Switches to the specified base screen.

Base screen
switching device Base screen No. 1
1 10
Base screen No. 10

Specified value: 10 Base screen of the

specified value appears.

Setting Portion Settings

<Action>tab Base Basic Next screen: Fixed (10)

POINT
• Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window
screens to be switched.
• By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.

Base screen No.1 Base screen No.1

Window screen No. 1 Window screen No. 2

5 - 67 5 - 67
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(d) Turning the specified bit device ON/OFF switches between two different base
screens.
Base screen When OFF When ON
switching device Base screen No. 10
When X0 is ON
10 15 Base screen Base screen
When X0 is OFF No. 20 No. 15
10 20
When X0 is ON: 15/OFF: 20 Base screen Base screen
No. 20 appears. No. 15 appears.
Setting Portion Settings
Base Basic Next screen: Device (X0)
<Action>tab
Action ON: No. (15) OFF: No. (20)

POINT
• Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window
screens to be switched.
• By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.

(e) Switches the base screens according to the present value of the specified
word device.
Base screen When
switching device 1 D100 10 D100=100 D100>0 normal
1 New value Base screen No. 10
depends on
comparison Base screen Base screen Base screen Base screen
expression. No. 10 No. 20 No.30 No.80

When 1 D100 10 : 10 Base screen Base screen Base screen Base screen
When D100=100 : 20 No. 10 No. 20 No. 30 No. 80
When D100>0 : 30 appears appears appears appears
When normal : 80

Setting Portion Settings

Base Basic Next screen: Device (D100)
Action Range: 1<=$$<=10 No.: 10
<Action>tab :$$=100 No.: 20
:0<$$ No.: 30
:Normally No.: 80

POINT
• Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window
screens to be switched.
• By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.
• Up to 64 different comparison expressions (including those for normal setting)
may be set.

(f) Switches to the higher-level base screen.

Base screen
switching
device Base screen No. 20 Base screen No. 15
20 15 More previous
base screen

Previous base screen Base screen No. 15

No.: 15 appears

Setting Portion Settings

<Action>tab Base Basic Next screen: Previous

5 - 68 5 - 68
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

POINT
• The GOT stores the screen switching of base screens hierarchically.
Pressing the touch switch display, i.e., switches to the base screen set as the
upper tier.
This cycle can be repeated up to 10 times.
Example)
Hierarchy 1 Hierarchy 2 Hierarchy 3

1) 2)
Base 1 Base 12 Base 23
3)

When the screens are switched as shown above, 1) 2) 3), and then the
touch switch on the base screen 12 is pressed, the base screen1, that is set as
the upper tier, will be displayed.
• The level information is made invalid when the GOT is powered off.
Note that if you switch power off, then on again on any midway level, the screen
displayed first will be on the top level.

(g) Closes a window screen.

Base screen
switching device Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 1 Base screen No. 1
0 1 0
Window screen
No. 1

Specified value: 1 Specified value: 0

Setting Portion Settings
Window Basic Next screen: Fixed (1)
<Action>tab
Window Basic Next screen: Fixed (0)

POINT
By setting this function to window screens, window screens can be switched.

(h) Starts the ladder monitor function (e.g. extended function).

P0 M999 K
187 MOV 1 D1
K K
- 1234 D100 MOV 2 D2
RST V
K
MOV 90 D162
K
MOV 110 D167
K
MOV 100 D172
SET M9028
K K
DUTY 350 400 M9020
D1 D2 V D162 D167 D172
1 2 47 90 110 100

Ladder monitor
function appears.
Setting Portion Settings
<Action>tab Exlended Extended action: Ladder monitor

POINT
The touch key (extended) function can be used to set the following different items.
• Utility • Ladder monitor 1, 2 • Key window
• System monitor 2 • Test window 1 • Special function
monitor 1, 2
• Start hardcopy • Abort hardcopy 2 • Password
• Clock setting 2 • Clean screen 2 • Network monitor 2
• Brightness adjustment 2 • List editor 2 • Motion monitor 2
• Servo amplifier monitor
1 Cannot be set when the A95 GOT/A956WGOT is used.
2 Cannot be used, if set, when GT SoftGOT is used.

5 - 69 5 - 69
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(i) Performs the station switching function.

The station switching function allows multiple stations to be monitored on the
same screen by switching the object device currently monitored on the data
link/network system to the same device of a different station.
1) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number.

Monitoring the Monitoring the

host station other station
NW No. : 2
Station No.
: 10

Specified station number

Other station NW No. : 2
Station No. : 10

Setting Portion Settings

<Action>tab Station No. Basic Next station: Other (NW No.: 2 Station No.: 10)
Mode :All

2) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number according

to ON/OFF of the specified bit device.
When OFF When ON
Monitoring the Monitoring the Monitoring the
host station other station other station
Station No.: 5 Station No.: 15

Station No. 5 appears. Station No. 15 appears.

When X0 is ON : Station No. 15
When OFF. : Station No. 5

Setting Portion Settings

Station No. Basic Next station: Device(X0)
<Action>tab Mode :All
Action ON: Station No.(15) OFF: Station No.(5)

3) Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number when the
present value of the specified word device corresponds to the set
comparison expression.
When
1 D100 100 101 D100 300 normal
Monitoring the
host station Monitoring the Monitoring the Monitoring the
other station other station host station
Station No.: 5 Station No.: 10

When 1 D100 100 : Station No. 5 Station No. 5 appears. Station No. 10 appears. No switching
When 101 D100 300 : Station No. 10
When normal : No switching

Setting Portion Settings

Station No. Basic Next station: Device (D100)
Mode :All
<Action>tab Action Range: 1<=$$<=100 Switching type: Other Station No.5
: 101<=$$<=300 Switching type: Other Station No.10
: Normally Switching type: Host

5 - 70 5 - 70
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

4) Switches between different station numbers according to the screen type

(four types of base screen, overlap windows 1, 2, and superimpose
window).

Base screen
Monitoring the host station Monitoring the other station Monitoring the other station
Station No.: 2 Station No.: 2
1
1 1 1 Monitoring the
Overlap window 1 Monitoring the Monitoring the
2 other station
2 host station 2 host station 2 Station No.: 10

1 Touch key 1
Other station N/W No. :2
Mode : Screen (Base)
2 Touch key 2
Other station N/W No. :10
Mode : Screen (Overlap window 1)

Setting Portion Settings

Station No. Basic Next station: Other (NW No.: 2)
Touch key 1
Mode :Screen (Base)
<Action>tab
Station No. Basic Next station: Other (NW No.: 10)
Touch key 2
Mode :Screen (Overlap window1)

(j) Creates keys for numerical and ASCII inputs.

Type

ABCD 123

Setting Portion Settings

A Key code: 0061H 1 Key code: 0031H

B Key code: 0062H 2 Key code: 0032H

<Action>tab C Key code: 0063H 3 Key code: 0033H

D Key code: 0064H Key code: 000DH

Key code: 002DH

POINT
• Refer to Appendix 3 for details of key codes.
• Numerical and ASCII input keys are supplied in the template of GT Designer.

5 - 71 5 - 71
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The touch key function consists of the following setting items.
• "Touch key" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Basic tab

Display Key/ Bit/ Word

trigger
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Range Edit range dialog box ...Set the device value range.
Data length 16bit/32bit
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Shape No/ Basic figure/ Free figure

Switch area reverse Unchecked/checked

Buzzer Always set/Set only fill requirements/Always not set

One shot

During Push
Case
ON/OFF Shape (Basic figure) Image List dialog box Choose the Shape.

(Free figure) Panelkit dialog box Choose the Shape.

Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)

Switch Designation of Switch (0 to 255)

Pattern Designation of Pattern

Background Designation of Background (0 to 255)

Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised

Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Solid Designation of Solid of characters.

V H Designation of Size (V H)
High quality font

Text ON Text/
Direct Text dialog box ...Set the touch key text.
OFF Text
Copy from ON Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.

Indirect Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Fixed ON/Off (Numerical setting)

Preview No. Setting of Comment No.

(To the following page)

5 - 72 5 - 72
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(From the previous page)

Action
Bit Key Action (Bit) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Action Set/ Alternate/

Reset/ Momentary

Word Key Action (Word) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/
16bit/32bit Real
Type Fixed Set the fixed value to be written to
word device.
Indirect Device Device dialog box

Initial value Condition value

condition Reset value
Key Action (Extended Key) Utility/Key Window/Test Window/Start hardcopy/
Extended Extended
dialog box Password/Clean screen/Change Brightness/
action
Ladder monitor/System monitor/Special function monitor/
Abort hardcopy/Clock setting/Network monitor/
Key Action (Base switching) Basic Servo amplifier monitor/List editor/motion monitor
Base
dialog box Previous
Fixed Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the
Screen.
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)

Action /Word (BCD16)
(for bit)
No. Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the
Hold Screen.
Action (for word)
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box
...Set the conditional expression and switching
method.
Delete Deletion of operation
Up/Down Move operation sequence up/down
Edit Edit Display Format dialog box
Basic ...Set the switching method for the case where
Window Key Action (Window conditional expression is not applicable.
switching) dialog box Next Fixed
screen
Device Device dialog box
...Setting of Device
No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)/
Word (BCD16)
Type Overlap Window1/Overlap
Window2/Superimpose Window
Action (for bit)

Same as the settings of Operation setting Action (for bit)

tab in Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box

Action (for word)

Same as the settings of Operation setting Action

(for word) tab in
Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box
(To the following page)

5 - 73 5 - 73
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(From the previous page)

Key Action (Switching Basic

Station
Station No.) dialog box Next Host
No.
station Other NW No.
Station No.
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of
Device No.
Data type Bit/Word (BIN16) /
Mode All Word (BCD16)

Screen Base/Overlap window1/Overlap

Type window2/Superimpose window
Action (For bit)
Host
Other NW No.
Station No.
Hold
Action (For word)

Same as the settings of Operation setting Action (for word)

tab in Key operation setting (base switching) dialog box
Edit Change the setting.
Delete Delete the setting.
Key code Set the Key code

Option
Extended tab

Security (Display) Specify of Security (0 to 15)

Security (input) Specify of Security (0 to 15)
Simultaneous press On preference/ Off preference
Delay No/
ON/OFF/Press twice
Attribute for middle Shape Choose the Shape
of two presses Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Switch Designation of Switch (0 to 255)
Pattern Designation of Pattern
Background Designation of Background
(0 to 255)
Text Text dialog box
Style Regular/Bold/Solid/Raised
Edit key group Checked/unchecked
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Solid Designation of Solid of chraracters.
V H Designation of Size (V H)
High quality font

Offset Unchecked/checked Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

5 - 74 5 - 74
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Display Key
trigger Bit Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Shape No
Basic figure
Basic figure
Case
(ON/OFF)
Shape Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Switch Designation of Switch (0 to 255)
Text Text dialog box ...Set the touch key text.
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
V H Designation of Size (V H)
Action Copy from ON Copy ON-time text setting to OFF-time text setting.

Bit Key Action (Bit) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Action Set/Alternate/Reset/Momentary

Word Key Action (Word) dialog box Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

16bit/32bit
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Type Fixed Set the fixed value to be written to
word device.
Indirect Device Device dialog box

Initial value Condition value

condition
Reset value

Key Action (Base switching) Basic Previous

Base
dialog box

Edit Change the setting. Fixed Screen Image dialog box

...Choose the Screen.
Delete Delete the setting.

Key code Set the Key code.

Option/Trigger
Simultaneous Unchecked/checked
press
Trigger type Ordinary
ON/OFF Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Auto repeat Unchecked/checked

5 - 75 5 - 75
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up touch key" "Setting up touch key" from Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security can be set to display/hide data and to enable/disable the touch key.
• Idling period from when the key is touched until operation starts (set period,
touch again) can be set in increments of one second with a minimum value of
one second. (Delay setting)
• Setting can be made to disable touch keys from being touched simultaneously.
• The following multiple functions can be set to one touch key. If the touch key is
set as an extended key, multiple functions cannot be set.
Operation priority
Function Quantity under multiple
setting
Bit momentary 20 High
Bit SET 20
Bit RST 20
Bit ALT 20
Word SET 20
Base screen switching 1
Window screen switching (overlap window 1) 1
Window screen switching (overlap window 2) 1
Window screen switching (superimpose window) 1
Station switching 1 Low

5 - 76 5 - 76
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.6 Data Input Functions

The data input functions write any data to devices.
They are available in the following types.
• Numerical input function ..............Writes any value to a device.
• ASCII input function .....................Writes any key code to word devices.

5.6.1 Numerical input function (writes any value to device)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function writes any value to the specified word device.

(1) Function outline
(a) Writes any value to a word device (D100).
D100 100 1000
D100 100 D200 100 D100 100
0 D200 100 D100 1000 D200 100
0

Key window Key window

Touch an input area to Numerical input Move the cursor to the

display the input key next input area.
window.
Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Device: D100

(b) You can change the display color and attributes when entering a given value
to the monitor device. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)

Temperature target value Temperature target value Temperature target value

Temperature target value

58 -20 125
58

Key window

(Monitor device: D0)

Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Device: D0 Case1: Defined case ($W<0), Numeral: 255
<Basic>tab <Case>tab
Shape: checked Case2: Defined case (100<$W), Numeral:0, Plate: 255

(c) You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple
numerical input areas.

A 100 B 0 A 550
0 B 0 A 550 B 0 A 550 B 3

Key window
C 200 D 50 C 200 0
D 50 C 200
Key window D 180
5 C 200
Key window D 185

Input cursor moving path Numerical input Numerical input Numerical input
Move the input cursor to D. Move the input cursor to B. Move the input cursor to C.
Item Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings
Numerical User ID: 1
<Basic>tab Device: D101 <Option>tab
Input A Move destination ID: 4
Numerical User ID: 2
<Basic>tab Device: D102 <Option>tab
Input B Move destination ID: 3
Numerical User ID: 3
<Basic>tab Device: D103 <Option>tab
Input C Move destination ID: 1
Numerical
<Basic>tab Device: D104
Input D User ID: 4
<Option>tab
Screen auxiliary Move destination ID: 2
Common Cursor Movement Defined key action: User ID order
setting

5 - 77 5 - 77
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(d) Controls the input cursor position on the PLC CPU side and also develops the
device value whose numerical input has been established into other control.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
Use the system information function to make sure that the numerical input has
been established.
Under the conditions of the "numerical input number storage area" and
"numerical input signal" data, develop the numerical input value into other
control.
[System information function devices used in this setting example]
Item Description
D6: Numerical input number storage area Stores the user ID of the established numerical input function.
D2.b4: Numerical input signal Turns ON when the numerical input is established.
D1.b4: Numerical input completion signal Turns ON to turn OFF the numerical input signal.

M1 OFF ON D101 0 100

A 0 B 0 A 0
100 B 0
M2 OFF D6 0 1
M3 OFF C 0 D
Key window
0 D2.b4 OFF ON C 0 D 0
Key window
M4 OFF

When M1 turns ON, the operation Numerical input When numerical input is established, D6 and D2.b4 make
condition of numerical input A is enabled (Write to D101) changes. Under conditions of their data, develop the D101
to display the cursor and key window. value into other control.
Use the key window to enter and establish D6 : Stores the user ID (1) of the established numerical input.
the value. D2.b4: Turns ON the numerical input signal of the system
information.

M1 ON OFF A 100 B 0
D2.b4 ON OFF D1.b4 OFF ON
M2 OFF
M3 OFF C 0 D 0 D1.b4 ON OFF D2.b4 ON OFF
M4 OFF

When M1 turns OFF, the cursor and key window disappear. After making sure that D2.b4 After developing the D101
Until the operation condition (M1 to M4) of numerical input is turned OFF, turn OFF D1.b4. value into other control, turn
enabled (ON), the cursor and key window do not appear. ON D1.b4 to turn OFF D2.b4.
D1.b4: Turns ON to turn OFF the
numerical input signal of the
system information.

Item Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

Numerical <Basic>tab Device: D101
<Option>tab User ID: 1
Input A <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M1
Numerical <Basic>tab Device: D102
<Option>tab User ID: 2
Input B <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M2
Numerical <Basic>tab Device: D103
<Option>tab User ID: 3
Input C <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M3
Numerical <Basic>tab Device: D104
<Option>tab User ID: 4
Input D <Trigger>tab Trigger type: ON, Device: M4
Action when condition success:
Project Auxiliary Setting Display cursor and key window. System Information Read device: D1
Common
dialog box Action when condition fail: dialog box Write device: D2
Erase cursor, key window and input object.

POINT
Refer to Section 5.8.2 for details of the system information function.

5 - 78 5 - 78
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The numerical input function consists of the following setting items.
• " Numerical Input" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Basic tab

Device
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Data length 16bit/32bit
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Backgroud (0 to 255)
Color Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Text/Text and Plate
Reverse Unchecked/checked

Form
Format Signed Decimal/Unsigned Decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Right alignment/Left alignment/Center
Disp all digits Unchecked/checked
High quality font Unchecked/checked
Size (Height width size setting)
Digits (Digit count setting)
Decimal point (Digit count setting)
Adjust decimal point range
Expression
Mask None/AND
Extended tab

Pattern Set the mask value.

Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Monitor word Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.
Write word Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.
Case (Setting for each case)
Set Edit Display Format dialog box
Delete
...Set the display attribute changing conditional expression and display attribute.
Option
Security (Display)
Security (Input)
Offset Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Write device Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
User ID Unchecked/checked
Set the User ID.
Move Unchecked/checked
destination ID Set the Move destination ID.
Trigger Screen Setting Screen Auxiliary Setting ...Set the Defined key action.

Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real
Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

5 - 79 5 - 79
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN
Data length 16bit/32bit
Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Numeral Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Form
Format Signed decimal/UnSigned decimal/Real/Octal/Binary/Hexadecimal
Right alignment/Left alignment/Center
Disp all digits Unchecked/checked
Size (Height width size setting)
Digits (Digit count setting)
Decimal point (Digit count setting)

Trigger

Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Others
Gain 1 (Gain 1 value setting)
Gain 2 (Gain 2 value setting)
Offset (Offset value setting)
Upper Fixed Setting of Fixed

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Lower Fixed Setting of Fixed
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
User ID Unchecked/checked
Setting of User ID No.
Move Unchecked/checked
destination ID Setting of Move destination ID No.
Screen setting Screen auxiliary setting dialog box
.........Confirmation key operation setting

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Data input" "Setting up numerical input" from Contents of
Help.
POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security, offset and expression can be set.
• The system key window of the GOT is available for value input. (Input keys
can be created freely.)
• Values including decimal points can be displayed or input.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT's
system window.
• The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT's system window
only.

5 - 80 5 - 80
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.6.2 ASCII input function (writes any key code to word devices)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function writes any key code to the specified word devices.
(1) Function outline
(a) Writes any key code to word devices, starting from the specified one (D100).

D100 4241 H (BA)

1 ABC 2 ABC 1 ABC
C 2 ABC 1 CDEF 2 ABC
C
D101 0043 H ( C)

1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL D100 4443 H (DC)

C D E F ESC
CCCC C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CCCC D101 4645 H (FE)

Touch an input area to Text input Move the cursor to the

display the cursor for input. next input area.

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100

(b) You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple
ASCII input areas.

A 123 B ABC A FED

D B ABC A FED B ABC A FED B 321
1

C CDE D 45 C CDE D 45 C CDE D CBA

A C CDE D CBA
1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL
C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CC C D E F ESC
CC

Input cursor moving path Text input Text input Text input
Move the input cursor to D. Move the input cursor to B. Move the input cursor to C.

Item Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings

User ID: 1
Ascii Input A <Basic>tab Device: D10 <Option>tab
Move destination ID: 4
User ID: 2
Ascii Input B <Basic>tab Device: D20 <Option>tab
Move destination ID: 3
User ID: 3
Ascii Input C <Basic>tab Device: D30 <Option>tab
Move destination ID: 1

Ascii Input D <Basic>tab Device: D40

User ID: 4
<Option>tab
Screen auxiliary Move destination ID: 2
Common Cursor Movement Defined key action: User ID order
setting

5 - 81 5 - 81
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The ASCII input function consists of the following setting items.
• " Ascii Input" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Basic tab

Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ...Choose the Shape.

Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)

Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)
Blink No/Low/Middle/High
Text/Text and Plate
Reverse Unchecked/checked

Form

Size(Height width size setting)

Digits(Digit count setting)

Option
Security (Display)
Extended tab

Security (Input)

Offset Checked/unchecked Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

User ID Unchecked/checked
Device Set the User ID.
Move destination ID Unchecked/checked
Device Set the Move destination ID.

Screen Setting Screen Auxiliary Setting ...Set the Defined key action.
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range/Bit trigge

16bit/32bit

Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Device Device dialog box ...Set the DeviceNo.

Range Edit Range dialog box ...Set the conditional expression for word device range.

Bit trigger Bit (Bit count setting)

Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box ...Set the bit device and condition enabling.

5 - 82 5 - 82
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Basic
Device Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Shape Unchecked/checked
Image List dialog box ..Choose the Shape.
Frame Designation of Frame (0 to 255)
Plate Designation of Background (0 to 255)
Text Designation of Color (0 to 255)

Form

Size (Height width size setting)

Digits (Digit count setting)

Alignment Left/Right/Center

Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF

Device Device dialog box ..Set the Device No.

Option

User ID Unchecked/checked
Setting of User ID No.
Move destin. Unchecked/checked
Setting of Move destination ID No.

Screen setting Screen auxiliary setting dialog box

.........Confirmation key operation setting

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Data input" "Setting up ASCII input" from Contents of
Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Security and offset can be set.
• Input keys can be created freely.
• By setting the user ID and move destination ID, the position of the next input
area can be set freely.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT's
system window (10-key pad).
• The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT's system window
(10-key pad) only.
• Input keys can be created freely.
• By setting the user ID and move destination ID, the position of the next input
area can be set freely.

5 - 83 5 - 83
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.7 Report Function (Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the buffer
memory of a special function module every time a data collection trigger occurs, or
prints numerical data and comments associated with bit device ON/OFF.
(1) Function outline
(a) Gathers and prints data per data collection trigger. (Real-time report)
The current data and next data are printed continuously without the printer
paper page being renewed.

Device states Device states

OFF
D100: Device used to monitor processed products in line 1
D100 10 D100 50 D101: Device used to monitor processed products in line 2
X10 D101 20 D101 60 D102: Device used to monitor processed products in line 3
ON D102 30 D102 70 D103: Device used to monitor processed products in line 4
D103 40 D103 80

[Print example] The following print layout is created on report screen.

Texts and table
00/08/02 16:53:24 1 are drawn with
report figures.
Production List
Line Name Amount Line Name Amount
Every time collection trigger X10 turns Products Line 1 10pcs. Line 3 30pcs. Set as repeat
ON, device values of D100 to D103 Line 2 20pcs. Line 4 40pcs. lines.
are gathered and printed. Products Line 1 50pcs. Line 3 70pcs.
Line 2 60pcs. Line 4 80pcs.
Line 1 90pcs. Line 3 105pcs.
Products 115pcs.
Line 2 100pcs. Line 4

Set print objects (values).

Setting Portion Settings

Report Comment Setting dialog box Trigger watch cycle: 3 minutes (Initial)
Report style : Real/cont.
Edit Parameter dialog box <Format/Trigger tab>tab Page No. : print (at right top)
Collect trigger type : Rise (X10)
Set to D100, D101, D102 and D103, respectively.
Device : D100 to D103
Numerical Print dialog box <Basic>tab
Print style : Unsigned decimal
Digits :3

5 - 84 5 - 84
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) Gathers and stores data onto the PC card per data collection trigger. Then,
prints the data stored on the PC card when a print trigger occurs. (Logging
report)
Before printing, the printer paper page is renewed.

Device states Device states

D100: Device used to monitor processed products in line 1
D100 10 D100 50 D101: Device used to monitor processed products in line 2
D101 20 D101 60 D102: Device used to monitor processed products in line 3
D102 30 D102 70 D103: Device used to monitor processed products in line 4
D103 40 D103 80

OFF ON Every time collection trigger X10 turns ON, device

values of D100 to D103 are gathered and stored onto
X10 PC card.
Collection trigger occurs.

Report data file

PC card Data stored when the first

data collection trigger
occurred
Print trigger occurs. Data stored when the
second data collection
OFF ON trigger occurred
X100
Every time print trigger X100
turns ON, collected data stored
on PC card are printed.

[Print example] The following print layout is created on report screen.

Production List Texts and table are drawn with

report figures.
Printed when print Line Name Amount Line Name Amount
trigger turns ON Line 1 10pcs. Line 3 30pcs.
second time Products 20pcs. Line 4 40pcs. Set as repeat lines.
Line 2
Line 1 50pcs. Line 3 70pcs.
Products Line 2 80pcs.
60pcs. Line 4

Set print objects (values).

Production List
Line Name Amount Line Name Amount
Printed when print
trigger turns ON Products Line 1 90pcs. Line 3 105pcs.
Line 2 100pcs. Line 4 115pcs.
first time
Line 1 110pcs. Line 3 125pcs.
Products Line 2 135pcs.
120pcs. Line 4

Setting Portion Settings

Report Comment Setting dialog box Trigger watch cycle: 3 minutes (Initial)
Report style : Log/page
Page No. : Not print
<Format/Trigger tab>tab
Collect trigger type : Rise (X10)
Print trigger : Rise (X100)
Edit Parameter dialog box
Report num. :1
Sampling num. :2
<Log>tab
Over processing : Overwrite
Delete trigger type : Print
Set to D100, D101, D102 and D103, respectively.
Numerical Print dialog box <Basic>tab Device : D100 to D103
Print style : Unsigned decimal Digits: 3

5 - 85 5 - 85
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The report function consists of the following setting items.
• [Report Common Setting] dialog box
Make setting used commonly to all report screens.
Change page (before print) Unchecked/checked
Trigger watch cycle Set the trigger monitoring cycle (1 to 60)
Abort trigger type None/
Rise/Fall
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Initialize change page after aborting Unchecked/checked

Print Format Print Format dialog box ...Lines, Columns, Margin

• [Edit Parameter] dialog box

Set the report type and operations to each report screen.
Format/Trigger
Report style Real/cont. / Log/page
Page No. Print (at right top) /Not print
Time Not print/at center top/at left top/at right top
Collect trigger type Sampling ( Setting of Sampling cycle (3 to 3600) )

Rise/Fall Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Print trigger Rise/Fall Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Log
Report num. Set the repeat count of repeated row at print trigger occurrence.
Sampling num. Set the number of times when collected data is stored onto PC card.
Over processing Overwrite/break
Logging Oldest/Latest
Delete trigger type Rise/Fall/ Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.
Turn on/Print
File name Set the file name stored onto PC card.

• [Numerical Print] dialog box

Set the print position, print device, print format and others of the numerical data
to be printed on report paper.
Basic

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Data length 16bit/32bit
Print style SignedDecimal/UnsignedDecimal/Hexadecimal/Binary/Real
Right alignment/Left alignment
Digits Specify the number of digits to be printed (1 to 13).
Disp. all digits
Decimal point Specify the decimal fraction part to be displayed (0 to 32).
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

5 - 86 5 - 86
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

• [Comment Print] dialog box

Set the print position, print device, print format and others of the comment data
to be printed on report paper.
Basic

Device Device dialog box

Data type Bit/Word (BIN16)

Print digits Set the number of digits to be printed (1 to 255).
Comment No. (bit)...Set the comment number of ON/OFF.

Expression
Mask None/AND/OR/XOR
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box ...Set the calculation expression.

• [Header/Repeat Range] dialog box

Set the header (title, etc.) range on the report screen and the range where
printing will be repeated per data collection trigger.
Header range Set Unchecked/checked
Repeat range Start/ End Start/ End
End

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Report Function" "Introduction-Report Function" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
• For restrictions on the report function, refer to Section 4.3.1.
• You can print the numerical data of word devices and special function module's
buffer memory in decimal or hexadecimal.
• You can print numerical data and comments associated with bit ON/OFF.
• You can print the rules and characters drawn on the report screen. It should be
noted that the report screen displays all rules in continuous line but vertical rules
are actually printed as "-----".
• You can register data of up to eight reports (eight report screens) to a single
project.
• You can set up to 256 points of print objects (values, comments) on a single
report screen.
• You can perform data operations..

5 - 87 5 - 87
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8 Other Object Functions

This section explains the objects which have various functions other than the monitor
and data input functions. There are the following other object functions.

• Hardcopy function.....................Prints a displayed monitor screen on a printer.

• System information function .....Confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU.
• Observe status function............Writes to the PLC CPU when a condition is enabled.
• Floating alarm function .............Causes comments associated with ON bit devices to flow from right to left on
a base screen.
• Recipe function .........................Writes the specified data to devices or writes and saves device values in the
specified device range to a PC card.
• Sound function ..........................Plays the touch sound of a touch key or a sound (sound file in WAV form) in
the observe status function.
• Test function..............................Shows a test window during monitor screen display to allow a device value to
be changed.
• Barcode function.......................Writes the data read with a barcode reader to the PLC CPU.
• Operation panel function ..........Enables operation from an external operation panel connected to the GOT.
• Time action function..................Performs device write or similar operations at the specified times of day on the
specified days of week.
• Sampling function .....................Gathers data at specified intervals or on bit condition and shows them as a
graph.
• Script function ...........................Controls a GOT display under the GOT side program (script).
• Video display function...............Displays the picture taken with a video camera in the GOT video window.
• RGB window display function...Displays the personal computer screen on the GOT.

5.8.1 Hardcopy function (prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer or saves it onto
a PC card.

(1) Function outline

(a) Prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer according to
ON/OFF of a bit device.
Start trigger occurs.
OFF ON
X10 D10 10
No. 25
D20 20

D10 10
No. 25
D20 20

Setting Portion Settings

Hardcopy dialog box Start trigger: X10

5 - 88 5 - 88
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

POINT
• When turning on or off the hard copy start trigger or abort trigger with a specified
bit device, keep the ON or OFF status of the specified bit device for the period set
at Trigger Watch Cycle or more.
• When the touch key function is used to turn ON the hardcopy starting trigger, set
the operation type to "Bit SET" or "Bit ALT". If you set it to "Bit momentary", the
hardcopy function is not performed.
• If operate (touch) the touch switch when the bit device for hardcopy start trigger is
turned ON and the hardcopy is about to start, the hardcopy function is not
performed.
• The hard copy function may not be started if the GOT screen is being operated.
In such a case, execute the hard copy function again after the GOT screen
operation.

(b) Saves the current monitor screen of the GOT onto a PC card in BMP/JPEG
format.
Instead of a bit device, a touch key (extended) may also be used to determine
the save timing. (Both the PC card saving and touch key (extended) functions
may be used only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
Saved as BMP/JPEG file.

No. 10
PC card No. 10

Touch the touch key (extended). 1

Setting Portion Settings

Hardcopy dialog box Target: PC card (PCMCIA)

1: Set the operation setting of the touch key to the extended (hardcopy) function.

5 - 89 5 - 89
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The hardcopy function consists of the following setting items.
• "Hardcopy" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Target Printer/PC card (PCMCIA)

Style BMP/JPEG

The minimum number's Unchecked/checked

file is deleted when
capacity is exceeded and
make initial state when
the maximum is filed.

Print mode 256 Color/16 Color/Monochrome

Rev. /Norm Unchecked/checked

Change page Unchecked/checked

After-printing page feed setting
Start trigger Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Abort trigger Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle.

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Rev. /Norm Unchecked/checked

Change page Unchecked/checked

After-printing page feed setting (1 to 4)
Start trigger Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Abort trigger Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Hardcopy" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• For restrictions on the hardcopy function , refer to Section 4.3.1.
• When using the hardcopy function, always install the extended function
operating system (ESC printer/PCL printer) to the GOT.
• If a hardcopy is executed with the GOT in the screen save status, video
pictures will not be output correctly in hardcopy. When making a hardcopy of
the monitor screen which displays a video picture, start a hardcopy after
making sure that the GOT is not in the screen save status.

5 - 90 5 - 90
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.2 System information function (confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU or transmits the
information on the GOT900 series operating status from the PLC CPU to the GOT.
(1) Function outline
(a) Reads information on the GOT operating status from the PLC CPU and
controls the GOT operating status.
1) Read device (D10) data is changed. 2) Read device data is confirmed. 3) Display is cleared according to
the new data of read device
(D10.b1: ON).
(Forced screen saver enable
signal ON)
When bit turns ON, screen No. 25
save status is forcibly chosen.
D10 b2 b1 b0

OFF ON

Setting Portion Settings

System Information dialog
System Signal 1: D10
box

POINT
The GOT reads the following GOT operation states from the PLC CPU.
• Automatic screen saver disable signal • Forced screen saver enable signal 1
• Key code read completion signal • Numerical input read completion
• Barcode input disable signal signal 1
• Key-in disable signal • Barcode input read completion signal
• Hardcopy monochrome print signal • Hardcopy setting enable signal
• GOT error reset signal • Hardcopy reverse video signal
• Buzzer output signal • External I/O function's output signal
• Current Recipe No. 2 area
• Buzzer one-shot output signal
1 System information with which GOT-F900 series is compatible
2 System information with which only GOT-F900 series is compatible

(b) Writes the GOT operating status to the PLC CPU.

1) GOT display screen is changed from base screen 1 to 2. 2) As the GOT operating status changed, new data is written to
the write device.
Display screen number is stored into the
write device.
When GOT-A900 series is used
D21 (displayed base screen number
Base screen 1 Base screen 2 storage area)
When GOT-F900 series is used
D20 (displayed base screen number
storage area)

Setting Portion Settings

<GOT-A900 Series>
System signal 1: D20
System Information dialog
On-screen Base Screen Number: Checked
box
<GOT-F900 Series>
On-screen Base Screen Number: D20

5 - 91 5 - 91
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

POINT
The following information can be written to the PLC CPU every time the GOT
operating status changes.
• GOT error code • PC card battery error detection signal
• On base screen number 1 • GOT ready signal
• On window screen number • Key code input signal
• Numerical value input number • Numerical value input signal 1
• Current cursor position 1 • Previous cursor position
• Hardcopy output signal • Key code input signal
• Recipe processing signal • Previous numerical value input
• GOT error detection signal • Current numerical value input
• Printer error detection signal • Cursor position numeric value input
• Barcode input signal 1 • Hardcopy sub-signal
• Human sensor detection signal • Report output signal
• Currently printed report number • Grip switch hold-down status
• Superimposed screen number 1 2 (A950 handy GOT, F940 handy GOT
• Superimposed screen number 2 2 only)
• Input completion object ID 2 • Key window output signal
1 System information with which GOT-F900 series is compatible
2 System information with which only GOT-F900 series is compatible

(2) Setting items

The system information function consists of the following setting items.
• "System Information" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Read device System Signel 1 Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
External I/O Function output information
Write device System Signel 2 Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

GOT Error Code

On-screen Base Screen Number

On-screen Window Screen Number

Numeric Value Input Number

Current Cursor Position

Previous Cursor Position

Key Code Input

Previous Numeric Value Input(32bit)

Current Numeric Value Input(32bit)

Currently printed report screen

External I/O Function Input Information

Cursor Position's Numeric Value Input

Select All/Unselect

5 - 92 5 - 92
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Read device System Signel 1 Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Current Recipe No.
Write device On-screen Base Screen Number Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
On-screen Overlap Base Screen Number 1
On-screen Overlap Base Screen Number 2

After input Object ID

System Signel 2

Reserve area (10 points)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up GOT Action (System
information)" from Contents of Help.

5 - 93 5 - 93
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.3 Observe status function (writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is
enabled)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
This function writes data to the PLC CPU or performs GOT operation when the
specified condition is enabled, e.g. when the specified bit device turns ON/OFF or the
specified word device value falls within the specified range (only when the GOT-A900
series is used). Two modes are available in this function: to perform write/operation
when the specified condition is enabled, independently of the display monitor screen
(per project); and to perform write/operation for each display screen when the specified
condition is enabled (per screen).
(1) Function outline
(a) When the specified bit device X1 turns ON (condition), writes 100 to D10 (write).

X1 D10 0

D10 100
OFF

ON
When X1 turns ON, GOT recognizes it. When condition is enabled, 100 is written
to word device D10 of PLC CPU.

Setting Portion Settings

Trigger/Action
Observe dialog box
Status dialog
<Trigger>tab Trigger 1: ON Device: X1
box
<Project>tab Action : Word set (16bit)
<Action>tab Device : D10
Fixed : 100

POINT
• The observe status function can perform the following write/operation.
• Turn ON a bit device only while the condition is enabled. (Momentary)
• Turn ON a bit device. (Bit SET)
• Turn OFF a bit device. (Bit RST)
• Reverse the current status of a bit device. (Bit ALT)
• Write a value to a word device. (Word SET)
• Play a sound file with an external speaker. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used)
(b) When the value of the specified word device D100 falls within the the
specified range (100 or more) (condition), turns OFF X10 (write). (Only when
the GOT-A900 series is used)
When D100 value rises to or above 100, condition set to When condition is enabled (D100 value rises to or above 100),
GOT is enabled. bit device X10 of PLC CPU is turned OFF.
X10
D100 26

D100 100 ON
Current temperature Current temperature
: 26 : 100
Operating status Operating status
Operating Standby OFF

Setting Portion Settings

Trigger/Action
Observe dialog box
Status dialog
<Trigger>tab Trigger 1: Word Range Device: D100 Range: D100>=100
box
<Project>tab Action : Reset
<Action>tab
Device : X10

5 - 94 5 - 94
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The observe status function consists of the following setting items.
• "Observe Status" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Project
Add Trigger/Action dialog box

Trigger
Trigger 1/
ON/OFF/Word Range
Trigger 2
Data length 16Bit/32Bit
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Operator ==/</<=/!=/>=/>
Constant Constant setting

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Action Delete (Condition 2 only)

Action Momentary/Set/Reset/Alternate/Word set (16bit) /Word set (32bit) /

Sound
Sound Setting of Sound Sound File List dialog box
...Choose the Sound File.
Storing device Points Setting of Points (1 to 40)
Data type Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real
Device Device dialog box/Multiple Device dialog box
...Setting of Device No.
Fixed Unchecked/checked Setting of Fixed
Indirect Unchecked/
Device
checked Device
dialog box
Edit ...Set the Device No.
Delete FMOV/BMOV
Observe cycle Ordinary
Sampling Setting of Sampling
Screen
Screen type Base screen/Window screen
No./Browse Screen Image dialog box ...Choose the Screen.
Add Trigger/Action dialog box
Trigger
Trigger 1/ Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for
Trigger 2 Project tab setting

Offset Unchecked/checked

Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Action

Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for

Project tab setting
Edit
Observe cycle Ordinary
Sampling Setting of Sampling
Delete

5 - 95 5 - 95
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Project
Add Trigger/Action dialog box
Trigger

Trigger 1/ ON/OFF
Trigger 2
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Action

Action Momentary/Set/Reset/Alternate/Word set (16bit) /Word set (32bit)

Storing device Points Setting of Points (1 to 40)

Device dialog box/

Device ...Setting of Device No.
Multiple Device dialog box

Fixed...Set the fixed value to be written to word device.

Indirect Unchecked/checked
Device Device dialog box
...Set the Device No.
FMOV/BMOV
Edit
Delete
Observe cycle Ordinary
Sampling Setting of Sampling (1 to 60)

Screen
Base screen No./Browse Screen Image dialog box ... Choose the Base screen.

Same settings as in Condition/operation dialog box for

Add Trigger/Action dialog box
Project tab setting

Edit
Delete
Observe cycle Ordinary
Sampling Setting of Sampling (1 to 60)

5 - 96 5 - 96
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Status Observation
Function" from Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Up to two bit/word devices can be specified as conditions.
• Only one type of write/operation can be specified for the set condition.
• Up to 512 points of "condition + write/operation" can be specified for each
project and each screen (up to 512 points per screen).
• Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object
display on the GOT screen.
Monitoring operation takes longer as the total number of condition device
points increase or the monitoring intervals shorten. Be careful for setting.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Up to two bit/word devices can be specified as conditions.
• Only one type of write/operation can be specified for the set condition.
• Up to 40 points of "condition + write/operation" can be specified for each
project and each screen (up to 40 points per screen).
• Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object
display on the GOT screen.
Monitoring operation takes longer as the condition bit device points increase
(the number of device points will be up to 80 if project-based or screen-based
settings overlap) or the monitoring intervals shorten. Be careful for setting.

5 - 97 5 - 97
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.4 Floating alarm function (causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function causes comments associated with multiple bit devices to flow from right
to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments corresponding to the bit
devices which are ON.
Comments keep flowing until the ON bit devices turn OFF.
(1) Function outline
(a) When a bit device X1 turns ON, a comment indicating error occurrence
associated with the bit device X1 flows.

X1 Error

OFF D100 10
Error

ON
Error
Left Right

Setting Portion Settings

Floating Alarm dialog box Device: X1
Screen Auxiliary
Carry out display of alarm flow: checked
Setting dialog box

(b) When comments are associated with multiple bit devices, the comments flow
from right to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments
corresponding to the bit devices that currently are ON. Simultaneously, how
many monitoring bit devices are ON is also checked.
(How many devices are ON is monitored only when the GOT-A900 series is
used)
Indicates how many monitor devices
are ON using numerical display object.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series
is used) 1
Line 3 error Error

Number of errors
6 Line
3 error Error

Error Line 1 error

Left Right

Setting Portion Settings

Device points : 8
Floating Alarm dialog box Continuous device : X1
Storage device D10
Screen Auxiliary
Carry out display of alarm flow: checked
Setting dialog box

1: Set the numerical display monitor devices to the occurrence count storage device (D10).

5 - 98 5 - 98
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The floating alarm function consists of the following setting items.
• "Floating Alarm" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Device points

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Storage device Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Comment No. Browse Comment List dialog box

Size ...Register the comment.

Delete

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Device points

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Comment No. Browse Comment List dialog box ...Register the comment.

Size
Delete

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Floating Alarm
Function" from Contents of Help.

POINT
• Devices to be monitored are common to all screens, but whether floating alarms
are displayed or not can be set for each base screen.
• Floating alarms appear at the bottom of the screen.

5 - 99 5 - 99
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.5 Recipe function (reads/writes values in the specified device range)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function writes/reads device values to/from the specified devices of the PLC CPU
on the specified condition (device ON/OFF).
The read data are stored as indicted below depending on whether the GOT is the
GOT-A900 series or GOT-F900 series.
• GOT-A900 series: Stored onto a PC card in CSV format (except A950 handy GOT)
• GOT-F900 series: Stored into the GOT.
(1) Function outline
(a) Turns ON the specified device X1 at a machining start or the like to write the
initial device values of the PLC CPU from the GOT.
1) Specified device
(write trigger) X1 turns ON.

X1

OFF

ON D10 10 D10 10
D11 20 D11 20
D12 30 D12 30 2) Device values are written
D13 40 D13 40 to specified devices of
PLC CPU.

Setting Portion Settings

<Operation Device: D10
Recipe Contents>tab Device points: 4
Attribute Trigger 1
<Write Trigger>tab
dialog X1 ON time
box <Recipe Recipe Device
Device>tab D10: 10, D11: 20, D12: 30, D13: 40

POINT
Device values may also be written to the specified devices of the PLC CPU from a
PC card fitted to the GOT. (Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950
handy GOT) is used)

5 - 100 5 - 100
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) Turns ON the specified device X2 at a machining end or the like to store the
specified device values at machining end onto a PC card.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)
1) Specified device
(read trigger) X2 turns ON.

X2
PC card

OFF

ON D20 10 D20 10
D21 20 D21 20
D22 30 D22 30
D23 40 D23 40
2) Specified device values are read and
stored onto PC card.

Setting Portion Settings

Device : D20
Recipe <Operation
Device points :4
Attribute Contents>tab
PC card : Use (Not set recipe device value)
dialog <Read Trigger> Trigger 1
box tab X2 ON time

POINT
Periodically writing device states to a PC card in the method (b) to back up the data
enables a return to the status (b) when a next startup or the like is made in the
method (a).
(For the GOT-F900 series, both the read and write triggers should be set in the
recipe operation setting since the read data are stored into the GOT.)

(c) Using the spreadsheet or similar software of the personal computer, edit the
device values read from the PLC CPU and saved on the PC card as a CSV
format file.
(Only when the GOT-A900 series (except the A950 handy GOT) is used)
2) Perform read, edit, etc. of PC card file on
1) Device value data read spreadsheet software or like.
from PLC CPU Value
100
D10 100 50
D11 200 250
D12 300

Fit
PC
card

Fit PC
card

D10 100
D11 50 3) Save on PC card in CSV file format the device value
D12 250 data edited on personal computer, and use them on
GOT.
Specify the same file name as that of the edit source.
Setting Portion Settings
Device points: 3
Recipe <Operation
Device: D10
Attribute Contents>tab
PC card: Use
dialog <Read Trigger> Trigger 1
box tab X2 ON time

5 - 101 5 - 101
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The recipe function consists of the following setting items.
• "Recipe" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Recipe Attribute Operation Contents
Edit dialog box
Recipe name Set the recipe operation name.

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Device Setting of Device points (1 to 8192)

points

Data type Signed 16bit/Unsigned 16bit/

Signed 32bit/Unsigned 32bit/

File register Unchecked/checked

Drive

File name

File File name

PC card Not used/Use (In the case of a file not being used, a file will be
created with the recipe device) /Use (Not set recipe device value)

Read Trigger

Trigger 1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

ON/Off
Trigger 2 Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box

...Setting of Device No.
ON/Off
Write Trigger

Trigger 1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

ON/Off
Trigger 2 Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box

...Setting of Device No.
Recipe Device ON/Off

Device value Setting of Device value

Copy Copying of recipe operation
Paste Creation of copied recipe operation duplicate
Delete Deletion of recipe operation
Delete all Deletion of all recipe operations
File name Fixed/ Free

5 - 102 5 - 102
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Recipe Attribute Operation Contents

Edit
dialog box
Recipe name Set the recipe operation name.

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

Device points Setting of Device points (1 to 4000)

Data type Signed 16bit/Unsigned 16bit

Read Trigger

Trigger1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

ON/Off

Write Trigger

Trigger1 Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

ON/Off

Recipe Device

Device value Setting of Device value

Delete Deletion of recipe operation

Delete all Deletion of all recipe operations

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Recipe" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Up to two devices can be specified as conditions.
• For restrictions on the recipe function, refer to Section 4.3.1.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Up to two devices can be specified as conditions.

5 - 103 5 - 103
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.6 Sound function (plays a sound on GOT)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

Set WAV format sound files to play sounds as error warning messages and touch
sounds provided when touch keys are touched.
(1) Function outline
(a) When playing a sound file with the observe status function
(Condition: When the bit device X1 turns ON, a sound file is played.)
Specified bit device X1 turns ON.

X1

OFF

ON

Operation
stops.

When X1 turns ON, GOT recognizes that condition

was enabled and plays specified sound file.

Setting Portion Settings

Sound File List dialog box Click the Edit button to register the WAV format file as a sound file.

Trigger/Action
Observe dialog box
Status dialog Trigger 1 : ON
box <Trigger>tab
Device : X1
<Action>tab Action : Sound

POINT
To play a WAV format sound file when a touch key is touched, turn on the [Change
touch key sound] check box in the [Project Auxiliary Setting] dialog box to make
setting.

5 - 104 5 - 104
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The sound function consists of the following setting items.
• "Sound File List" dialog box

Edit Sound File dialog box No.

File name

Browse Set the WAV format sound file.

Delete

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Creating Sound Files" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
• For restrictions on the sound function, refer to Section 4.3.1.
• Sound files that can be played on the GOT are in the [8.000kHz, 16 bits,
monaural] audio format. However, most of the sound files used generally are
created in other audio formats.
Hence, when using generally used sound files on the GOT, they must be
converted into the GOT format using general-purpose sound editing software
(e.g. "Sound Recorder" of Windows 95). R

For conversion, refer to the help of GT Designer.

• Sound files of within eight seconds can be played on the GOT.
Data longer than eight seconds will be cut.

5 - 105 5 - 105
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.7 Test function (changes the device value of the PLC CPU)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows a test window during monitor screen display to change a device
value.
(This function is available while the ladder monitor function is used.)
(1) Function outline
(a) Touch a touch key to show a test window and change a device value.

NETWK No.[ ] STATION[ ]

DEVICE[ ] [ ] RST:0 SET:1

X Y M L S

B F

G AC DEL

Setting Portion Settings

Touch Key <Action>
Exlended: Test Window
dialog box tab

POINT
• The device types whose values can be changed with the test function are as
follows.
• Bit device ON/OFF
• Word device's current value change
• Timer/counter's set value change
• Buffer memory's current value change
• For restrictions on the test function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

5 - 106 5 - 106
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.8 Barcode function (writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function writes to the PLC CPU the data which are read with a barcode reader
connected to the GOT.
(1) Function outline
(a) Reads barcode data with a barcode reader and writes them to the specified
devices (D0 to D5) of the PLC CPU.

Barcode

Read data PLC CPU

"123456789" GOT 123456789
D0 9 (Byte : 9)
D1 3231H (Data : 21)
D2 3433H (Data : 43)
D3 3635H (Data : 65)
D4 3837H (Data : 87)
D5 2039H (Data : 9)

Setting Portion Settings

Device : D0
Barcode dialog box
Device points :6

(2) Setting items

The barcode function consists of the following setting items.
• "Barcode" dialog box

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Device points

Delete

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Barcode" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
For restrictions on the barcode function, refer to Section 4.3.1.

5 - 107 5 - 107
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.9 Operation panel function (operates GOT externally)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function writes touch inputs, numerical inputs, screen switching, etc. to devices
from outside the GOT using an operation panel.
(1) Function outline
(a) Turns ON the bit device X0 of the PLC CPU from an operation panel outside
the GOT.

Press key preset

to turn ON X0.

OFF
X0

ON
X0
X0 ON

External I/O unit must be fitted.

Setting Portion Settings

Edit Operation Panel dialog Available Operation Panel : Checked
box Key : X39
Edit Action/Key <Action> Bit Device : X0
code dialog box tab Action : Set

5 - 108 5 - 108
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The operation panel function consists of the following setting items.
• "Edit Operation Panel" dialog box
Edit Action/Key code Action
Operation panel key
dialog box
Initialize Bit .................
Word ........... Same settings as in touch keys
Action / key code can be made. Refer to Section
Base ............. 5.5 for setting details.
Available Operation Panel
Window ........
Initialize Mode A8GT-TK
Station No.

Key Action Basic

(Switching Host
Station No.) Other NW No.
dialog box Station No.
Device Device dialog box
...Setting of Device No.
Data Bit/Word (BIN16)
type
/Word (BCD16)
Action (For bit)
Host
Other NW No.
Station No.
Hold
Action (For word)
Edit Edit Display Format
dialog box
...Set the conditional expression
and switching method.
Delete Deletion of operation
Up/Down Move operation
sequence up/down
Edit Edit Display Format
dialog box
Edit Change the setting.
... Set the switching method
Delete Delete the setting. for the case where
Key code Set the Key code. conditional expression is
Security Set the Security. not applicable.
Simultaneous press Unchecked/checked
Trigger
Trigger Type Ordinary/ON/OFF/Range

Device Device dialog box

...Set the Device No.
16bit/32bit
Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/Real

Range Edit Range dialog box

...Set the conditional expression for word device range.
(3) Setting method
Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Operation Panel"
from Contents of Help.
POINT
• For restrictions on the operation panel function, refer to Section 4.3.1.
• The operation panel is incompatible with the operation screens dedicated to the
utility menu, system monitoring function, ladder monitoring function, special
module monitoring function, list editor function and motion monitor function.
• If you have pressed the touch key and operation panel at the same time, both are
made valid and the one detected first is processed first.

5 - 109 5 - 109
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.10 Time action function (performs specified operation at preset time)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function performs the following operations at the preset times of day on the preset
days of week.
• Turns a bit device ON/OFF.
• Writes a value to a word device. (GOT-A900 series only)
• Plays a sound file from an external speaker. (GOT-A900 series only)
(1) Function outline
(a) Holds M0 ON between 8:00 AM and 5:00 PM from Monday to Friday.

Monday Tuesday to Thursday Friday

8:00 17:00 8:00 17:00

OFF
M0 ON ON

ON M0 OFF OFF
M0 Starting End Starting End
time time time time

Setting Portion Settings

<Time>tab (GOT-A900 series only) Mode: Daily, Start: 8h 0min Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri, End: 17h 0min.
<Time>tab (GOT-F900 series only) Start: 8h 0min. 0sec. Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri, End: 17h 0min. 0sec.
<Action>tab Bit Device: M0

(b) Plays sound 1 and writes "9999" to D100 at 8:00 AM on Monday, and plays
sound 2 and writes "0" to D100 at 5:00 PM on Friday.
(GOT-A900 series only)
Monday Tuesday to Thursday Friday
8:00 17:00

D100 0000 9999 It's a start D100 9999 0000 Have a nice
of this week!! weekend!!

Setting Portion Settings

<Time>tab Mode: Through, Start: 8h 0min Mon, End: 17h 0min Fri
Word Device: D100, Start write value: 9999, End write value: 0
<Action>tab
Sound Start: 1, End: 2

5 - 110 5 - 110
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The time action function consists of the following setting items.
• "Time action" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Time action attribute Time
Edit
dialog box Mode Daily/ Through
Start h/min. Starting time setting
Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Starting day-of-week setting
End h/min. End time setting
Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Ending day-of-week setting

Action
Bit Unchecked/
checked
Device Device dialog box
...Setting of Device No.

Word Unchecked/
checked
Device Device dialog box
...Setting of Device No.

Data Signed BIN/Unsigned BIN/BCD/Real

Data type 16bit/32bit

Start write Set the value to be written at start.

value
End write Set the value to be written at end.
value
Sound Unchecked/
checked
Sound File List
Start ...Browse sound file.
dialog box

Sound File List

End ...Browse sound file.
dialog box

Send mail Unchecked/

(GT checked
Delete Deletion of time action SoftGOT Alarm history data/Screen image/Recipe file
only)
Delete all Deletion of all time actions

5 - 111 5 - 111
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Time action attribute Time
Edit
dialog box Mode Daily
Start h:min.:sec. Starting time setting
Sun/Mon/Tue/Wed/Thu/Fri/Sat Starting day-of-week setting
End h:min.:sec. End time setting.

Action
Bit Unchecked/
checked
Delete Deletion of time action Device Device dialog box
Delete all Deletion of all time actions ...Setting of Device No.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Time action" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
(1) When using the GOT-A900 series
• Up to 32 points can be set to one project.
Also, "bit", "word" and "sound output" can be set together per point.
• For restrictions on the time action function, refer to Section 4.3.1.
• You can send various data, such as the alarm history data, recipe file and
screen image, as electronic mail. (GT SoftGOT only)
For details of the mail sending function, refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5
Operating Manual.
(2) When using the GOT-F900 series
• Up to 8 points can be set to one project.

5 - 112 5 - 112
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.11 Sampling function (reads PLC CPU data under specified condition)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function collects data stored in word devices at specified intervals or on bit
condition.
(1) Function outline
(a) Samples four consecutive devices, starting from the specified word device
(D0).
Sampling results can be displayed on the GOT in list or graph format.
Also, they may be read to GT Designer and saved onto FD or processed as
text data on a personal computer.
Sampling condition: Intervals (1 minute)

400
300
200
Displayed as graph
100 or list.
0
D100 D101 D102 D103

Upload

Sampling at intervals of 1 minute.

Save onto FD
Edited as text data.

Setting Portion Settings

Device : D0
Sampling dialog box Trigger : Cycle (1 min.)
Use Sampling : checked

5 - 113 5 - 113
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The sampling function consists of the following setting items.
• "Sampling" dialog box

Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Trigger Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Rise/Fall
Cycle Set the Sampling Interval.

Start Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Rise/Fall
Time Set the Time.

End Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Rise/Fall
Time Set the Time.
Frequency Set the Frequency.

Use Sampling Unchecked/Checked

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Sampling" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
Sampling results can be printed by a printer connected to the GOT.
(This cannot be performed when the PLC is connected by RS-232C
communication.)

5 - 114 5 - 114
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.12 Script function (exercises display control under GOT program)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function controls a GOT display under the GOT's original programs (hereafter
abbreviated to scripts).
Using the GOT side scripts to exercise GOT display control, load on the system side
(PLC CPU, microcomputer, etc.) display can be reduced significantly.

POINT
Refer to "Chapter7 Script functions" for details of the script function. This chapter
provides details on the specifications, setting procedures, program examples and
troubleshooting of the script function.
Also refer to Section 7.4 for the setting methods of specific examples explained in
the function outline and the program data of scripts.

(1) Function outline

Using the script function enables the following display controls.
(a) Touch keys with interlock functions
The Running lamp is lit when the Ready and Run/Stop switches turn
ON.

Running Running Running Running

Ready Run/Stop Ready Run/Stop Ready Run/Stop Ready Run/Stop

Touch Ready button. Touch Run/Stop button. Running lamp is lit.

(b) Lamp which changes in display text under multiple conditions

Operation controls of lines are exercised with corresponding touch keys
and the control states of the three lines are represented by one lamp.

All lines stop Line 1 running Lines 1, 3 running All lines stop

Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3
Stop all lines Stop all lines Stop all lines Stop all lines

Line 1 running appears. Lines 1, 3 running appears. All lines stop appears.

(c) Password input screen with clock limit function

The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct
password is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared.
Touching Manager button switches to
Manager password input screen. Manager password Manager screen

Manager 3238 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3

135 25 4328
Manager password input screen returns to
previous screen if there is no correct
Touch Manager button. password entry for 10 seconds. Type Manager password. Manager screen appears.

5 - 115 5 - 115
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The script function consists of the following setting items.
• "Script setting" dialog box

Project
Add Script No. Script number setting list Script View dialog box Choose the Script.

Script Edit dialog box File name Script file name designation reference Browse Choose the File name.
Comment Comment setting to script file
Data Format Signed BIN 16Bit/Unsigned BIN 16Bit/BCD 16Bit/Signed BIN
32Bit/Unsigned BIN 32Bit/BCD 32Bit/Real 32bit
Trigger Ordinary
Format ON/OFF/Rise/Fall/Sampling/ON Sampling/OFF Sampling
Sampling Interval Set the Sampling Interval.
Device Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Previous Switch to preceding script file.
Next Switch to next script file.
Script Edit Script file editing
Syntax check Grammar check on script file
Edit
Copy Copying of script setting
Paste Pasting of script setting
Delete Deletion of script setting
Up Move up the script setting execution order.
Down Move down the script setting execution order.
Screen
Screen Base/Window Screen No.
Type
Add Script Editing dialog box ............ Same settings as in project
Edit
Copy Copying of script setting
Paste Pasting of script setting
Delete Deletion of script setting
Up Move up the script setting execution order.
Down Move down the script setting execution order.
Option
Enable internal device [GD/GB] assignment delay
Script View Script View dialog box Browse Browse dialog box ...Path reference

Script Edit Script file editing

Convert file
Path Replace Before
path dialog box
After
All the same Unchecked/
passing is checked
converted
Syntax Check Grammar check on script file
All Check Grammar check on all script files
Delete Deletion of script setting
Script No. Setting of script file number to be displayed

Symbol Setting Script Symbol dialog box ...Character string replacement

Editor Select Editor Select dialog box Use Notepad/ Use Word Pad

Select Path Setting of path to editor

Option Editor option designation

5 - 116 5 - 116
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Setting up Other Object Function" "Setting up Script" from Contents
of Help.

(4) Update timing when the trigger type is set to [Sampling], [Cycle
during ON] or [Cycle during OFF]
The sampling cycle counting is started when the trigger condition is satisfied.
When the trigger type is set to [Cycle during ON] and the sampling cycle is set to
10 seconds, for example, the script will be executed 10 seconds after the device
set at [Trigger Device] turns on. (When the trigger device turns off after 10
seconds, the script will not be executed.)
When the trigger condition is not satisfied, counting of the sampling cycle will be
reset.

5 - 117 5 - 117
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.8.13 Video display function

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function displays the picture taken with a video camera in the GOT video window.
POINT
Refer to Section 4.1.4 for details of video windows used in the video display
function.

(1) Function outline

(a) The picture taken with a video is displayed on the GOT as-is.
(Full mode)
In the full mode, up to four video windows can be displayed at the same
time.
Video picture

Setting Portion Settings

Switching Screen Video window/RGB screen: Selection
<Video/RGB> tab
dialog box Device: D100

(b) The specified part of the picture taken with a video can be
displayed on the GOT. (Clip mode)
Video picture
Specified part

Setting Portion Settings

Switching Screen Video window/RGB screen: Selection
<Video/RGB> tab
dialog box Device: D100

1: Two or more video windows cannot be displayed in the clip mode.

(2) Setting items

The video display function consists of the following setting items.
• "Switching Screen" dialog box
<Video/RGB> tab

Video window/RGB screen Unchecked/checked

Use A9GT-80V4/ Setting of the number of video windows
A9GT-80V4R1 to be displayed
Use A9GT-80R1
(RGB screen only)
Device Device dialog box ............. Setting of device number
Data BIN
BCD

5 - 118 5 - 118
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings.
1) Choose [Help]-[Firstly].
2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up screen
switching devices".
POINT
Video windows can be used with the A985GOT-V only.

5.8.14 RGB screen display function

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function displays a personal computer screen on the GOT.

POINT
Refer to Section 4.1.5 for details of the RGB screen.

(1) Function outline

(a) When the RGB display controlling bit turns on, the screen of a
personal computer is displayed on the GOT.
(RGB screen display/hide selection bit ON: b15)
Turning the bit on changes the GOT monitor
screen to the RGB screen.
D10 b15 ............. b2 b1 b0

OFF ON

A FED
B CDE

RGB screen Monitor screen

Setting Portion Settings

Video window/RGB screen: Selection
Switching Screen
<Video/RGB> tab RGB screen: Selection
dialog box
Device: D100

(2) Setting items

The setting items of the RGB window display function are the same as those of
the video display function.
Refer to Section 5.8.13.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings.
1) Choose [Help]-[Firstly].
2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up screen
switching devices".
POINT
The RGB window display can be used with the A985GOT-V only.

5 - 119 5 - 119
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.9 Useful Functions

The following functions are useful.

• Screen call function.......................... Reduces project data capacity.
• Security function............................... Limits users.
• Offset function .................................. Shows multiple devices by setting of one device.
• Expression function.......................... Processes PLC CPU operation on GOT.
• Station number switching function... Switches the monitor destination to the same
device of another station number.
5.9.1 Screen call function (reduces project data capacity)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function shows other called screens over a basic screen as a single screen.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows the same display information on multiple screens.
Necessary screen memory space/display setting is for one screen only.

98/7/25

D10 70
D20 10
Base screen 2
Base screen 4 Base screen 8

Setting Portion Settings

Base screen 4 call setting dialog box Screen type: Base screen No.: 2
Base screen 8 call setting dialog box Screen type: Base screen No.: 2

(b) Shows multiple called screens on a single screen.

D
A FED
B CDE

Base screen 1 Base screen 2

Base screen 5

Setting Portion Settings

Screen type: Base screen No.: 1
Base screen 5 call setting dialog box
Screen type: Base screen No.: 2

(c) Shows a screen having a layered (nest) structure.

As a single screen can display up to 16 levels of nesting, screen design of
high freedom can be performed. (Only the GOT-A900 series)
A 1254 A 1254
B 348 B 348

2000/8/15 A 1254 A 1254

A 1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348 Window screen 1
B 348 B 348

Base screen 1 Base screen 5

Window screen 3
Base screen 6
Level 1 Level 2 Level 3

5 - 120 5 - 120
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Setting Portion Settings

Base screen 1 call setting dialog box Screen type: Base screen No.: 5
Screen type: Base screen No.: 6
Base screen 5 call setting dialog box
Screen type: Window screen No.: 1
Base screen 6 call setting dialog box Screen type: Window screen No.: 3

(2) Setting items

The screen call function consists of the following setting items.
• "Overlap Screen" dialog box
Set the overlap screen.

(a) When the GOT-A900 series is used

Screen type Base screen

Window screen

No Screen number designation

Screen Image
Screen Image Display of screen image list
dialog box

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

No. Screen number designation

Screen Image Screen Image dialog box Display of screen image list

• "Replace Overlap Screen" dialog box

Batch-change the overlap screen numbers.
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Object Base/ Window

All/ Selected Start/End

Overlap screen Base/ Window

Screen Image
From/ to Browse
dialog box

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Object All/Selected Start/End

Screen Image
Overlap screen From/to Browse
dialog box

5 - 121 5 - 121
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

• "Overlap Screen List" dialog box

Display the overlap screen numbers hierarchally.
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Screen type Base/Window
Screen Image
Screen No. Browse
dialog box
Edit
Delete

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Screen Image
Screen No. Browse
dialog box
Edit
Delete

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Choose "Operations after making screens" "Setting up Screen call" from
Contents of Help.

POINT
• The items available for the screen call function change with the GOT used as
indicated below.
Item When using GOT-A900 series When using GOT-F900 series
Setting target screen Base screen, window screen Base screen
Max. number of called
2047 5
screens 1
Max. number of layered
16 (excluding source screen) Nesting not allowed
(nesting) levels 2
1: Indicates the maximum number of called screens relative to the basic screen (source screen).
2: Indicates levels on which screens will be further called.
• Called screen combinations cannot be changed during screen display after
transfer to the GOT.

5 - 122 5 - 122
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) What you should know to use the screen call function (when using
GOT-A900 series)
(a) Order of displaying called screens
When multiple called screens exist on one screen, the display order is
determined by the order of setting on GT Designer and the order of called
screen levels.
Called screens are displayed in the following numerical order.
Since screens displayed later are shown on earlier ones, latter screens
come to front.

Order of call setting to one screen on GT Designer

2000/8/15

A 1254 B 1254
C 348 D 348

2
1 6
1 9
1
Called screen level order

Line
1
3
1 5
1 7
1 8
1 10
1

A 1254 B 1254
C 348 D 348
Line
2
4
1 11
1

Line
3

• Up to 16 nesting levels, not including the base screen, are displayed.

• When multiple call settings were made on the same screen, screens are shown in the setting order on GT Designer.
• Among called screens having a layered (nest) structure, deeper screens are shown later.
• A screen having multiple call settings is displayed later than a called screen having a layered structure.

POINT
The security function, observe status function and script function set on called
screens are also processed in the same order as the called screen displaying
order.

5 - 123 5 - 123
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(b) Instructions for superimposing a called screen

When superimposed, a called screen is shown as described below, and
therefore, setting should be made carefully.
1) When screen displays are overlapped
• Figure data
The figure of called screen is
displayed in the front.

Basic screen Called screen

Screen

• Object data
Among the objects of basic
screen and called screen, the
12345 12345 one whose value is changed
000001 000001
+ will be displayed in the front.

Basic screen Called screen

Screen

• Touch keys
Initially, the touch switch
corresponding to the latest
screen will be displayed in
+ the front.
After, the screen where touch
switch trigger has changed
Basic screen Called screen will be displayed.
Screen display
The touch switches on the called screen has different validity of
display and action according to the number of called screens and their
overlapping state.
(Even if the touch switch is displayed in the front, it may not function
properly.)
Refer to 2) in this section.

• Screen background
The background color of the called screen will be displayed in the front.
When the background color and the basic screen shape color are
overlapped, the shape will not be displayed.
The shape of basic screen
will not be displayed.

Basic screen Called screen

Screen display

POINT
In GT Designer, even if the background color is set to the called screen, it will not
be displayed on the basic screen.
Also, it will not be displayed in GT Designer preview.
To check the called screen's background color, use GT Simulator or GOT.

5 - 124 5 - 124
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

2) Touch key operation

• If screens are called in the same place, the touch keys set to the call
screens 1 to 99 operate. The other touch keys are all invalid. (The
touch keys set to the call screens 100 and later do not operate.)
However, if the touch keys have been set one over another, the
touch keys of up to the sixth screen counted from the basic or call
source screen operate.
Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch

Called screen 100

Called screen 99

Called screen 98

Called screen 9

Called screen 8

Called screen 7

Called screen 6

Called screen 5

Called screen 4

Called screen 3

Called screen 2

Called screen 1

Basic screen (source screen)

: Touch key activated. : Touch key not activated.

: Represents that called screens 9 to 98 do not have overlapping touch keys.

• When called screen touch keys are overlapping, the touch keys are
activated in order of upper to lower ones. Hence, the key may not be
activated if touching time is short.
• If simultaneous touch disable keys are overlapped, they are inactive.

3) When objects that may be set only once on a single

screen are superimposed
When objects that may be set only once on a single screen, e.g. data
list and alarm list, are superimposed, they are all displayed but the
function is restricted and the display is not provided correctly.

5 - 125 5 - 125
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(5) What you should know when using the screen call function (when
the GOT-F900 series is used)
When superimposed on a base screen, a called screen is shown as described
below, and therefore, setting should be made carefully.
(a) When screen displays are overlapped
1) Figure data
A called screen figure appears at the back.

Base screen Called screen Called screen display

2) Touch keys
The touch key on the called screen appears at the front.
If touch keys are overlapped, only the base screen touch key functions
when touched.

Base screen Called screen Screen display

(b) When objects that may be set only once on a single screen
are superimposed
When objects that may be set only once on a single screen, e.g. keyboard
and alarm list, are superimposed, they are all displayed but the function is
restricted and the display is not provided correctly.

5 - 126 5 - 126
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.9.2 Security function (limits users)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

By setting the security level (0 to 15) for each object or screen, display data can be
displayed or hidden according to the security level of the user.
A password can be set for each security level, which can be changed by inputting the
corresponding password.
(The GOT-F900 series allows only the security level of the base screen to be set.)
Security level 0 : No security function is set.
Security level 1 : Low

Security level 15: High

POINT
In addition to the password of the security level, there are specific
screens/functions that can restrict users by setting specific passwords.
• Utility screen
Set a password at a start of the utility screen to prevent accidental upload
operation.
• Parameter change screen (only when GOT-A900 series is used)
Set the password on the parameter setting screen of the motion monitor function
or servo amplifier monitor function to prevent accidental changes from being
made to the parameter settings of the motion controller CPU
(Q172CPU/Q173CPU) or servo amplifier at the connection destination.
• Data transfer operation
Set a password at the time of uploading the screen data of the GOT to GT
Designer to prevent accidental upload operation.

(1) Function outline

(a) Changes the object functions which can be performed by specific persons.
On the following screen where many object functions have been set, change
the operative items depending on operators.
150
0 For display/changing the production target
(Security level 1/3)
Power Switches line power ON/OFF.
Line control screen
(Security level 2)
Production target Run Starts the line.
150
0 (Security level 1)
Stop Stops the line.
Power Run Stop Ladder (Security level 15)
Ladder Starts the ladder monitor function.
Password
(Security level 15)
Password Shows the password input screen.
(Security level 0)

Operation items ( : Operative, : Inoperative)

Security level of
Operator 150
0
operator Power Run Stop Ladder Password
display Change

1 Field worker 1

Field responsible
2 2
person

3 Plant manager 3

Maintenance/insp
4 15
ection person
Others 0

5 - 127 5 - 127
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Security level: 0
Line control screen Line control screen
You can perform
Production target Production target
Security level: 1 operation for line
Line control screen 150 150 run/stop.
Run Stop Run Stop

1
Password Password

Line control screen Line control screen

Password
You can perform
Production target Production target
Security level: 2 operation for line
150 150 power ON/OFF.
Security password input Power Run Stop Power Run Stop

screen appears.
2 Password Password

Line control screen Line control screen

You can perform
Production target Production target operation for
Security level: 3 1500 3000 production target
changing.
Power Run Stop â
’ Ž
~
3 Power Run

Password Password

P0 M999 K
Line control screen 187 MOV 1 D1

You can perform

K K
- 1234 D100 MOV 2 D2
RST V
Production target
maintenance
K
MOV 90 D162

Security level: 15
K
MOV 110 D167

/inspection using
K
1500 MOV 100 D172
SET M9028

ladder monitor
K K

Each operator enters security

DUTY 350 400 M9020
D1 D2 V D162 D167 D172
Power Run Stop Ladder
function.
1 2 47 90 110 100

password.
Password
4

Item Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100
Production target Numerical Input dialog box
<Option>tab Security (Display): 1 Security (Input): 3
<Action>tab Bit Device: X1 Action: Alternate
Power Touch Key dialog box
<Option>tab Security (Display): 2 Security (Input): 2
<Action>tab Bit Device: X2 Action: Set
Run Touch Key dialog box
<Option>tab Security (Display): 1 Security (Input): 1
<Action>tab Bit Device: X2 Action: Reset
Stop Touch Key dialog box
<Option>tab Security (Display): 1 Security (Input): 1
<Action>tab Extended Extended action: Ladder monitor
Ladder Touch Key dialog box
<Option>tab Security (Display): 15 Security (Input): 15
Password Touch Key dialog box <Action>tab Extended Extended action: Password

(b) Restricts the screen switching of base screens.

By making the security level of a destination screen higher than that of the
current screen, you can restrict the display of the destination screen. (Security
level of destination screen: 6)
Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 5 Security level: 6

Line No.1
Destination A 1254 A 1254
screen security B 348 B 348
Line1 level: 6
Cancel Cancel

Touch the touch key Since the security level of the destination screen is The security level is changed The base screen is
(base switching) to higher than that of the current screen, the password to a level higher than that of changed.
switch the base screen. screen for changing the security level is displayed. the destination screen.
After pressing the Cancel key, press the - key to
return to the previous screen.

Item Setting Portion Settings

Destination screen security
Screen auxiliary setting dialog box Security: 6
level

5 - 128 5 - 128
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The security function consists of the following setting items.
• "Security" dialog box
Set whether the security level is valid or invalid and the password for converting
the security level.
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Level device Unchecked/
checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device

Edit Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of level password

Date Transmission/ Register Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Utility
Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of Password

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Level device Unchecked/
checked
Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device

Edit Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of level password

Date Transmission/ Register Password dialog box ...Setting of Password

Utility
Delete Password Verify dialog box ...Deletion of Password
Display password input error.

• "Screen Auxiliary Setting" dialog box

Set the security level for the screen.

Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)

• "Security function setting object setting" dialog box

Set the security level for each object.
Input object

Security (Display) Setting of Security (0 to 15)

Security (Input) Setting of Security (0 to 15)

Display object

Security Setting of Security (0 to 15)

5 - 129 5 - 129
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Firstly].
2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up
Password" from Contents of Help.

POINT
• How to set the security password
Before using the security function, you must set the password of each security
level.
Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the setting method.
• How to change the security level
When you want to change the security level during operation of the GOT, use the
following procedure.
1) Perform either of the following operations on the GOT monitor screen to show
the password.
• Touch the touch key (extended) for switching to the password screen.
• Touch the password on the utility screen.
2) On the password screen, type the password of the security level you want to
change, and touch .
When stopping the security level change, touch in the password display
window.

3) The security level of the current screen is changed and the screen provides the
display which matches the security level.
• If you forgot the security password, security cannot be canceled. Write down
the password so that it may never be forgotten.

5 - 130 5 - 130
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.9.3 Offset function (monitors multiple devices by setting of one device)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The value of the set offset device is added to the monitor device address to monitor
devices.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows multiple device values with one numerical display function.
(Monitor device: D100 to D199, offset device: D200)

Production screen Production screen Production screen Production screen

Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 1 Line 5

Key window
Production 1025 Production 1025 1025
Production 1025 Production 28532

Production of line 1 is Touch the line input area. Type the line you want to display. Production of line 5 is
displayed. displayed.
Offset value: 1 Offset value: 5
Device: D100+1=D101 Device: D100+5=D105
Item Setting Portion Settings
Line Numerical Input dialog box <Basic>tab Device: D200
Numerical Display dialog <Basic>tab Device: D100
Production
box <Option>tab Offset Device: D200

(b) Shows comments in synchronization with the offset function.

(Input devices: D100 to D199, offset device: D200, displayed comment No.:
D200)

Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen

Line 1 Line 1 Line 1 Line 1

Product Engine Product Engine Product ƒG “
ƒ ƒ
W
Engine“ƒ Product Engine
Key window
Production 0 Production 0 Production 30 0 Production 100

Settings of line 1 are displayed. Touch the production Type production count Engine production
Offset value : 1 input area. of engines. setting is complete.
Comment No.: 1
Device: D100+1=D101

Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen

Line 5 Line 1 1 Line 1

Product Tire Product Key
G window
ƒ “ƒ ƒ
W “ƒ
Engine Product Engine
Production 0 Production 30 0 Production 0

Settings of line 5 are displayed. Type the line you want Touch the production
Offset value : 5 to display. input area.
Comment No.: 5
Device: D100+5=D105

Item Setting Portion Settings

Line Numerical Input dialog box <Basic>tab Device: D200
Comment Display dialog
Product <Basic>tab Device: D200
box
<Basic>tab Device: D100
Production Numerical Input dialog box
<Option>tab Offset Device: D200

5 - 131 5 - 131
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The offset function consists of the following setting items.
• "Offset function setting object setting" dialog box

Offset Unchecked/checked

Device Device dialog box ...Setting of Device No.

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation
method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Type "Offset" in Keyword of Help.

5 - 132 5 - 132
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.9.4 Expression function (performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT)

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

This function operates on the device value set to the corresponding object with the
preset calculation expression to perform the corresponding object function with the
resultant value.
(1) Function outline
(a) Shows a monitor device (D100) value as a numerical value having a decimal
point.
(Operation expression (monitor): $$/100)

D100 50

0.5

Operation: 50/100=0.5

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100
Numerical Display
<Format>tab Format: Real Decimal point: 1
dialog box
<Expression>tab (GOT-A900 series only) Expression: $$/100 1
1 Not needed when you use the function "that automatically adjusts the number of decimal digits" of the numerical display functions.

(b) Writes a numerical value with a decimal point to the PLC CPU.
(Operation expression (write): $W 100, operation expression (monitor):
$$/100)

D100 50 0.5 D100 90

0.9
Key window

Operation (monitor): 50/100=0.5 Operation (input): 0.9 100=90

Setting Portion Settings

<Basic>tab Device: D100
Numerical Input
<Format>tab Format: Real Decimal point: 1
dialog box
<Expression>tab (GOT-A900 series only) Expression: $$/100, Write word: $W 100 2
2 Not needed when you use the function "that automatically adjusts the number of decimal digits" of the numerical input functions.

5 - 133 5 - 133
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(c) Operation is performed with PLC CPU values handled as values with decimal
points.
When the operation result is changed, the value reflecting the change is
written to the PLC CPU. (Only when the GOT-A900 series is used.)

D100 10 D100 442 4.50

0.18
D101 3 D101 3

key winodw

Operation expression : $$ + 0.05 + D101 $W - 5 - D101

Operation : 0.1 + 0.05 + 0.03 = 0.18 450 - 5 – 3 = 442
The " " part is automatically adjusted by the numerical input object function.
Setting Portion Settings
<Basic>tab Device: D100
Numerical Input Format: Real Decimal point: 2
<Format>tab
dialog box Adjust decimal point range: checked
<Expression>tab Expression: $$+0.05+D101, Write word: $W-5-D101

(2) Setting items

The expression function consists of the following setting items.
• "Data operation function setting object" dialog box
(a) When using the GOT-A900 series
Expression
Mask None/AND/OR 1/XOR 1
Pattern Set the mask value.
Shift None/Left/Right
No.of shift Set the shift count.
Expression Input Expression dialog box Expression Operator +,-,*,/,%
Monitor word 2 Hexadecimal/Decimal/Octal
Write word 2 Expression style
1 :You may set only the numerical display function. Variable Device
2 :You may set only the numerical input function. term $$
$W
$V
Numerical Enter numerical value.
term

(b) When using the GOT-F900 series

Expression
Gain 1 (Gain 1 value setting)
Gain 2 (Gain 2 value setting)
Offset (Offset value setting)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Object].
2) Type "Expression" in Keyword of Help.

5 - 134 5 - 134
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) Expression performed when GOT-A900 series is used

There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT-A900
series.
(a) Mask operation
Logical product (AND), logical addition (OR), or exclusive logical addition
(XOR) operation is carried out by the mask value which was used for
setting the monitor device value.
1) Logical product (AND)
The result is 1 only when both bit numbers are 1.
If not, the result is 0.

Monitor device value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Preset mask value
(set in hexadecimal) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

Operation result 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0

2) Logical addition (OR)

The result is 0 only when both bit numbers are 0.
If not, the result is 1.

Monitor device value 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

Preset mask value 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0
(set in hexadecimal)

Operation result 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1

3) Exclusive logical addition (XOR)

The result is 0 when the bit numbers are the same.
If not, the result is 1.

Monitor device value 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Preset mask value
(set in hexadecimal) 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

Operation result 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0

(b) Shift operation

The monitor device value is shifted in the specified direction (to right or left)
by the preset bit count.

Shifted 4 bits to the right.

Monitor device value 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0

Operation result 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0

Shifted 4 bits to the left.

Monitor device value 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1

Operation result 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0

5 - 135 5 - 135
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(c) Operation by formula

This function carries out the arithmetic operation of the monitor device
value using the specified expression, and displays the object according to
the result of operation.
1) Expression format
A (A • B) • C ((A • B) • C) • (D • E)
A•B A • ((B • C) • D) (A • B) • ((C • D) • E)
A • (B • C) A • (B •(C • D) ((A • B) • (C • D)) • E
• Values available for A to E
Numerical value .......... Numerical value of up to 32 digits (decimal)
including minus and decimal point are
available.
$$................................. Used to specify monitor device values as
values A to E.
$W ............................... Used to specify input values as values A to E.
(Available only when the numerical input
function is used.)
$V................................. Used to specify the monitor device values/
expression result values as values A to E.
Device.......................... Used to specify the current device values as
values A to E.
2) Available operations
Addition: + Reminder operation: % 1 Division: /
Multiplication: Subtraction:
1 The left side of the symbol is divided by the right side, and the reminder is the result
of operation.
100%3 = 1 (100/3 = 33 with remainder 1)

(d) Operation sequence

1) Sequence of expressions for other than numerical input
function
Monitor Mask Shift Operation
device value operation operation using GOT display
expression

If no expression is specified
2) Sequence of expressions for numerical input function
Operation using Mask
Input value expression Shift operation operation 2
(Write word operation) (AND)
Input value is calculated
using the expression.
Data is written
to destination
device

Numerical Operation using Reverse shift Mask

value expression operation
display (Monitor word operation) operation 1 (AND)
Written value is calculated
using the expression.
If no expression is specified
1 It is opposite to the write shift operation.
For example, if the shift operation is performed 2 bits to the right, the reverse shift
operation is carried out 2 bits to the left.
5 - 136 5 - 136
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

2 What arithmetic is done by write mask operation

Write mask operation is different from ordinary logical product (AND) operation.
The following arithmetic is done.

Operation result (write value)=

(processing result up to shift operation AND mask value) OR (present value AND reverse pattern of mask value)

Example: This example assumes the following setting.

Item Setting
Input value 5555H
Operation by expression None
Shift operation None
Mask value 00FFH
Device value prior to write
AAAAH
(present value)

Processing result up to shift operation Device value prior to write (present value)
and mask value are ANDed. and reverse pattern of mask value are
ANDed.
5555H AND 00FFH = 0055H AAAAH AND FF00H = AA00H

The above two processing results are

ORed and its result is handled as a write
value.
0055H OR AA00H = AA55H

(5) Expression performed when GOT-F900 series is used

There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT-F900
series.
The value resulting from four function arithmetic done on the data of a word
element with the values entered into Gain 1, Gain 2 and Offset is displayed or
entered.
(a) Gain 1
Multiplication is performed. (Defaults to 1 when not used)
• Word element data Gain 1

(b) Gain 2
Division is performed. (Defaults to 1 when not used)
• Word element data/Gain 2

(c) Offset
Addition or subtraction is performed. (Defaults to 0 when not used)
Enter a negative value to perform subtraction.
• Word element data + Offset

Calculation is made in the following format.

Word element data Gain 1 / Gain 2 + Offset

5 - 137 5 - 137
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

5.9.5 Station number switching function (Switches the monitor destination to the same
device of another station number)
GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series
This function allows you to switch the device of the currently monitored object to the
same device of another station number on the same data link/network/CC-
Link/Ethernet system to monitor multiple PLC stations on the same monitor screen.
This function is available only when the connection target PLC is the MELSEC-A,
MELSEC-QnA or MELSEC-Q series.
POINT
The stations whose station numbers can be changed are the same as those in the
access range that the GOT can monitor.
For the range that can be monitored, refer to the GOT-A900 Series User's Manual
(GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection manual).
(1) Function outline
(a) The same object is used to monitor the devices of the other stations.
Station No. 1
(For data link)
Station No. 0
D100 100 (master station)
Station No. 2
Monitoring the
host station
D100 200 D100 40
D100 40
Station No. 3
Station number change device
D20 00FF (Hexadecimal)
D100 10
Monitoring station Monitoring station Monitoring station
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3

D100 100 D100 200 D100 10

Station number change Station number change Station number change
device device device
D20 0001 (Hexadecimal) D20 0002 (Hexadecimal) D20 0003 (Hexadecimal)

Setting Portion Settings

All
Switching Station No. dialog box
Device: D100
Screen Auxiliary
< Auxiliary >tab Carry out station no. change: checked
setting dialog box

(b) The network/station is selected and monitored according to the screen type.

Base screen Monitoring the other station Monitoring the other station
Monitoring the host station
N/W No.: 1 N/W No.: 1
Station No.: 3 Station No.: 3

Overlap window 1 Monitoring the Monitoring the Monitoring the other

station N/W No.: 2
host station host station Station No.: 6

Station number change device (hexadecimal)

Base screen :D20 00FF 0103 0103
Overlap window screen 1 :D21 00FF 00FF 0206

Setting Portion Settings

Screen type
Base: D20
Switching Station No. dialog box
Overlap window 1: D21
Overlap window 2: D21
Screen Auxiliary
< Auxiliary >tab Carry out station no. change: checked
setting dialog box

5 - 138 5 - 138
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Setting items

The station number switching function consists of the following setting items.
• "Switching Station No." dialog box

Switching Checked/Unchecked
station No.
All Checked/Unchecked
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Screen Checked/Unchecked
type
Base Checked/Unchecked

Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Overlap Checked/Unchecked
window1
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Overlap Checked/Unchecked
window2
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.

Superimpose Checked/Unchecked
window
Device dialog box ...Set the Device No.
Include Touch key action/observe Status(Screen)/Script(Screen)

(3) Setting method

Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method.
1) Choose [Help]-[Firstly].
2) Choose "Setup operations using the "Common" menu" "Setting up the
switching station number device" from Contents of Help.

5 - 139 5 - 139
5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

POINT
• The stations accessible by switching station number are equal to the stations that
can be accessed for monitoring the objects.
For details, refer to the operating manual for the GOT-A900 Series Operating
Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection
System Manual)
• The devices for the following objects do not allow the switching station number.
Even when a switching station number is instructed, the GOT continues the
monitoring using the same device specified by the object.
• Alarm list 1 • Switching screen
• Trend graph display 1 • Alarm history display
• Hardcopy function • Switching station number
• System information function • Report Function
• Clock display • Scatter chart display function 1
1: Unusable only when the memory save function is used.
• When a GOT data register (GD) is used for the station No. switching device, the
GOT monitors station No.0 of network No.0 immediately after the GOT is started
until a value is set for the station No. switching device (GD).
Thus, the system alarm "402 Communication timeout. Confirm communication
pathway or modules." will occur depending on the connection type.
To not occur the system alarm, create the initial displaying screen and set the value
to switching station No. device in the screen.
• The station number can be changed by performing station number switching
operation with the touch key.
Refer to Section 5.5 for the station number switching operation with the touch key.

Monitoring the Monitoring the

host station other station
NW No.: 2
Station No.: 10

5 - 140 5 - 140
 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT

6.1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The following describes the outline of the procedures for common setting required for
preparing screens on the GT Designer.
For operation procedures of each item, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
Start

Select [ New ] in the selection dialog box of the project displayed

when the drawing software is started, and set the GOT/PLC type.

Select the [Common]-[Switching Screen] menu to set the

switching device for the base screen and the window screen
(Base screen switching device default value : D0)

Select [Common]-[Switching Station No.] menu to designate the ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ If station number is not switched,
device for switching the station number setting is not required
6

Select the [Common]-[Password] menu to set password for each

security level to show/hide objects ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ If the security function is not used,
(Default value of the security level : 0 (lowest)) setting is not required

Select the [Project]-[Option] menu to set the operation

environment (Toolbar status (shown/hidden), Display method of
grid, etc.) of the GT Designer

Select the [View]-[Color Setting] menu and designate display

colors for each object and figure by using the color list box
(Available only for 256-color TFT display)

End

6-1 6-1
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.2 Operations for Drawing Figures

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

Operations for drawing figures are described in the help window.

For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.

6.3 Operations for Object Setting

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for drawing objects.
For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
Start

• Select the object to draw from the [Draw] menu

• Click the button of the object to draw on the tool palette

The object drawing dialog box is displayed

6
Designate the basic tab items (basic setting, display setting, etc.)

If extension tab is not designated

If extension tab is designated

Click the Extended>> button

Designate the extended tab items

(option, expression, etc.)

After setting, click the OK button

g £
Š ^Designate
’ â {ƒƒ ƒ
“ ð Š the
‚ Nƒ ƒ Ndisplay
bƒ ƒ · ‚ position of the object
‚ é

End

6-2 6-2
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The following flowchart gives an outline of operation procedure for creating a report
screen.
For full information, refer to the help function of the GT Designer.
Start

Choose the [Screen]-[New Screen] menu and create a new report

screen.

Choose the [Report]-[Common] menu and set the page renewal,

watch interval, abort trigger device, report print format, margins,
etc.

Choose the [Report]-[Parameter] menu and set the report

screen parameters (report style selection, page
number/time-of-day print selection, collection trigger designation).

Using report figures (line/text), set the print layout.

Using print objects (numerical/comment), set the data to be printed.

Specify the header/repeated lines.

End

6-3 6-3
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.5 Installation Operations of System Program

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

POINT
When using GT SoftGOT, you need not perform this operation.

6.5.1 Types of system program installed on GOT

To operate the GOT, the following system programs must be installed on the GOT.

POINT
• If the system program of GT Designer used to create the screen data is newer
than the system program installed in the GOT unit, the older system program may
not be compatible with some new functions.
When downloading the screen data, it is recommended to install the system
program again.
• The versions (leftmost versions) of the basic function OS, PLC communication
driver and extended function OS to be installed into the GOT should be the same.
If they are different, the GOT will not operate.
(Example 1) (Example 2)
Basic function OS : Ver. 9.*.* Basic function OS : Ver. 9.*.*
PLC communication driver : Ver. 9.*.* PLC communication driver : Ver. 8.*.*
Extended function OS : Ver. 9.*.* Extended function OS : Ver. 8.*.*
The GOT operates. The GOT does not operate.

(1) Standard monitor OS

The system program to control the monitor function

(2) Communication driver

The driver to communicate between the GOT and the PLC CPU

(3) Extended function OS (Installed as required)

(a) The system programs which provides the GOT with the
following extended functions
• Ladder monitoring • Recipe function • Operation panel
function function
• System monitoring • Sound function • Report function
function
• Special unit monitoring • Printer function • Barcode function
function
• Network monitoring • Video display function • RGB screen display
function function
• Motion monitoring • Gateway function • Servo amplifier monitor
function function

6-4 6-4
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

(b) Combination of installable extended function Operating

Systems
Up to nine of the following extended function OSs can be selected as a
combination of extended function OSs that can be installed into the GOT.
The number of installable extended function OSs varies with the GOT built-
in memory space. (If an extension memory board is not fitted, the extended
function OSs equivalent to a total of up to six required memories in the
table can be stored.)
Refer to Appendix 6 for details of the GOT built-in memory and installed
extended function OSs.
Number Equivalent to Required
Extended Function OS Name Remarks
Memories at Installation
System monitor 1
MELSEC-A ladder monitor 1
Only one
Ladder MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function 1 2
may be
monitor MELSEC-Q ladder monitor function 1 2
selected.
MELSEC-FX ladder monitor 1
Motion Monitor 2
Special unit, Recipe, Sound 1
Network monitor 1
List editor function (MELSEC-A) 1 2
Gateway (Server/Client, FTP Server, Mail) 2
Servo amplifier monitor 2
ESC Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key board 2 1
PCL Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key board 2 1
ESC Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2 1
PCL Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2 1
ESC Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Video/RGB 2 1
PCL Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Video/RGB 2 1
Chinese(Big5) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key
1 Only one
board 2
Other may be
Chinese(Big5) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2 1
selected.
Chinese(Big5) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV,
1
Video/RGB 2
Chinese(GB) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, Key
1
board 2
Chinese(GB) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV, I/O 2 1
Chinese(GB) Printer, Barcode, Report, CSV,
1
Video/RGB 2

1: If the OSs are installed into the GOT where multiple extended/optional functions have already
been installed, they may not be installed depending on the status of the GOT memory area.
In such a case, install them again after removing the extended/optional functions installed in the
GOT.

6-5 6-5
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

2: Install the "Other" extended function OSs when using the following functions.
• Report function • Operation panel function • Printer function
• Barcode function • Video display function • RGB display
• External I/O function • When object function is used to create CSV format files
For this extended function OS, refer to the following 1) and 2) and select the OS that meets the
language to be output to the printer or CSV file and the optional device used.
1) Language to be output to the printer connected to the GOT or the CSV file (alarm
history display function, recipe function)
ESC printer : Output in Japanese
PCL printer : Output in English
Chinese (Big 5) printer : Output in Chinese (traditional language)
Chinese (GB) printer : Output in Chinese (simplified language)

2) Used optional device

External key input : Operation panel, ten-key panel (operation panel function)
Proximity I/O : External I/O device (external I/O function)
Video/RGB input : Video camera (video display function), personal computer
(RGB display function)

(4) ROM_BIOS (Reinstalled as required)

ROM_BIOS is a system program designed to control the GOT hardware and to
make communication between the personal computer and GOT.
ROM_BIOS is installed the GOT before it is shipped from the factory, but when
specific functions are used, ROM_BIOS of the compatible version or later must
be reinstalled in the GOT.
Before starting reinstallation, always check the precautions in Section 6.5.2.

6-6 6-6
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.5.2 Required knowledge before installation of system program

(1) Operations required to use new functions supported by the new

version of the GT Designer
1) When using the following function, check that the version of ROM_BIOS
installed in the GOT is compatible with the function used.
Applicable version of ROM_BIOS
Function Name
For A985 / 97 / 960GOT For A95 GOT
When using the flash PC
Version F or later Not allowed for use
card 1
QnA ladder monitor
function, Q ladder Version H or later Not allowed for use
monitor function
When using the A9GT-
FNB8M/ Version J or later Not allowed for use
A9GT-QFNB8M
Maximum number of
base screens set (when
Version P or later
using 1025 to 4096
screens)
Ethernet connection
Version Q or later
function
Gateway function Version S or later

1: If either of the following status has occurred during use of the flash PC card, perform the
scan disk of the flash PC card on the personal computer used.
• PC card-related error code (334, 351, 352, 353, 354, and 355) was detected by the alarm
list (System Alarm) function.
• The "Data transfer error" message was displayed when you executed the screen copy of
the utility functions.
2: The corresponding ROM_BIOS is factory-installed in the GOT unit.

POINT
• How to check the ROM_BIOS version installed in the GOT
Use the memory information function of the GOT.
MEMORY INFORMATION

[ S/W Version ]
ROM_BIOS
ROM BIOS Ver.2.0.0 [C]
SYSTEM Ver.2.0.0 Version
COMM. DRIVER Ver.2.0.0
PLC MONITOR Ver.2.0.0
ESC PRINT.B-CODE Not Installed
LADDER (A) Ver.2.0.0
SP. UNIT MON Ver.2.0.0
(SP,RECIPE,WAVE)
SP. UNIT DATA Not Installed
NET WORK MON Ver.2.0.0

2) If ROM_BIOS of the GOT is not compatible, reinstall ROM_BIOS of the GT

Designer in the GOT.
POINT
• How to check the ROM_BIOS version of the GT Designer
Select the [Communication] - [Install] - [ROM_BIOS] menu, and check the version
of ROM_BIOS in the [ROM_BIOS Install] dialog box.

3) Install the OS in the GOT.

6-7 6-7
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

(2) Precautions for installing the system program

• Before installing the system program to the GOT under use, be sure to make a
backup of the screen data stored in the GOT. (Backup data is not required if the
screen data is stored in FD or HD.)
If the system program is installed, the screen data stored in the memory of the
GOT will be deleted.
Back-up operation can be carried out by using the upload function.
• Check that the communication cable connectors are firmly attached to the
connection ports on the GOT and the personal computer.
• Set up communication of the personal computer (RS-232C port, communication
speed).
Select the [Project]-[Option] menu and set up communication.
• Do not input other data to the PC card to which the ROM_BIOS is to be
installed.
When the ROM_BIOS is installed from the PC card to the GOT, other data will
be deleted.
• Before installing the system program, be sure to remove the communication
unit/communication board/option unit from the GOT.
If the GOT has the built-in communication interface, disconnect the
communication cable.

(3) Precautions while the system program is installed

• Do not turn OFF the GOT or the personal computer.
Do not disconnect the communication cable.
If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication
cable is disconnected during installation, the GOT may stop operating.
• Once installation of the ROM_BIOS is started, it cannot be canceled.
If canceled, the GOT may stop operating.
• Once installation of the OS is started, it can be canceled, but re-installation is
required.
If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication
cable is disconnected to cancel installation, the GOT may stop operating.

POINT
If the GOT does not run due to any of the above-indicated operations, reinstall
the system program in the following procedure.
1) Switch off the GOT unit.
2) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit loaded to
the GOT.
If the GOT has the built-in communication interface, disconnect the
communication cable.
3) Hold down the following two places of the GOT display section at the same
time and switch on the GOT.

4) The "Reinstall the ROM_BIOS/OS" message appears on the GOT display

section.
5) Follow the instructions on the GOT display section to complete the installation
operation.

6-8 6-8
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.5.3 Installation of ROM_BIOS

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for installation of the
ROM_BIOS.
For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
Start

Select the [Communication]-[Install]-[ROM_BIOS] menu

The ROM_BIOS installation dialog box is displayed

Select the source path name and the destination (GOT/PC card)

g £
Š ’ â {ƒ^ƒ ƒ
“ ð Š Click
‚ Nƒ ƒ bƒ ƒN the
· ‚ Install button
‚ é

End

POINT
The ROM_BIOS is installed as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC
card).
• If installed to GOT
The ROM_BIOS is installed to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.
• If installed to PC card
The ROM_BIOS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot.
Mount the PC card which contains the ROM_BIOS to the GOT, and install the
ROM_BIOS to the built-in memory of the GOT by the following procedure.
1) Mount the PC card to the GOT.
2) Turn OFF the GOT.
3) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit from the
GOT.
If the GOT has the built-in communication interface, disconnect the
communication cable.
4) Turn ON the PC card access switch.
5) Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT display
simultaneously.

6) The message to indicate that ROM_BIOS is being installed appears on the

GOT display, and installation is carried out.
7) Complete installation according to the instruction on the GOT display.

6-9 6-9
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.5.4 Installation of OS

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for OS installation.
For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
Start

Select the [Communication]-[Install]-[OS] menu

The OS installation dialog box is displayed

Select
g £
Š ’ â the
{ƒƒ^source
ƒ
“ ð‚ Nƒpath
Š bƒname
ƒ ƒ
N · ‚and the destination (GOT/PC card)
‚ é

g £
Š ’ â {ƒƒ
^ ƒ ‚ NSelect
“ ð Š bƒ the
ƒƒ ƒ
N ·‚type
‚ of OS to install
é

g £
Š ’ â {ƒƒ
^ ƒ
“ ð Š Click
‚ Nƒ ƒ N the
bƒ ƒ · ‚ Install button
‚ é

End

POINT
The OS is installed as follows according to the destination (GOT/PC card).
• If installed to GOT
The OS is installed to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.
• If installed to PC card
The OS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the personal
computer.
Mount the PC card which contains the OS to the GOT, and install the OS to the
built-in memory of the GOT by the following procedure.
1) Mount the PC card to the GOT.
2) Turn OFF the GOT.
3) Remove the communication board/communication unit/option unit from the
GOT.
If the GOT has the built-in communication interface, disconnect the
communication cable.
4) Turn ON the PC card access switch.
5) Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT
display simultaneously.

6) The message to indicate that OS is being installed appears on the GOT

display, and installation is carried out.

6 - 10 6 - 10
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.6 Download of Screen Data

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for downloading the
screen data.
For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Designer.
Start

Select the [Communication]-[Download (to GOT)]-[Monitor Data] menu

The download dialog box for the monitor data is displayed

Select the destination (GOT/PC card)

Select whether to download all data or part of data

(If part of data is selected, designate the screen number to
download)

Click the Download button

End

POINT
• For screen data downloading (reading) operation performed when GT SoftGOT
is used, refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual.
• The screen data is downloaded as follows according to the destination
(GOT/PC card).
(When using the GOT-F900 series, you cannot select the PC card.)
If downloaded to GOT
The screen data is downloaded to the built-in memory of the GOT via RS-232C.
If downloaded to PC card
The screen data is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the
personal computer.
Mount the PC card which contains the screen data to the GOT, and select the
screen copy function from the utility screen of the GOT to copy the screen data
to the built-in memory of the GOT.
For details of the screen copy function, refer to the GOT-A900 series operating
manual (extended • option functions manual).

6 - 11 6 - 11
6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT
MELSOFT

6.7 Debugging of Screen Data

GOT-A900 series GOT-F900 series

POINT
When using GT SoftGOT, you cannot use GT Debugger.

The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for debugging the
screen data downloaded to the GOT between the personal computer and the GOT.
For further details, refer to the help window of the GT Debugger.
Start

Activate the GT Debugger

Read the screen data downloaded to the GOT by either of the

following operations
• Select the [File]-[Open] menu

• Click the button

Start communication between the GOT and the personal

computer by either of the following operations
• Select the [Communication]-[Start] menu

• Click the button.

Debug each screen

Save the device values designated by the debugging operation

(By reading this file next time, device values set previously can
be used for debugging)

End

6 - 12 6 - 12
 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS

7.1 Overview

This chapter explains the script functions which can be used with the GOT-A900
series.
The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT's original
programs (hereafter abbreviated to "scripts").
Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script reduces the load sharply on the
system side (e.g. PLC CPU, microcomputer) display.

7.1.1 Features

(1) Ease of system maintenance

Using the script functions, the system side needs only machine control programs,
facilitating system maintenance.

(2) A variety of screen controls exercised by GOT alone

Using the script functions enable the following operations which could not be
achieved by the GOT alone.
(a) Cooperation with various object functions
• A single lamp represents multiple bit device states.
• A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is on, and is
erased if they are all off.
• As soon as a numeric value is input, a part denoting "Already input" is
pasted to the place adjacent to the input value indication frame.
• A single touch switch is used to perform multiple operations
corresponding to multiple states.
7 • As soon as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
(b) Complicated arithmetic processing
• A polynomial operation which was difficult to be represented in a ladder
program is represented simply on a single line.
Ladder program Script

D5=(D1-D2)/100+(D3-D4)/100

• Not only four fundamental operations but also various application

arithmetic functions, such as trigonometric and exponential functions, can
be used optionally.
(c) Unlimited application fields
• The corresponding year, month and day are found by the entry of year,
month and day and the entry of the number of days.
When will it be 345 days after May 20, 2000? April 30, 2001
• The day of the week is found by the entry of year, month and day.
What day of the week is February 21, 1961? Tuesday

7-1 7-1
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Easy-to-understand programming language

As a script is a language type program like the C language, all you need is entry-
level programming knowledge to create programs.

(4) Programming editors available on the market

You can use the familiar text editors (e.g. Microsoft Windows -standard memo
R R

pad, Wordpad) for programming to improve program productivity.

(5) Execution condition selectable on script basis

Any of various conditions (any time, periodic, bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF, during
bit ON/OFF, periodic during bit ON/OFF) may be chosen as a trigger to execute
each script, enabling script execution scheduling.

(6) Fully useful debugging functions

Since a script is like the C language, the general C language compiler or
debugger (e.g. Microsoft Visual C++) can be used for simulation by making
R

slight corrections. This is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses
many control statements.
The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using the GOT.
You can use the test and device monitor functions to check conditional branching
in a script. By monitoring the GOT special registers (GS), you can easily check
error information and a script in execution.

(7) Grammar check on created scripts

Before executing created scripts on the GOT, you can make a grammar check on
GT Designer, increasing programming efficiency.

(8) Digital's script language convertible 7

You can convert the script language (D script/global D script) created on Digital
package "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver. 3.0)" and operate it on the GOT.

POINT
• Make "execution condition setting" and "grammar check" on GT Designer at the
time of monitor screen creation. Refer to GT Designer help for details.
• Digital's script language is converted on GT Converter.
Refer to the GT Converter help for convertible data and converting method
details.

7-2 7-2
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.1.2 Operating instructions

You should know the following instructions to use the script functions.
(1) Usable range of the script functions
Since these functions are designed to control the GOT display, do not use them
to exercise machine control which demands severe timings.
For data changes to be made from the GOT to the PLC, configure up an interlock
circuit in a sequence program to ensure that the whole system will operate safely.

(2) Stopping the script processing

In any of the following cases, the corresponding script processing is stopped,
resulting in an error.
• A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0
• A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit
BCD" was selected as a script data format.
Example) [D0]=[D1]: Present value of D1 is "0x991A"
• An operation result is outside the BCD range when "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit
BCD" was selected as a script data format.
Example) 16-bit: Other than 0 to 9999
32-bit: Other than 0 to 99999999
• As the write destination device of the while statement, a temporary device area
(TMP) was not used but the PLC CPU device or GOT internal device (GD) was
used.

POINT
• Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the usable data ranges.
• Refer to Section 7.2.2 for details of the while statement.
• Refer to Section 7.5 for the actions to be taken when script processing has
stopped.

(3) Differences in processing result between data formats

Note that any of the following cases will produce an unintended processing
result.
• When the script data format selected is other than "16-bit BCD" and "32-bit
BCD", the constant described is outside the range of the selected data format.
• When the script data format selected is "16-bit unsigned BIN" or "32-bit
unsigned BIN", the constant described is negative.
• When the script data format selected is other than "real number", the constant
described is with a decimal point.

POINT
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the data formats.

(4) Instructions for monitor device description

Some PLC CPU devices to be monitored require their device numbers to be
described in the specific number of digits.
Note that a malfunction may occur if they are not described in the specific
number of digits.

POINT
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the describing method.

7-3 7-3
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(5) Instructions for substitution delay

The script function writes the operation result to the PLC CPU at an end of one
script.
Hence, performing substitution processing as in "Example 1" causes a write delay.
Describe a script as in "Example 2" and "Example 3" to minimize the frequencies
of communications with the PLC CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing.
Example 1) Substitution processing using PLC CPU devices
[w:D1]=[w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into D1.
[w:D2]=[w:D1]; //substitutes D1 into D2.

D0 100 100

D1 200 100

D2 300 200

Script start Script end

In this script, the D0 value is not reflected on D2 immediately,

causing a write delay. This status persists until this script is
processed.
Note that using the GOT internal devices (GD, GB) as the
substitution devices will give the same result.
Example 2) Substitution processing using temporary works
[w:TMP0001]=[w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into TMP0001.
[w:D1]=[w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
[w:D2]=[w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D2.

D0 100 100

D1 200 100

D2 300 100

Script start Script end

Using the temporary works designed for script functions prevents a

write delay.
POINT
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the temporary works.

7-4 7-4
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Example 3) Substitution processing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB)

[w:GD1]=[w:D0]; //substitutes D0 into GD1
[w:D1]=[w:GD1]; //substitutes GD1 into D1.
[w:D2]=[w:GD2]; //substitutes GD1 into D2.

As the processing timing using GOT internal devices (GD, GB) is the
same as that using temporary works, a write delay can be prevented.
When using the GOT internal devices to prevent a substitution delay,
perform GOT internal device substitution delay cancel in the script
setting of GT Designer.

POINT
• Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the script setting using GT
Designer.
• When GOT internal device (GD, GB) substitution delay cancel is performed, a link
scan is made on each line having the GOT internal device (GD, GB). Note that
the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GD internal devices (GD,
GB) are used in many places.

(6) Precautions for converting Digital's script language

The LS devices described in Digital's script language are designed to be free
from a substitution delay.
Hence, when Digital's script language using LS devices as shown in "Example 1"
in (5) is converted, different operation may be performed on the GOT.
As shown in "Example 2" in (5), use temporary works in Digital's script language
using LS devices to prevent a substitution delay.

7-5 7-5
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.2 Specifications

This section describes the specifications of the script functions.

7.2.1 Types

There are the following types of script functions.

(1) Project script function

This type of script operates for the whole project created on GT Designer.
The project script function can always be performed during online processing of
the GOT.
A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled.
Up to 256 scripts can be set to one project.

POINT
• Operating for the whole project, a project script is useful for the following case:
Example) As soon as the alarm list (system alarm) function detects an error, the
troubleshooting screen appears automatically.
• The project script monitor devices are always operating.
Therefore, note that a larger number of monitor points will make the monitor
screen slower in response.

(2) Screen script function

This type of script operates for each screen created on GT Designer.
The screen script function may be performed only while the corresponding
screen appears during online processing of the GOT.
A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled.
These scripts may be set on base screens/window screens (super impose
window, overlap window 1, overlap window 2).
Screens called by the screen calling function will also be the target of script
processing.
However, screens shown by the part display function will not be the target of
script processing.
Up to 256 scripts can be set to one screen (including the screen called by the
screen calling function).

POINT
• Refer to Section 4.1 for details of each screen.
• Refer to Section 5.10.1 for details of the screen calling function.
• Refer to Section 5.4.1 for details of the part display function.
• The project script monitor devices are always operating. Hence, a larger number
of monitor points will make the monitor screen slower in response.
• Note that a larger number of screen script monitor device points will make the
monitor screen slower in response.

7-6 7-6
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.2.2 Control structure

This section describes the control structure of the script functions.

The following commands (control statements, operators, functions, etc.) are used to
program scripts.
Nesting is allowed in if, while and switch statements.
A return statement is used to end a script.
Item Command Description
[Statement example] if(conditional expression){set of expressions}
[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression),
and if its result is true (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions}.
if
[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to
perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program
sequence.
[Statement example] if(conditional expression){set of expressions 1}else{set of expressions 2}
[Function] Exercises judgment control. Evaluates the (conditional expression),
and if its result is true (other than 0), executes the {set of expressions 1},
if to else or if false (0), executes the {set of expressions 2}.
[Point] An if statement is the most basic judgment control, which is used to
perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program
sequence.
[Statement example] while(continuous conditional expression){set of expressions}
[Function] Evaluates the (continuous conditional expression), and if its result is true
(other than 0), repeats executing the {set of expressions}.
If the "continuous conditional expression" is false (0), execution exits
from the while statement.
while [Point] • A while statement is used to perform given processing for up to a
specific purpose.
(For example, waiting for touch key input)
Making the continuous conditional expression always true (other than 0)
results in an endless loop.
• A temporary device area must be used as the write destination device.
Control [Statement example] switch(term)
statement {
case constant:set of expressions;break;
case constant:set of expressions;break;
default:set of expressions;
}
[Function] Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch, case,
break and default.
switch In either of the following cases, executes the "sets of expressions"
case following the case and default statements.
default • The (term) value matches the "constant"
brake • It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement
In either of the following cases, execution exits from { } of switch.
• There is a break statement within a script
• There are no case statements having the "constants" corresponding
to the (term) and no default statement.
Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control
statement.
[Point] The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires
different processings to be performed.
[Statement example] return;
return [Function] Ends a script.
[Point] A single script can have multiple returns.
[Statement example] ;
; [Function] Represents the end of a single statement. This symbol is necessary at
the end of a single statement.

7-7 7-7
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Item Command Description

[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression)&&(relational operation
expression)){.....}
&& [Function] 1 if two (relational operation expressions) are both true, or 0 if either is
false.
(Logical AND operator)
[Statement example] if ((relational operation expression)||(relational operation
Logical expression)){.....}
|| [Function] 1 if either of relational operation expressions is true, or 0 if both are
false.
(Logical OR operator)
[Statement example] if (!(relational operation expression)){.....}
! [Function] 1 if the relational operation expression is 0, or 0 otherwise.
(Logical NOT operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> < <term 2>
<
[Function] <Term 1> is less than <term 2>. (Left inequality operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> <= <term 2>
<= [Function] <Term 1> is less than or equal to <term 2>.
(Equivalence left inequality operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> > <term 2>
>
[Function] <Term 1> is greater than <term 2>. (Right inequality operator)
Relational
[Statement example] <Term 1> >= <term 2>
>= [Function] <Term 1> is greater than or equal to <term 2>.
(Equivalence right inequality operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> != <term 2>
!=
[Function] <Term 1> is not equal to <term 2>. (Non-equivalence operator)
[Statement example] <Term 1> == <term 2>
==
[Function] <Term 1> is equal to <term 2>. (Equivalence operator)
[Statement example] <Term> + <factor>
Operator +
[Function] Adds <factor> to <term>. (Addition operator)
[Statement example] <Term> <factor>
[Function] Subtracts <factor> from <term>. (Subtraction operator)
[Statement example] <Term> <factor>
[Function] Multiplies <term> by <factor>. (Multiplication operator)
Arithmetic [Statement example] <Term> / <factor>
/ [Function] Divides <term> by <factor>. (Division operator)
[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
[Statement example] <Term> % <factor>
[Function] Finds a remainder derived from division of <term> by <factor>.
%
(Remainder operator)
[Point] If <factor> is 0, script operation stops.
[Statement example] <Term> & <factor>
& [Function] Finds the logical product (AND) of <term> and <factor>.
(Bit product operator)
[Statement example] <Term> | <factor>
|
[Function] Finds the logical add (OR) of <term> and <factor>. (Bit addition operator)
[Statement example] ~ <bit>
~
[Function] Negates (inverts) <bit>. (Complement operator)
Bit device
[Statement example] <Term> ^ <factor>
^ [Function] Finds the exclusive logical add (XOR) of <term> and <factor>.
(Bit difference operator)
[Statement example] <Term> << <factor>
<<
[Function] Shifts <term> to the left by <factor>. (Left shift operator)
[Statement example] <Term> >> <factor>
>>
[Function] Shifts <term> to the right by <factor>. (Right shift operator)
[Statement example] <Device> = <term>
Substitution =
[Function] Stores <term> into <device>. (Substitution operator)

7-8 7-8
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Item Command Description

set [Statement example] set(<bit device>)

[Function] SETs <bit device>.
Device [Statement example] rst(<bit device>)
rst
operation [Function] RSTs <bit device>.

alt [Statement example] alt(<bit device>)

[Function] Inverts <bit device>.
Operator [Statement example] bmov(<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
bmov [Function] Batch-transfers the number of devices specified at <integer>, starting
Continuous from <word device 1>, to the number of devices specified at <integer>,
device starting from <word device 2>.
operation [Statement example] fmov(<word device 1>, <word device 2>, <integer>)
fmov [Function] Transfers <word device 1> to the number of devices specified at
<integer>, starting from <word device 2>.
[Statement example] sin(<word device or constant>)
sin [Function] Calculates the sine of the specified <word device or constant>. (Sine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] cos(<word device or constant>)
cos [Function] Calculates the cosine of the specified <word device or constant>.
(Cosine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] tan(<word device or constant>)
tan [Function] Calculates the tangent of the specified <word device or constant>.
(Tangent)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] asin(<word device or constant>)
asin [Function] Calculates the arcsine of <word device or constant>. (Arcsine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] acos(<word device or constant>)
acos [Function] Calculates the arccosine of <word device or constant>. (Arccosine)
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
Application
[Statement example] atan(<word device or constant>)
Function arithmetic atan [Function] Calculates the arctangent of <word device or constant>. (Arctangent)
operation
<word device or constant>: To be set in radian units.
[Statement example] abs(<word device or constant>)
abs [Function] Calculates the absolute value of <word device or constant>.
(Absolute value)
[Statement example] log(<word device or constant>)
log [Function] Calculates the logarithm (natural logarithm) of base e <word device or
constant>.
[Statement example] log10(<word device or constant>)
log10 [Function] Calculates the logarithm (common logarithm) of base 10 <word device
or constant>. (Common logarithm)

exp [Statement example] exp(<word device or constant>)

[Function] Calculates the power of base e <word device or constant>. (Exponent)
[Statement example] 1dexp(<word device 1 or constant 1>, <word device 2 or constant 2>)
1dexp [Function] Calculates the <word device 2 or constant 2> power of <word device 1
or constant 1> 2. (Exponential product)
[Statement example] sqrt(<word device or constant>)
sqrt
[Function] Calculates the square root of <word device or constant>. (Square root)
[Statement example] Constant
Constant [Function] Represents a constant (decimal/hexadecimal/BCD/real number).
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of constants.
[Statement example] [Device type:device number]
Others Device and temporary [Function] Represents a PLC CPU device, GOT internal device or temporary device
work area.
Refer to Section 7.2.3 for details of the devices and temporary works.

Comment // [Statement example] //(comment)

[Function] A comment for a script can be described in (comment).

7-9 7-9
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.2.3 Usable data and representation methods

(1) Script data formats

You can choose any of the following seven different data formats for the script
functions.
Note that the data format selected is fixed on a script basis.
• 16-bit, signed BIN
• 16-bit, unsigned BIN
• 32-bit, signed BIN
• 32-bit, unsigned BIN
• 16-bit BCD
• 32-bit BCD
• 32-bit real number

POINT
Select the data format on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation.
For selective operation details, refer to the GT Designer help.

(2) Usable constants and representation methods

The following four different constants are usable with the script functions.

Constant Representation Method

Decimal number 124
Hexadecimal number 0xFF12, 0x14AC67F1
Real number 32.124, 3.2124e + 10
BCD 344

Note that the data format of each script determines the usable constants and
data ranges as listed below.

Data Format Usable Constant Usable Data Range

Decimal number -32768 to 32767
16-bit, signed BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to 7FFF
Decimal number 0 to 65535
16-bit, unsigned BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFF
Decimal number -2147483648 to 2147483647
32-bit, signed BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to 7FFFFFFF
Decimal number 0 to 4294967295
32-bit, unsigned BIN
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF
BCD 0 to 9999
16-bit BCD
Hexadecimal number 0 to 270F
BCD 0 to 99999999
32-bit BCD
Hexadecimal number 0 to 5F5E0FF
Real number
32-bit real number
Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF

7 - 10 7 - 10
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Usable devices and representation methods

The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other
monitor functions.
The device types and whether the station number is specified or not change how
devices will be represented as indicated below.

Device Type Statement Example Representation Example

Word device [w:device number 2] [w:D100]
Bit device [b:device number 2] [b:X100]
Specified bit of word device [b:device number 2. bit position] [b:D100.01]
Specified word of bit device [w:device number 2] [w:X100]
Station number-specified [Network number-station
[0-FF:w:D100]
device 1 number:w:device number 2]

1: When the QCPU, QnACPU or ACPU is used, omitting the network number and station
number monitors the devices of the own station (0-FF).
2: Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored, the device number must be described in the
number of digits as indicated below.

Number of Digits Described (Digits) Representation

PLC CPU Used Device Name Remarks
Word specified Bit specified Example
.. 2 [b:..2303] Because of the channel + relay
OMRON PLC format, the relay part is described in
LR, AR, HR, WR 2 [b:HR207]
2 digits.
The file number is described in 3
[w:B000003]
B 6 7 digits, the element number in 3
[b:MB02343]
digits, and the bit position in 1 digit.
Allen-Bradley PLC
N, TP, TA, CP, CA 6 [w:N007255] The file number is described in 3
TT, TN, CU, CD, digits, and the element number in 3
6 [b:TT004255]
CN digits.
The data block (DB) is described in
SIEMENS PLC D 9 [w:D000100000] 4 digits, and the data word (DW) in
5 digits.

POINT
Devices that may be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor destination PLC
CPU. Refer to Section 4.8 for details.

7 - 11 7 - 11
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) Usable temporary device area and representation methods

The 1024 points (TMP0 toTMP1023) are available for the temporary device area.
A variable is treated as 30-bit and stored with "0" at the GOT power ON.
As this variable is a global variable, it can be referred or updated by any script
when multiple scripts are created.
The temporary device area representation changes with the specified device type
as indicated below.

Device Type Statement Example Representation Example

Word device [w: temporary device area number] [w:TMP0001]
Bit device [b: temporary device area number. bit position] [b:TMP1023.01]

Temporary works are used in the following cases.

Example 1) Prevention of a write delay in substitution processing performed for
the PLC CPU (refer to Section 7.1.2)
Example 2) Write destination device of while statement (refer to Section 7.2.2)
Example 3) Variable for operation
When substituting a D0 + 1 value into D1 and substituting a D1 + 1
value into D2

[w:TMP0001]=[w:D0]+1; //substitutes D0+1 into TMP0001.

[w:D1]=[w:TMP0001]; //substitutes TMP0001 into D1.
[w:D2]=[w:TMP0001]+1; //substitutes TMP0001+1 into D2.

POINT
The temporary device area is a 32-bit global variable.
Note that a correct value may not be read in either of the following cases.
• A value is read is read in the script whose data format is different from that of the
script used to write the value to the temporary device area.
(Example) Script A (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w:TMP0000] = 0x1234;
Script B (data format: 32-bit unsigned)
[w:GD0000] = [w:TMP0000]
• A value is read is read in the script whose representation (word device/bit device)
is different from that of the script used to write the value to the temporary device
area.
(Example) Script C (data format: 16-bit unsigned)
[w:TMP0000] = 0x3;
if( [b:TMP0000.b0] == ON {• • •
When writing and reading a value to and from one temporary device area, use the
same data format and representation.

7 - 12 7 - 12
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(5) How to represent bit devices (system define)

Bit devices can be represented as indicated below.
(a) When performing relational operation of bit device
A device value, which is normally represented "1" or "0", may also be
represented "ON" or "OFF".

if([b:X100]==1){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.

if([b:X100]==ON){[w:D0]=100;} //if X100 is ON, D0 is 100.

(b) When performing substitution processing of bit device

A bit device, which is normally represented with a set or rst statement or by
substituting "1" or "0", may also be represented by substituting "ON" or
"OFF".

set([b:X100]); //X100 turns ON.

[b:X100]=1; //X100 turns ON.

[b:X100]=ON; //X100 turns ON.

(6) How to replace devices and constants (user define)

A device or constant used in a script can be replaced by any character string.
Make user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer.
For details of the setting method, refer to the GT Designer help.

Example: When replacing "X100" with "LS1-ERROR" on GT Designer

if(LS1-ERROR==1){[w:D0]=100}; //if X100(LS1-ERROR) is ON, D0 is 100.

7 - 13 7 - 13
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.2.4 Script execution

This section explains how to execute the script functions.

(1) Execution conditions

The script function execute a script whose execution condition is enabled and
writes the result to the PLC CPU.
There are the following execution conditions.
• Any time
• Bit OFF to ON/ON to OFF
• During bit ON/OFF
• Periodic during bit ON/OFF
• Periodic (1s increments)

POINT
Set the execution condition on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation.
For details of setting, refer to the GT Designer Help.

(2) Execution unit

The script function executes scripts one by one.
If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are enabled, they are not processed
concurrently.

7 - 14 7 - 14
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Execution sequence

The script functions are executed in the following order.

Max.
Screen Calling Function Execution Order Set on GT Execution
Function Type Order Setting Screen Order Execution
Layer Order Designer Sequence
Count
Script A 1)
Project script function Script B 256

Script A 2)
Base Script B

Script A
First called screen Script B
Base 256

Script A
16th called screen Script B

Script A 3)
Superimpose window Script B

Script A
First called screen Script B
Superimpose window 256

Script A
16th called screen Script B

Screen script function

Script A 4)
Overlap window 1 Script B

Script A
First called screen Script B
Overlap window 1 256

Script A
16th called screen Script B

Script A 5)
Overlap window 2 Script B

Script A
First called screen Script B
Overlap window 2 256

Script A
16th called screen Script B

POINT
Refer to Section 5.10.1 for details of the screen calling function.

7 - 15 7 - 15
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(4) Execution status

The script function performs any of the following processings according to the
script status.

Script Status Processing

• A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution
Waiting for turn sequence.
• When its turn has come, the script "waits for execution".
• Processing changes depending on whether the execution
condition is enabled or disabled.
Waiting for execution Enabled: The corresponding script is "executed".
Disabled: The corresponding script "waits its turn" and the next
script "waits for execution".
• When the script ends, the processing result is written to the PLC
CPU and the corresponding script "waits its turn".
Also, the next script "waits for execution".
• If an error occurs, the corresponding script "stops" and the next
Execution
script "waits for execution".
• When a screen change takes place during use of the screen script
function, the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all
"executed" and the next script then "waits for execution".
Stop • The script is kept "stopped" until error history clear is performed.

7 - 16 7 - 16
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.3 Settings and Procedure for Execution

This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script functions.
Start

Create/edit scripts on the text editor commercially available. ......... Refer to Section 7.4.

When many control statements were used to create a ......... Refer to Section 7.5.1.
complicated script, perform operation simulation as required
with a general C complier.

Read the created scripts to project data on GT Designer and ......... Refer to GT Designer Help.
set the data format, trigger type, etc.

Make grammar check on the read scripts on GT Designer. ......... Refer to GT Designer Help.

No
Grammatical?

Yes

Download the project data from the personal computer to the .........
GOT on GT Designer. Refer to Section 6.6.

Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the ......... Refer to Section 7.5.2.
system monitor function.

No
Is operation normal?

Yes

End

POINT
The grammar check function diagnoses whether the created scripts are
grammatical or not. If a grammatical mistake is found, the corresponding script
number, line number and error definition appear. Correct the script.

7 - 17 7 - 17
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.4 Program Examples

This section explains script program examples.

7.4.1 Touch keys with interlock function

(1) Operation
When the Ready and Run/Stop keys turn ON, the Running lamp is lit.
The system operation is controlled synchronously with the Running lamp.

Screen Image Part Operation Definition

Running lamp : Indicates the operating status of the

system.
Ready key : Acts as an interlock for the
Run/Stop key.
Run/Stop key : Used to change the operating status
(run/stop) of the system.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
Monitor device M0001
Ready key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device M0002
Run/Stop key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
M0003
Running lamp Lamp indication function (bit) Monitor device (System operation controlling
device)

(3) Program example

Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Any time

if ([b:M0001]&[b:M0002]==1) //if the ready and run/stop keys both turn ON

{
set([b:M0003]); //the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating.
Script }
else{ //if not
rst([b:M0003]); //the running lamp is extinguished and the system is stopped.
}

7 - 18 7 - 18
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.4.2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions

(1) Operation
The operation of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control states of
three lines are represented by one lamp.

Screen Image Part Operation Definition

Control status lamp : The lamp color and comment are changed
according to the operating states of the
lines.
Line 1 key : Used to control the operation of line 1.
Line 2 key : Used to control the operation of line 2.
Line 3 key : Used to control the operation of line 3.
Stop all lines key : Used to stop all lines.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting
Monitor device D10
Indication range: $V==0 Lamp color: 182
Characters : All lines stop
Indication range: $V==1 Lamp color: 3
Characters : Line 1 running
Indication range: $V==2 Lamp color: 224
Characters : Line 2 running
Indication range: $V==3 Lamp color: 227
Control status lamp Lamp indication function (word) Characters : Line 3 running
Indication method (word)
Indication range: $V==4 Lamp color: 28
Characters : Lines 1, 2 running
Indication range: $V==5 Lamp color: 31
Characters : Lines 1, 3 running
Indication range: $V==6 Lamp color: 252
Characters : Lines 2, 3 running
Indication range: $V==7 Lamp color: 162
Characters : Lines 1, 2, 3 running
Monitor device X1
Line 1 key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device X2
Line 2 key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device X3
Line 3 key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit ALT
Monitor device X0
Stop all lines key Touch key function (bit)
Operation setting Bit SET

7 - 19 7 - 19
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Program example

Item Description
Data format 16-bit, signed BIN
Trigger type Any time

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=0;} //stores 0 into D10 if lines 1, 2 and 3 are all OFF.

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=1;} //stores 1 into D10 if line 1 is ON and lines 2 and 3 are OFF.

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=2;} //stores 2 into D10 if line 2 is ON and lines 1 and 3 are OFF.

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=3;} //stores 3 into D10 if line 3 is ON and lines 1 and 2 are OFF.

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==OFF))
{[w:D10]=4;} //stores 4 into D10 if lines 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF.

Script if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==OFF)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=5;} //stores 5 into D10 if lines 1 and 3 are ON and line 2 is OFF.

if(([b:X1]==OFF)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=6;} //stores 6 into D10 if lines 2 and 3 are ON and line 1 is OFF.

if(([b:X1]==ON)&&([b:X2]==ON)&&([b:X3]==ON))
{[w:D10]=7;} //stores 7 into D10 if lines 1, 2 and 3 are ON.

if ([b:X0]==ON) //if all lines stop turns ON

{
rst([b:X1]); //turns OFF line 1.
rst([b:X2]); //turns OFF line 2.
rst([b:X3]); //turns OFF line 3.
rst([b:X0]); //turns OFF all lines stop.
}

7 - 20 7 - 20
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.4.3 Password input screen with time limit function

(1) Operation
The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password
is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared.

Screen Image Part Operation Definition

Screen with Manager key (base screen 3)

Screen change Returns in 10 seconds

Manager button : Used to shift to the password input screen

(base screen 4).
Password input : Password entered with 1 to 0 keys
appears.
1 to 0 keys : Used to enter a value.
Clear key : Used to clear the value entered.
Confirm key : Used to confirm the value entered.

Password match

Manager screen (base screen 5) appears.

(2) Monitor screen settings

Part Name Object Type Setting Item Setting

Manager button Touch key function Operation setting Switching to base screen 4
Password input Numerical input function Monitor device D10
1 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0031H]
2 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0032H]
3 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0033H]
4 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0034H]
5 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0035H]
6 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0036H]
7 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0037H]
8 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0038H]
9 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0039H]
0 key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0030H]
Clear key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [0088H]
Confirm key Touch key function Operation setting Key code [000DH]

7 - 21 7 - 21
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(3) Program example

Item Description
Data
16-bit, signed BIN
format
Trigger
Any time
type

if([b:GS1.01]==ON){ //only when the password input screen has appeared

[w:TMP0001]=[w:GS7]; //substitutes GS7 into TMP0001.
}

if([w:D10]==3238){ //when the correct password is entered

[w:D0]=5; //switches to the manager screen (base screen 5).
Script
[w:D10]=0; //clears the password.
}

if([w:GS7]-[w:TMP0001]>=10){ //if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password input screen had appeared
[w:D0]=3; //returns to the screen with manager button (base screen 3).
}

POINT
This program example uses GOT special registers (GS).
The GOT special registers (GS) store the GOT's internal information,
communication states, script error information and others.
A wide variety of operations can be achieved by making proper connections of the
GOT special registers (GS) with the script functions.
Refer to Section 4.5 for details of the GOT special registers (GS).

7 - 22 7 - 22
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.5 Troubleshooting
The script functions do not provide error indications and so on caused by errors.
They stop the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions
from stopping.
Hence, refer to the following description and debug each script without fail.

7.5.1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger

Since a script is like the C language, slight corrections made to it allows simulation on
the general C language compiler or debugger (e.g. Microsoft Visual C++).
R

This function is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses many control
statements.
Use the following procedure to perform simulation on the general C language compiler
or debugger.
Changing file extension 1) Change the script file (extension ".txt") created
for the GOT into a C language source file
text1. txt text1. c (extension ".c").

Additional description of main and include 2) Open the C language source file on the
Additional #include<stdio.h> commercially available text editor and crate a
description frame with "main(){}". Also, describe
Additional main(){
description "#include<stdio.h>" at the beginning.
[w:TMP0001]=0;
while([w:TMP0000]<[w:D100]){
if(!(([w:TMP0000]-1900)%4)){
[w:TMP0001]=[w:TMP0001]+1;
...... (Omitted) ......
[w:TMP0010]=[w:TMP0002]+[w:TMP0003]
+[w:TMP0004]-1;
[w:D200] = [w:TMP0010]%7;
Additional }
description

Changing device (variable) describing method 3) Change the device (variable) describing method
#include<stdio.h> for script function into that for C language.
main(){ When changing the variables for script function
into those for C language, changing them in the
Description wTMP0001 =0;
change following definitions enables smooth restoration
Description while( wTMP0000 < wD100 ){ to the GOT script.
change
Description if(!(( wTMP0000 -1900)%4)){
change
Description wTMP0001 = wTMP0001 +1; Definition 1 "[w:" "_w"
change
...... (Omitted) ...... Definition 2 "[b:" "_b"
Description wTMP0010 = wTMP0002 + wTMP0003 Definition 3 "]" "_ _"
change
Description + wTMP0004 -1;
change Using the batch replacement function of the
Description wD200 = wTMP0010 %7; commercially available text editor will be
change
} convenient to make changes.

(To the next page)

7 - 23 7 - 23
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(From the preceding page)

Variable definition (auto variable declaration) 4) In the C language, the variables used must be
Description #include<stdio.h> defined beforehand.
change As only one data format may be selected for one
void main(void){
script in the script function, the variable types of
Addition unsigned short wTMP0000 ;
the C language must all be the same.
Addition unsigned short wTMP0001 ; Being conscious of the script data format, assign
Addition unsigned short wTMP0002 ; the variables as indicated below.
Addition unsigned short wD100 ; Script Data Format Variable Type

...... ...... 16-bit, signed BIN short

(Omitted)
16-bit, unsigned BIN unsigned short
wTMP0001 =0;
32-bit, signed BIN long
while( wTMP0000 < wD100 ){ 32-bit, unsigned BIN unsigned long
if(!(( wTMP0000 -1900)%4)){ 32-bit real number float
wTMP0001 = wTMP0001 +1; 32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD
...... (Omitted) ...... : Selecting "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data
format disables simulation on the general C language
wTMP0010 = wTMP0002 + wTMP0003
compiler or debugger.
+ wTMP0004 -1;
wD200 = wTMP0010 %7;
}

Execution of simulation 5) Perform simulation on the general C language

compiler or debugger.
(The example shown on the left uses Microsoft R

Developer Studio.)
You can utilize the step run, variable watch and
other functions available specifically from the
debugger.

On completion of debugging, reverse the steps

1) to 4) to restore the GOT script file.

POINT
• Choosing "32-bit BCD/16-bit BCD" as the script data format disables simulation
on the general C language compiler or debugger.
• Designed for use with only the script functions, the set, rst, alt, bmov and fmov
statements disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.
Use substitution of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement.
• When the system define (ON, OFF description) of the GOT is used unchanged,
the description of the define must be added to the C language source file.
• A substitution delay which occurs at the time of script execution on the GOT does
not occur during simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger.
Hence, take the occurrence of a substitution delay into consideration when
performing simulation.
• By applying the above, a new program created in C language and then debugged
may also be used as a GOT script.

7 - 24 7 - 24
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

7.5.2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT

(1) Error checking method

The error information of the script functions is stored into the GOT special
registers (GS).
Check the stored information using the system monitor function and various
object functions (numerical display, lamp indication and others) of the GOT.
The GOT special registers (GS) have the following types of script function-related
items.

Address Item Name Description

Stores the information which indicates error occurrence.
GS14.00: Turns ON at error occurrence.
GS14.07: Turns ON at BCD error occurrence.
GS14 Script common information (read only)
GS14.08: Turns ON at zero division error occurrence.
GS14.12: Turns ON at communication error occurrence (including access to out-
of-range device).
Stores the pointer value (16 to 46) which indicates the address where the script
error data (GS16 to 47) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time error data is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated below.
"-1" "16" "18" "20" ..... "46" "16"
GS15 Script error pointer
The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data (GS16 to 47) as
indicated below.
Example 1) When GS15 is 16, error data is stored into GS16, 17.
Example 2) When GS15 is 46, error data is stored into GS46, 47.
Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due order,
starting from the higher addresses of the storage area.
GS16 to 47 Script error data When an error occurs, a script number and error code are stored on a 2-word
basis as a history.
Note that if 15 or more errors occur, the upper addresses are overwritten in order.
Stores the pointer value (49 to 79) which indicates the address where a script
execution number (GS49 to 79) is stored. (Default: -1)
Every time an execution number is stored, the pointer value changes as indicated
below.
GS48 Script execution pointer "-1" "49" "50" "51" ..... "79" "49"
The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number (GS49 to
79) as indicated below.
Example 1) When GS48 is 49, the execution number is stored into GS49.
Example 2) When GS48 is 79, the execution number is stored into GS79.
GS49 to 79 Script execution number Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history.
GS384 Script common information (write only) Turning ON GS384.0 clears the script error data (GS16 to 47).

7 - 25 7 - 25
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

Address Item Name Description

Set the monitor time of one script in seconds.
If a script does not end the preset time after its start, script processing is stopped.
(Error code: 15)
The initial setting of "0" is processed as 10 seconds.

Setting Example Monitor Time

GS385 Script monitor time
0 (default) 10 seconds
1 1 second
10 10 seconds
11 11 seconds

Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following
conditions is enabled.
• The screen script function is used.
• The execution condition (trigger type) selected is "Rise/Fall".
• Switching to the screen having scripts takes place.

Bit Value of
GS386 Screen script initial operation Setting Example Trigger Type Initial Operation
Trigger
Bit OFF to ON ON
0 Performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF
Bit OFF to ON ON
Other than 0 Not performed
Bit ON to OFF OFF

POINT
• Refer to Section 4.5 for details of the GOT special registers (GS).
• For details of the system monitor function, refer to the GOT-A900 Series
Operating Manual (GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Compatible
Extended • Option Functions).

7 - 26 7 - 26
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

(2) Error code list

Error Code Error Definition Corrective Action
Initialization of project script functions • Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts.
1
failed. • Reduce the number of project script functions to be executed.
Initialization of screen script functions • Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and base screens.
2
(base) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (base) to be executed.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and superimpose
Initialization of screen script functions screens.
3
(superimpose window) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (superimpose window) to be
executed.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window
Initialization of screen script functions screens 1.
4
(overlap window 1) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (overlap window 1) to be
executed.
• Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window
Initialization of screen script functions screens 2.
5
(overlap window 2) failed. • Reduce the number of screen script functions (overlap window 2) to be
executed.
The operation result is a value outside
• Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the data range
6 the usable data range determined by
of the corresponding script, and correct the script.
the data format of the script.
The number of scripts executed
• Change the number of scripts to be executed in one project to 256 or less.
7 exceeded the limit. Hence, there were
• Change the number of scripts to be executed on one screen to 256 or less.
scripts that were not executed.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was
• Check whether the device you want to monitor is correct.
selected as the script data format, the
8 • Review the processing for the device which could not be handled as BCD, and
monitor device value could not be
correct the script and sequence program.
handled as BCD.
When "16-bit BCD" or "32-bit BCD" was
selected as the script data format, the • Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the BCD data
9
operation result was brought outside the range.
BCD data range.
The numerator was divided by the • Review the factor which caused zero division in the corresponding script, and
10
denominator of 0. correct the script.
11 Write to a device failed. • Review the device description of the corresponding script.
Securing an internal area for device
12 • Reduce the number write device points in the corresponding script.
write failed.
The while statement has the description
13 of a device other than a temporary • Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary device area.
work.
An expression was too complicated to
14 • Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding script.
process.
A script did not end within the script • Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless loop.
15
monitor time. • Increase the value of script monitor time (GS385).

7 - 27 7 - 27
7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
MELSOFT

MEMO

7 - 28 7 - 28
 APPENDICES
MELSOFT

APPENDICES

Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data

When using the monitor screen data for GOT800 as that for GOT900, the data must be
converted using the GT Converter.
This section outlines the operation to be performed to convert the monitor screen data
for GOT800.
For details of the GT Converter, refer to the help function of the GT Converter.

POINT
• By converting the monitor screen data for GOT800 with the GT Converter, it can be used as the monitor
screen data for GOT900 without any restrictions.
Also, the data capacity of the data converted into the monitor screen data for GOT900 is about 30% less
than that of the monitor screen data for GOT800.
• When using the GOT data of earlier than the GOT800 as the monitor screen data for GOT900, perform the
following operation after converting it into the GOT data for GOT800 series using the drawing software for
GOT800 series 1 contained in GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5.
For the converting operation, refer to the SW3NIW-A8GOTP Drawing Setting Software Package
Operating Manual (Monitor Screen Creation Manual).
1 Install the software by executing "setup.exe"in the "GOT800" folder on the CD-ROM.

START

Start the GT Converter.

Select the monitor screen data for GOT800. Refer to (2).

Convert it to the monitor screen data for GOT900 and store the new data. Refer to (3).

APP
Š ’ â Start
g £ {ƒƒ
^ ƒ“theð
‚ NGT
ŠDesigner
ƒƒ bƒ ƒ
N · ‚ are and edit the new data.
‚ é Refer to (4).

END

App - 1 App - 1
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(1) Screen make-up of GT Converter

Menu bar

Tool bar

Main window

(2) Selecting the data to be converted

(a) Perform either of the following operations.
• Click the icon on the tool bar.
• Select the [Project] - [Open] menu.

(b) As the [Open] dialog box appears, select the file type.
• A8GOT file: Screen data for GOT800 series
• PRO file: "GP-PRO/PBIII (DOS version)" made by Digital
• PRW file: "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" made by
Digital
: "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)" made by Digital
Select the file type.

POINT
The data of the Digital package that may be converted is only the data created by "GP-PRO/PBIII (DOS
version)", "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows 95 (Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" and "GP-PRO/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)".

(c) Select the data to be converted and click the [Open] button.
APP
1) Select the driver and folder which store
the data to be converted.

2) Select the file name of the data to be

converted.

…Switches the "Look in" indication to the folder one position above the
current one.
…Lists the "Look in" indication in terms of the folder names and data
names only.
…Lists further details of the "Look in" indication.

App - 2 App - 2
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(d) The data selected is specified as a conversion source file and appears in the
main window.

(3) Converting to the monitor screen data for GOT900

(a) Perform either of the following operations.
• Click the icon on the tool bar.
• Select the [Start conversion] menu.

(b) In the main window, specify the folder, which will store new data.
Enter the folder directly into "Save folder", or perform the following operation
to specify it.
2) Select the folder.

1) Select the drive.

(c) Clicking the [OK] button converts the selected data to GOT900 series data.
On completion of the conversion operation, the conversion completion
message appears.
The new data is stored into the specified folder.

POINTS
When the data of the Digital package is converted, some functions are not converted.
Re-set the unconverted functions using the GT Designer.
Also use the GT Designer for registration to the overlap screen, parts and comments

App - 3 App - 3
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(4) Starting the GT Designer

Start the GT Designer from the GT Converter.
(a) Select the [Project] - [Option] - [Folder of GT Designer] menu.

(b) The [Setting folder of GT Designer] dialog box appears.

Since the execution file (wgot32.exe) of the GT Designer exists in the
following folder, select it and click the [Open] button.

Drive name: \Installation destination folder\GT desig\wgot32.exe

…Switches the "Look in" indication to the folder one position above the
current one.
…Lists the "Look in" indication in terms of the folder names and data
names only.
…Lists further details of the "Look in" indication.

(c) Perform either of the following operations.

• Click the on the tool bar.
• Select the [Project] - [Execute GT Designer] menu.

(d) The [Execute GT Designer] confirmation dialog box appears.

Click the [Yes] or [No] button.
[Yes] button … Ends the GT Converter and starts the GT Designer.
[No] button … Ends the GT Converter.
(The GT Designer does not start.)

App - 4 App - 4
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Appendix2 Display Speed of Object (Reference Value)

The display speeds (reference values) of each object are as listed below.
The actual display speeds depend on the number of objects set on a screen, the
shape of a figure drawn, and the frequencies of transient transmission.

Numeri Parts Lamp Trend Line Touch key

ASCII Comment User Level
cal display display graph graph (Bit
display displayBit alarm display
display (Bit) (Bit) display display momentary)
Object name 240×120
240×120
Drawing 6 digits, 10 48×48 48×48 dots, 160×160
6 digits —— dots, ——
condition 16 bit characters dots dots 8 lines, dots
8 lines
10 points
Sequential device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
Bus connection
Random device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15

CPU direct Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.2
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.2

Computer link Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.2 0.8 0.2 0.3
Sequential
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
Cyclic
Random
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
MELSECNET device
/10 connection Sequential
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
QnA Transient
CPU Random
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
ACPU CC-Link
Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection
(Remote
Random device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device station)
Sequential
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
Cyclic
CC-Link Random
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection device
Display
(Intelligent Sequential
speed 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device station) device
(Unit : s) Transient
Random
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
Ethernet Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.4
Sequential device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15
Bus connection
Random device 0.1 0.15 0.15 0.1 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.35 0.1 0.15

CPU direct Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.2
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.35 0.5 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.2

Computer link Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.3 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.2 0.7 0.2 0.3
Sequential
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
device
QCPU Cyclic
Random
0.1 0.1 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.15 0.4 0.1 0.15
MELSECNET device
/10 connection Sequential
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
Transient
Random
0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.6 0.5 2.0 0.4 0.4
device
CC-Link Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection
(Remote device Random device 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
station)

App - 5 App - 5
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Numeri Parts Lamp Trend Line Touch key

ASCII Comment User Level
cal display display graph graph (Bit
display displayBit alarm display
display (Bit) (Bit) display display momentary)
Object name 240×120
240×120
Drawing 6 digits, 10 48×48 48×48 dots, 160×160
6 digits —— dots, ——
condition 16 bit characters dots dots 8 lines, dots
8 lines
10 points
Sequential
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
device
Cyclic
CC-Link Random
0.2 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.3 0.25 0.3 0.2 0.25
connection device
(Intelligent Sequential
QCPU 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device station) device
Transient
Random
0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.35 0.3 1.0 0.4 0.4
device
Ethernet Sequential device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.3
connection Random device 0.2 0.2 0.25 0.5 0.25 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.2 0.4

Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
CPU direct
FXCPU
connection
Random device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.4 0.5 1.20 0.22 1.06

Sequential device 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.30 0.30 0.25 0.60 0.26 0.35
Programmable
Display controller by Omron
Random device 0.20 0.20 0.20 0.50 0.36 0.30 0.30 0.80 0.27 0.35
speed
(Unit : s)
Sequential device 0.21 0.30 0.35 0.70 0.35 0.35 0.27 0.8 0.2 0.3
Programmable
controller by Yasukawa
Random device 1.09 0.68 2.34 10.40 2.42 2.20 0.53 5.72 0.46 2.50

Programmable
controller by Allen- Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
Bradley
Programmable
Sequential device 0.3 0.5 0.6 0.5 0.7 0.5 0.5 1.0 0.5 0.5
controller by SHARP
Programmable
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.5 0.9 0.4 0.4
controller by Toshiba
Programmable
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.4 0.7 0.4 0.4 0.5 1.2 0.3 0.4
controller by SIEMENS
Programmable
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.5 0.4 0.4 0.3 0.8 0.3 0.3
controller by Hitachi
Matsushita Electric
Sequential device 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.8 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.8 0.3 0.3
Works

App - 6 App - 6
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Appendix3 List of Key Code

(1) List of key code for numerical and ASCII input

Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H) Key Key code (H)
SP 0020 @ 0040 ` 0060 0080 2
! 0021 A 0041 a 0061 0081 2
" 0022 B 0042 b 0062 0082
# 0023 C 0043 c 0063 0083
$ 0024 D 0044 d 0064 (Clear) 0088
% 0025 E 0045 e 0065
& 0026 F 0046 f 0066
, 0027 G 0047 g 0067
( 0028 H 0048 h 0068
) 0029 I 0049 i 0069
* 002A J 004A j 006A
+ 002B K 004B k 006B
, 002C L 004C l 006C
- 002D M 004D m 006D
. 002E 1 N 004E n 006E
/ 002F O 004F o 006F
0 0030 P 0050 p 0070
1 0031 Q 0051 q 0071
2 0032 R 0052 r 0072
3 0033 S 0053 s 0073
4 0034 T 0054 t 0074
5 0035 U 0055 u 0075
6 0036 V 0056 v 0076
7 0037 W 0057 w 0077
8 0038 X 0058 x 0078
9 0039 Y 0059 y 0079
: 003A Z 005A z 007A
; 003B [ 005B { 007B
< 003C \ 005C | 007C
= 003D ] 005D } 007D
> 003E ^ 005E ~ 007E
? 003F _ 005F ¦ 007F
1: Cannot be set only when the numerical input function is used on the GOT-F900 series.
2: Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

App - 7 App - 7
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(2) List of key code for objects

(a) Key code for numerical input
Key code (H) Application
0008 Delete the bottom digit and shift to the right by one digit
000D Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move cursor
001B Delete cursor
002D “-”
002E “.”
0030 to 0046 Input value
0080 Move cursor to the right
0081 Move cursor to the left
0082 Move cursor upward
0083 Move cursor downward
0088 Delete value being input

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

(b) Key code for ASCII input

Key code (H) Application
0008 Erases the rightmost character and shifts the whole one character to the right.
000D Write to the destination device (Execute)/Move cursor
001B Delete cursor
ASCII code Input characters
0080 Move cursor to the right
0081 Move cursor to the left
0082 Move cursor upward
0083 Move cursor downward
0088 Delete value being input

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

(c) Key code for data list display function

Key code (H) Application
00F2 Scroll up by one line
00F3 Scroll down by one line

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

App - 8 App - 8
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(d) Key code for alarm list display function

Key code (H) Application
00F2 Scroll up by one line
00F3 Scroll down by one line
FFB0 Show cursor
FFB1 Hide cursor
FFB2 Move cursor upward
FFB3 Move cursor downward
FFB8 Display detail information
FFBC Display ladder

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used.

(e) Key code for alarm history function

Key code (H) Application
FFB0 Show cursor
FFB1 Hide cursor
FFB2 Move cursor upward
FFB3 Move cursor downward
FFB4 Display date/time of selected data
FFB5 Display date/time of all data
FFB6 Delete selected alarm contents on display
FFB7 Delete all alarm contents on display
FFB8 Display detail information
FFB9 Reset designated device
When using GOT-A900 series: Save alarm contents to PC card
FFBB
When using GOT-F900 series: Reset designated device
FFBC Display ladder

Cannot be set when the GOT-F900 series is used

FFB6 and FFB7 are compatible with the OS version 3.0 and later of the GOT-F900 series.

App - 9 App - 9
 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 496 512 528 544 560 576 592 608 624 640 656 672 688 704 720 736 752 768 784 799
0

16

App - 10
32

48

64
APPENDICES

80

96

112

128

144
Appendix4 Drawing Sheet

160

176

192

208

224

240

256

272

288

304

320

336

352

368

384
For A960GOT
400

416

432

448

464

479
(1) For A985GOT/A975GOT/A970GOT/A960GOT

For A975GOT/A970GOT
480

496

512

528

544

560

576

592
For A985GOT
599

App - 10
MELSOFT
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

App - 11 App - 11
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(2) For A95 GOT

0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 319
0

16

32

48

64

80

96

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

239

(3) For A956WGOT

0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480
0

16

32

48

64

80

96

112

128

144

160

176

192

208

224

234

App - 12 App - 12
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

App - 13 App - 13
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(4) For F940GOT

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 319
0

20

40

60

80

100

120

140

160

180

200

220

239

(5) For F930GOT

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 239
0

20

40

60

79

(6) For F920GOT

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 127
0

20

40

60
63

There are no touch keys.

App - 14 App - 14
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

App - 15 App - 15
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function (Reference Value)

During printing, it is recommended that a monitor screen with fewer object functions is
displayed.
When a screen with object functions (e.g. value display function) showing many
variations is displayed on the GOT, the GOT gives priority to display of object
functions. Therefore, the printouts take longer.
The following table shows the print out time (reference value) using the hard copy
function while the monitor screen with value display function for 50 points is displayed.
Type of printer to be used 1
Printer applicable for Printer applicable for Printer applicable for PCL
GOT main unit Connection
ESC/P command ESC/P command (black command
(16 colors) and white)
CPU direct connection 1sec.40min. 40.9min. 31.3min.
Bus connection 1sec.39min. 40.9min. 30.9min.
A985GOT Computer link 1sec.39min. 39.1min. 30.6min.
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1sec.42min. 42.4min. 32.2min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1sec.37min. 40.1min. 33.5min.
CPU direct connection 1sec.08min. 33.4min. 27.9min.
Bus connection 1sec.09min. 31.0min. 27.0min.
A975GOT Computer link 1sec.07min. 33.4min. 26.7min.
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1sec.09min. 31.1min. 28.2min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1sec.09min. 31.5min. 28.0min.
CPU direct connection 1sec.10min. 32.3min. 27.1min.
Bus connection 1sec.08min. 30.4min. 28.1min.
A970GOT Computer link 1sec.07min. 33.1min. 26.8min.
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 1sec.08min. 30.4min. 28.1min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 1sec.08min. 33.5min. 28.0min.
CPU direct connection 30.5min. 20.3min. 22.9min.
Bus connection 30.3min. 21.2min. 23.0min.
A95 GOT-
Computer link 30.7min. 21.5min. 22.8min.
SBA/SBD
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 31.5min. 19.5min. 22.5min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 33.6min. 19.3min. 23.0min.
CPU direct connection 19.3min. 20.6min. 23.7min.
Bus connection 20.9min. 20.9min. 23.2min.
A95 GOT-
Computer link 19.1min. 20.2min. 23.1min.
LBA/LBD
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 22.1min. 21.9min. 22.6min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 21.6min. 19.8min. 23.0min.
CPU direct connection 37.2min. 22.8min. 22.7min.
Bus connection 36.0min. 23.1min. 22.5min.
A956WGOT Computer link 36.9min. 23.1min. 22.8min.
MELSECNET connection (data link system) 35.7min. 23.1min. 23.1min.
MELSECNET connection (network system) 36.7min. 23.1min. 22.5min.

*1 Either of the following printers was used to measure printing time.

• ESC/P command-ready printer: Canon BJC-600J
• PCL command-ready printer: HEWLETT PACKARD Laser Jet6L

App - 16 App - 16
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area

(Memory Map)
The GOT's internal memory has 1152k bytes of space for the user area (area where
screen data can be stored).
When the expanded or option functions are used in the GOT, the corresponding
extended functions OSs must be installed in the GOT.
Since the extended functions OSs are stored in the user area, the free space of the
user area changes with the number of OSs installed as indicated below.
Number of Extended functions OSs 1 Memory Space Used [k bytes] User Area Free Space [k bytes] 2
0 0 1152
1 256 896
2 384 768
3 640 512
4 768 384
5 1024 128
6 1152 0

1 The MELSEC-QnA ladder monitor function, MELSEC-Q ladder monitor function, MELSEC-A list editor
function, Gateway function and Servo amplifier monitor function are handled as two extended functions
OSs, respectively.
2 The above user area spaces assume that there are no additional memory boards. Therefore, increase the
memory as required.
Since the A95 GOT- BD-M3 has the built-in memory of 3200k bytes, the free space is the above value
plus 2048k bytes.

App - 17 App - 17
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Appendix7 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR

The following table indicates the colors and color numbers available when colors are
XORed in the drawing mode using the parts display function or like.

(1) GOT having 256 display colors

When XORing any colors other than the following, check them in the preview of
GT Designer.
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow
3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252 1 163 161 23 21 183 181 110
Red Red Purple Black Blue Yellow White Green Cyan
224 224 227 0 3 252 255 28 31 226 64 66 244 246 84 86 141
Purple Purple Red Blue Black White Yellow Cyan Green
227 227 224 3 0 255 252 31 28 225 67 65 247 245 87 85 142
Green Green Cyan Yellow White Black Blue Red Purple
28 28 31 252 255 0 3 224 227 30 188 190 8 10 168 170 113
Cyan Cyan Green White Yellow Blue Black Purple Red
31 31 28 255 252 3 0 227 224 29 191 189 11 7 171 169 114
Yellow Yellow White Green Cyan Red Purple Black Blue
252 252 255 28 31 224 227 0 3 254 92 94 232 234 72 74 145
White White Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Black
255 255 252 31 28 227 224 3 0 253 95 93 235 233 75 73 146
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
blue blue purple red cyan green white yellow
1 226 225 30 29 254 253 0 111
2 2 162 160 22 20 182 180
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
red red purple blue yellow white green cyan
163 64 67 188 191 92 95 0 205
160 160 162 2 180 182 20 22
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
purple purple red blue white yellow cyan green
161 66 65 190 189 94 93 0 207
162 162 160 2 182 180 22 20
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
green green cyan yellow white blue red purple
23 244 247 8 11 232 235 0 121
20 20 22 180 182 2 160 162
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
cyan cyan green white yellow blue purple red
21 246 245 10 7 234 233 0 123
22 22 20 182 180 2 162 160
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
yellow yellow white green cyan red purple blue
183 84 87 168 171 72 75 0 217
180 180 182 20 22 160 162 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black
white white yellow cyan green purple red blue
181 86 85 170 169 74 73 0 219
182 182 180 22 20 162 160 2
Dark Dark
Black
black black
110 141 142 113 114 145 146 111 205 207 121 123 217 219 0
109 109

App - 18 App - 18
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(2) GOT having 16 display colors

Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
blue red purple green cyan yellow white black
0 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
2 160 162 20 22 180 182 109
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow
purple red cyan green white yellow black blue
3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252
162 160 22 20 182 180 109 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Red Red Black Purple Blue Yellow White Green Cyan
purple blue yellow white green cyan black red
224 224 0 227 3 252 255 28 31
162 2 180 182 20 22 109 160
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Purple Purple Black Red Blue White Yellow Cyan Green
red blue white yellow cyan green black purple
227 227 0 224 3 255 252 31 28
160 2 182 180 22 20 109 162
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Green Green Black Cyan Yellow White Blue Red Purple
cyan yellow white blue red purple black green
28 28 0 31 252 255 3 224 227
22 180 182 2 160 162 109 20
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Cyan Cyan Black Green White Yellow Blue Purple Red
green white yellow blue purple red black cyan
31 31 0 28 255 252 3 227 224
20 182 180 2 162 160 109 22
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Yellow Yellow Black White Green Cyan Red Purple Blue
white green cyan red purple blue black yellow
252 252 0 255 28 31 224 227 3
182 20 22 160 162 2 109 180
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
White White Black Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue
yellow cyan green purple red blue black white
255 255 0 252 31 28 227 224 3
180 22 20 162 160 2 109 182
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow Blue
blue blue black blue red purple green cyan yellow white
227 224 31 28 255 252 3
2 2 109 2 160 162 20 22 180 182
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Purple Blue Yellow White Green Cyan Black Red
red red black purple blue yellow white green cyan
227 3 252 255 28 31 0 224
160 160 109 162 2 180 182 20 22
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Red Blue White Yellow Cyan Green Black Purple
purple purple black red blue white yellow cyan green
224 3 255 252 31 28 0 227
162 162 109 160 2 182 180 22 20
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Cyan Yellow White Blue Red Purple Black Green
green green black cyan yellow white blue red purple
31 252 255 3 224 227 0 28
20 20 109 22 180 182 2 160 162
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Green White Yellow Blue Purple Red Black Cyan
cyan cyan black green white yellow blue purple red
28 255 252 3 227 224 0 31
22 22 109 20 182 180 2 162 160
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
White Green Cyan Red Purple Blue Black Yellow
yellow yellow black white green cyan red purple blue
255 28 31 224 227 3 0 252
180 180 109 182 20 22 160 162 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Black White
white white black yellow cyan green purple red blue
252 31 28 227 224 3 0 255
182 182 109 180 22 20 162 160 2
Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark
Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White Black
black black blue red purple green cyan yellow white
3 224 227 28 31 252 255 0
109 109 2 160 162 20 22 180 182

App - 19 App - 19
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(3) GOT having 8 display colors

Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255
Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White
0 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255

Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow

3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252
Red Red Purple Black Blue Yellow White Green Cyan
224 224 227 0 3 252 255 28 31
Purple Purple Red Blue Black White Yellow Cyan Green
227 227 224 3 0 255 252 31 28
Green Green Cyan Yellow White Black Blue Red Purple
28 28 31 252 255 0 3 224 227
Cyan Cyan Green White Yellow Blue Black Purple Red
31 31 28 255 252 3 0 227 224
Yellow Yellow White Green Cyan Red Purple Black Blue
252 252 255 28 31 224 227 0 3
White White Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Black
255 255 252 31 28 227 224 3 0

App - 20 App - 20
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Appendix8 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5 / GT Designer

Version5
The following tables indicate the functions added to up to version 33K of GT Works
Version5/GT Designer Version5.
The symbols in each table have the following meanings.
Abbreviation for GT Works Allowed for use on the GOT-F900
SW# Version • GT Designer Version Allowed for use
series only
Abbreviation for GT Works Allowed for use on the GOT-A900
A to Z Version • GT Designer Version Not allowed for use
version name series only

(1) GOT added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Corresponding Model

26C
33K
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

A985GOT
F940GOT
F930GOT(F930GOT-BWD)
A95 GOT
A970GOT-LBA/LBD
A951GOT-Q
A95 GOT-TBD
A950 handy GOT
A985GOT-V
F940GOT-RH
A956WGOT
GT SoftGOT
F940WGOT
F920GOT, F930GOT (F930GOT-BWD-K-E)

(2) GOT unit functions added (extended, option and other functions)
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
GOT Unit
Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of brightness
Utility adjustment function
Addition of OS copy function
PC card Supporting of Fsh PC cards 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Extension of monitoring device
range when the microcomputer
is connected
Addition of SB and SW to
Extension of monitor devices when the
ACPU is connected
monitoring
Addition of SS, SC, S, SB, SN
device range and SW to monitor devices when
the QnACPU is connected
Addition of TS and CS to
monitor devices when the
ACPU/FXCPU is connected
Addition of the GOT special
register (GS) to the GOT's
internal devices
The GOT internal devices (GD,
GB) have been increased from
1023 to 16383
Used device "CC-Link G4 station number", "base
screen information", "gateway
common control", "gateway
information, common information 1"
and "GT SoftGOT common
information" have been added to
the GOT special registers (GS)
Supports the monitoring of
QnACPU 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Supports the monitoring of QCPU
Ladder 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
monitor Supports monitoring of QCPU on
A956WGOT 1 1 1 1 1
Supports multi PLC system and
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU as the
monitor targets of the QCPU 1 1 1 1 1

App - 21 App - 21
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

GOT Unit Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Ladder Addition of the factor

monitor search/touch search function to
Q ladder monitor
Supports the monitoring of
QCPU modules
Special
module Supports multi PLC system and
monitor Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU as the
monitor targets of the QCPU
Supports the monitoring of QD75M
Network Supports the monitoring of QCPU
monitor
Addition of the function which
List editor displays/edits in the list mode
the sequence program read
from the ACPU
Base screen The maximum number of screens
increased from 1024 to 4096
Supports multi PLC system and
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU as the
System monitor targets of the QCPU
monitor Supports the monitoring Motion
Controller CPU (expect
Q172CPU, Q173CPU)
Addition of the function that
Motion performs the servo
monitor monitor/parameter setting of the
motion controller CPU
(Q172CPU, Q173CPU)
Addition of the function that
Servo performs various monitor
amplifier functions, parameter setting
monitor changes, test operation, etc. for
the connected servo amplifiers
Addition of the function that can
monitor each controller with one
GOT/personal computer 2 2
Addition of the function that can
Gateway access the PC card of the GOT
functions from the personal computer 2 2
Addition of the function that sends
mail from the GOT to the
personal computer/cellular phone 2 2
at alarm occurrence
1 Unusable with the A95 GOT
2 Use the Ethernet communication module (A9GT-J71E71-T) whose hardware version is E or later.
(3) Connection forms added
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Connection Form
26C
33K
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Bus connection to CPU

Connection with QCPU supported
Connection with multiple PLC system
Supports connection with MELSEC-Q series
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Supports connection with the process CPU
(Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU)
Connection with Motion controller CPU
(Q172CPU, Q173CPU)
Direct connection to CPU
Connection with QnACPU supported
Connection with QCPU supported
Connection with multiple PLC system
Supports connection with MELSEC-Q series
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Supports connection with the process CPU
(Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU)
Transparent function supported
Connection with FXCPU (FX(2N)-10GM/20GM
series) supported
Supports connection with the FX-1NC
Connection with Motion controller CPU
(Q172CPU, Q173CPU)

App - 22 App - 22
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Connection Form

26C
33K
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Computer link connection

Connection with QCPU supported
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
Connection with multiple PLC system
Supports connection with MELSEC-Q series
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Supports connection with the process CPU
(Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU)
Transmission speed change
(19200bps/38400bps) supported for
connection of QC24N
Supports connection with the motion
controller CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU)
CC-Link connection
Q-compatible intelligent device station
supported
Connection with multiple PLC system
Supports connection with MELSEC-Q series
Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU
Supports connection with the process CPU
(Q12PHCPU, Q25PHCPU)
Supports CC-Link master/local connection via
G4-S3
Supports connection with the motion controller
CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU) (With the
exception of connection with the intelligent
device station)
Omron PLC connection
Connection with C200H/HS/HX/HG/HE,
CQM1, C1000H, C2000H, CV1000 supported
Connection with CV500, CV2000, CVM1-
CPU01/11/21 supported
Connection with CS1 supported
Supports connection with C200H
Supports connection with the CJ1
Yaskawa Electric PLC connection
Connection with GL60S/60H/70H/120/130
supported
Connection with CP-9200SH supported
Connection with CP-9300MS and MP-
920/930 supported
Connection with CP-9200(H) or PROGIC-8
supported
Supports connection with CP-9300MS (CP-
9300MC compatible)
Barcode connection
Allen-Bradley PLC connection
Connection with AB SLC500 supported
Connection with AB MicroLogix1000/1500
supported
Connection with AB MicroLogix1200
supported
Toshiba PLC connection
Connection with T3 and T3H supported
Connection with mode 13000 supported
Supports connection with the T2 series
SIEMENS PLC connection
Connection with SIMATIC S7-300 supported
Connection with SIMATIC S7-400 supported
Supports connection with SIMATIC S7-200
series
HITACHI PLC connection
Ethernet connection 2 3 3 3 3 3
Supports connection with the motion
controller CPU (Q172CPU, Q173CPU)
Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection
Inverter connection
1 Only F940WGOT compatible
2 Only GT SoftGOT compatible
3 When using the Ethernet communication module (A9GT-J71E71-T) whose hardware version is E or later, use GT Works Version 5 26C
or later or GT Designer Version 5 26C or later.
(The module cannot be used with GT Works Version 5 P to Y or GT Designer Version 5 P to Y.)

App - 23 App - 23
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(4) GT Designer functions added

(a) Added figure drawing functions
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Figure Drawn Description of Added Function

26C
33K
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of fill pattern and fill

Circle background color setting
function
Addition of fill pattern and fill
Rectangle background color setting
function
Addition of the function which
displays high-quality characters
Addition of the function which
Character
displays 6 8 dot characters
Addition of character decoration
"raised" setting function

(b) Object functions added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Object
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Function which performs write

to the PLC CPU when the
specified condition holds
Addition of the word device
value range as the observation
condition
Addition of the function which
specifies offset for the device
set for the condition (for screen-
Observe based observation only)
status The maximum number of set
conditions + operations
increased from 40 to 512
Addition of "BCD" to the data
format of the written value for
data SET operation when the
condition holds
Addition of the function which
copies the status observation
settings
Addition of the function which
sets undisplayed values
Line graph
Addition of the function which
displays a track
Addition of justification setting
ASCII display
function
Addition of justification setting
function
ASCII input
Addition of input triqqer device
setting function
Addition of the function which
displays values with decimal
points after automatic
adjustment made with the the
Numerical
object function
display
Addition of the function which can
change display attributes
according to the specified device
status (ON/OFF, device value)
Addition of input triqqer device
setting function
Addition of the function which
Numerical
displays values with decimal
input
points after automatic
adjustment made with the the
object function

App - 24 App - 24
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(b) Object functions added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Object
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function which

allows the panel meter shape to
Panel meter be selected
Addition of panel color
specifying function
Connect the barcode reader to
the GOT. Add the function that
Barcode writes the data read with a
barcode reader into the PLC
CPU.
Addition of the function which
Statistics
sets the display direction in a
display
Rectangle graph chart
Addition of the function which
uses character strings created
by the comment function in
character string display
Addition of the touch key
(extended) function which
displays the brightness
adjustment screen of the GOT
Addition of the function which
changes the comment of the
reference destination according
to the result of adding the
specified device (up to 2 points)
and fixed values in the function
which uses on the character
string display the character
string created with the comment
function.
Addition of initial value condition
setting
Addition of the function which
XORs, reverses and paints the
inside of a no-figure touch key
Addition of the touch key
Touch key (extended) function which
shows the list editing screen of
the ACPU
Addition of auto repeat function
Addition of the function which
specifies offset for the operation
target device
Addition of the function which
allows touch keys to be set as
free figures
Addition of the function which
can set quality characters for
ON, OFF and midway point in
double pressing
The basic conversion figures
from GOT800 are added as the
basic figures of group 2
Addition of the function that can
specify the station number
switching destination according
to the screen type (base/overlap
window 1, 2/superimpose)
Addition of the function that
keeps outputting the buzzer
while the touch key is pressed
at the output timing of the touch
key sound.

App - 25 App - 25
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Object
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the touch key

(motion monitor) function that
displays the motion monitor
function
Touch key Addition of the touch key (servo
amplifier monitor) function that
displays the servo amplifier
monitor screen
Addition of the function which
allows lamps to be set as free
figures
Addition of the function which
can change display attributes
Lamp display according to the specified
function device status (ON/OFF, device
value).
The basic conversion figures
from GOT800 are added as the
basic figures of group 2
Addition of the function which
outputs the screen image of the
F940GOT to a printer.
Addition of the function which
Hard copy alllows data to be saved on PC
card as JPEG format file
Addition of the function which
can provide 256-color mode
printer output
Addition of the Human sensor
detection signal
Addition of the I/O signal area
for external I/O equipment
Addition of the currently printed
report screen area
Addition of the report output signal
Addition of hard copy signal
System Allows selection of only the
information functions necessary for system
information
Addition of key window output
signal to system information 2
The following data are added to
system information.
• Used recipe number
• Superimposed screen
numbers 1, 2
• Input completion object ID
Addition of the function which
Operation allows an operation panel to be
panel connected for operation from
outside the GOT
Addition of the function which
External I/O transfers signals to/from outside
the GOT
Addition of the function which
Report
gathers and prints data per trigger
Addition of the function used to
set level device for security
setting
Addition of the function which
enables selection of whetger
message will be displayed or
not if error occurs at password
Password entry
Addition of the password used
to change the parameter setting
of the motion monitor function
Addition of the parameter
setting changing password of
the servo amplifier monitor
function
Addition of the function use to
Screen select whether screen switching
switching device is initialized or not at
power-on of GOT

App - 26 App - 26
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Object
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

The maximum number of

overlaps screens has been
changed from five to no
restriction.
Addition of the function which
further calls the screen which
uses the screen calling function
(hierarchical called screens)
Overlap Addition of window screens as
screen the screens to be called and the
screens which can use the
screen calling function
Addition of the screen which
allows overlap screen numbers
to be batch-changed
Addition of the screen which
displays overlap screens
hierarchically.
Addition of "Rise", "Fall", "ON
Trend graph Sampling" and "OFF Sampling"
triggers to the display conditions
Addition of the function which can
fix displayed parts (parts can be
overlapped) and the function
which can display the base
screen as a part
Addition of the function which
sets the starting number
Addition of the function which
Part display sets the preview number
function
Addition of the function which
edits the object size
Addition of the function which can
display window screens as parts
Addition of the function which can
change display attributes
according to the specified device
status (ON/OFF, device value)
Addition of the function which can
Part
change display attributes
movement
according to the specified device
display
status (ON/OFF, device value)
Addition of the function which
sets the starting number
Comment
function Addition of the function which
changes the display starting line
for multi-line comment.
Addition of the function which
Bar graph sets the display position of a
scale
Addition of the function which
gathers data stored in word
Scatter graph devices associated with the X
and Y axes and displays them
as a scatter graph
Addition of the function which
performs operation, such as
Time action
device write, at the specified
time of the day of the week
Addition of the function which
collects data in the specified
Sampling
cycle or under the bit condition
function
and displays them in a graph or
the like.
Increase of the maximum
monitor points that can be
observed
Bit device:
Alarm history
function 3072 points
Word device (16 bits):
1024 points
Word device (32 bits):
512 points

App - 27 App - 27
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Object
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function which

allows data to be saved on PC
card as CSV format file
Addition of the function which
sends the date and time,
comment and others as
Alarm history
electronic mail when the
function specified device turns on/off.
A function is added that
interrupt the file storage using
alarm history if an error is
detected in the alarm
information file to be stored.
Increase in number of device
points that can be set
Continuous: 8192 points
Random: 512 points
Alarm list
Addition of "most to least
recent" and "least to most
recent" as the orders of
displaying the alarm list
Addition of the setting which
does not create a recipe file
automatically (does not set
recipe device values) if the PC
card has no recipe file.
Addition of the function which
Recipe allows file reqister name to be
function specified with recipe device
Addition of the function which
allows recipe operation to be
copied
Addition of the function which
allows the user to set the recipe
file name
Addition of the function which
can control the GOT display
with the GOT side programs
(scripts)
Addition of the function which
automatically updates the path
of the script file in the project
data folder if the folder moves
Script
Addition of the function which
function
can use GOT internal devices
(GD, GB) for substitution
processing without substitution
delay.
Addition of the function that
updates the script data read to
GT Designer to the latest script
data.
Addition of the function which
sends various data, e.g. alarm
Time action
history data, recipe file and
function screen image, as electronic mail
(GT SoftGOT only)
Addition of the function which
displays video image on the
Video display
GOT by connection of the video
input interface unit
Addition of the function which
displays personal computer
RGB screen
screen on the GOT by
display connection of the RGB input
interface unit

App - 28 App - 28
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Object
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Function A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function that can

specify the station number
switching destination for the
station number change device
Station according to the screen type
(base/overlap window 1,
number 2/superimpose)
switching Addition of the touch key, status
monitoring and script functions to
the object corresponding to the
station number switching
function
Only A985GOT-V may be used.
(c) Other functions added
Edit and SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Setting Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Functions A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function which

sets display or non-display
according to whether an action
condition is filled or not.
Addition of serial
communication setting function
Addition of setup setting
function
Addition of menu call key setting
function
Addition of language setting
Sub-setting function
of project unit Addition of the function which
sets the cursor display position
and cursor input region table for
screen switching
Addition of the function which
allows specifying the screen
number used as user-original key
window
Addition of the function that sets
portrait in the display format of
the basic setting when
F930GOT is used
Addition of the function which
sets the cursor display position
and cursor input region table for
Screen-by- screen switching
screen Addition of the function which
sets whether display is provided
auxiliary or not depending on whether
setting operation condition is
established or not on screen-by-
screen basis, instead of project-
by-project basis.
Addition of initial display
position setting function for key
window
Addition of the function which
creates a user-original key
window to use it instead of the
standard key window.
Addition of the function which
displays the window size at
Key window initial position setting
Addition of the function which
allows you to select whether to
display or hide the input
enabled range shown for out of
range input
Addition of the function that
allows the key window to be
used on the F930GOT

App - 29 App - 29
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Edit and SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Setting Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Functions A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function which

can display different objects
classified by pages
Object list Addition of the function which
allows the device setting to be
changed by direct input from
inside the list
GPPW
Addition of the function which
device
can read and refer to the GPPW
comment device comment data as
reference another format data
function
"+" cursor Addition of the function which
automatically changes the
display cursor indication (shape) when
function a figure is drawn
Addition of the special function
Enhancemen
keys having more complex
t of parts functions to the parts library of
library touch keys
Enhancemen
Addition of new figures to the
t of parts parts library of touch keys/lamps
library
Addition of the function which
allows setting to be made by
Device
direct input on the setting dialog
setting box of each object, without
using the [Device] dialog box
Addition of the connection target
CPU (QCPU) divides the
Changing the
conventional PLC type
PLC type of
"MELSEC-A, QnA" into two
project
different types of "MELSEC-A"
and "MELSEC-QnA, Q".
Grid display "Mesh" is added as a choice.
Travel "Mesh" is added as a choice.
Screen Addition of the function which
background sets a background color on a
color setting screen basis
Panelkit Addition of the function which
save/read allows a panelkit to be
function saved/read as a file
Monochrome Addition of the function which
printer output allows adjustment for output to
compatibility a monochrome printer
Addition of the function which
uploads the alarm history/alarm
Upload totalization/sampling function
data from the GOT and saves
them in a text file
Addition of the function which
batch-converts only the devices
Device batch- of the selected object
conversion Addition of the function which
changes the commonly set
devices

App - 30 App - 30
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

Edit and SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5

Setting Description of Function Added

26C
33K
Functions A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function which

allows selection of whether the
move and close keys are
Window displayed or hidden in overlap
screen windows 1, 2
changing Addition of the function which
can control the overlap window
screen display position using
the specified device value
CSV file- Addition of the function which
based reads a CSV file as a comment
comment and writes a comment as a CSV
file
read/write
Addition of the function which
leaves the previously saved
data as backup at the time of
project overwrite
Addition of the function which
can change the toolbar display
Operating position
R
environment Addition of Microsoft
R
Windows Millennium Edition
R
Operating System and Microsoft
R
Windows 2000 professional
Operating System to the operating
environment of GT Designer
Addition of the functions which
improve operability for figure
drawing/editing (shortcut keys,
right-click menu, mouse
operation)
Addition of the function which
defines the user settings as
predetermined values in figure
attribute setting
Addition of the function which
browses through a list display to
Improvement
choose a screen, comment, part
in drawing
or the like
setting/
Addition of the function which
operability shows the related setting item
(comment, print format,
communication, auxiliary
setting) setting screen from the
corresponding object setting
screen
Addition of the function which
selects/deselects all data copied
from the item list of another
project on the [Import From
Project] screen
Addition of new toolbars (Main/
Toolbars/
View/Figure • Object/Edit/Draw)
icons and icons
Addition of the communication
retry function which restarts
Communicati communication if a
on setting communication error occurs
during transfer of data to/from
the GOT

App - 31 App - 31
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

(5) Added GT Converter data to be converted

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Data to Be Converted

26C
33K
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Digital's package
"GP-PR0/PBIII for Windows 95
(Ver 2.0/Ver 2.1)" data
L tag conversion supported
T, E tag conversion supported
W tag, D script and LS area conversion
supported
Supports S tag conversion
PLC type: Memory link (SIO)/(Ethernet)
Addition of the conversion option function that
selects whether the base screen is converted
into the parts/window screen or not when
Digital package data is converted
Digital's package
"GP-PR0/PBIII for Windows (Ver 3.0)" data
Supports conversion of quality characters and
basic touch key/lamp figures of GOT800 series.

(6) GT Manager function added

SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5
Description of Function Added

26C
33K
A B C E F H J A C A C A F A D F J K P R U

Addition of the function which

performs cut/copy/paste on a
Project copy
project basis.
function
Enables backup onto multiple
FDs.

App - 32 App - 32
APPENDICES
MELSOFT

MEMO

App - 33 App - 33
INDEX

Ind
[A]
Additional function list................................App-15 Data list display function .................................5- 5
Alarm history display function ....................... 5-18 Debugging......................................................6-12
Alarm list display function.............................. 5-24 Debugging of screen data .............................6-12
Animation display function Dialog box ......................................................3-10
Lamp display function................................ 5-33 Display color...................................................4-29
Panelmeter display function ...................... 5-36 Display speed of object.............................. App- 6
Part display function .................................. 5-27 Download .......................................................6-11
Part movement display function................ 5-30 Download of screen data...............................6-11
Arc (ellipse arc).............................................. 4-27 Drawing sheet ........................................... App-10
Arithmetical operation by expression.......... 5-136 Drawing figures and attribute types...............4-27
ASCII display function .................................... 5- 8 Dropdown menu..............................................3- 6
ASCII input function....................................... 5-81 DXF file...........................................................4-27
Attributes........................................................ 4-29
[E]
[B] Extended function OS.....................................6- 4
Base screen.................................................... 4- 1
Barcode function ......................................... 5-107 [F]
Bar graph display function ............................ 5-51 Figures ...........................................................4-27
BMP file ......................................................... 4-27 Floating alarm function ..................................5-24

[C] [G]
CD-ROM drive................................................ 2- 1 Graph display function
Check box...................................................... 3-10 Bar graph display function .........................5-51
Circle (ellipse)................................................ 4-27 Level display function.................................5-63
Clock display function ................................... 5-11 Line graph display function ........................5-46
Command button........................................... 3-10 Statistical graph display function ...............5-57
Comment display function............................. 5-14 Trend graph display function .....................5-39
Constants of Help.......................................... 3-20 Scatter chart display function.....................5-63
CRT................................................................. 2- 1
[H]
[D] Hardcopy function........................................5-107
Data arithmetical operation ......................... 5-132 Hard disk space ..............................................2- 1
Data capacity How to use help .............................................3-17
Figure ......................................................... 4-33
Object function........................................... 4-37 [I]
PC card ...................................................... 4-42 Install
Data display function OS (personal computer GOT) ...................6-10
ASCII display function ................................ 5- 8 ROM_BIOS (personal computer GOT) ......6- 9
Clock display function................................ 5-11 Installation of OS............................................6-10
Data list display function............................. 5- 5 Installation of ROM_BIOS ..............................6- 9
Numerical display function ......................... 5- 2
Data input function
ASCII input function................................... 5-81
Numerical input function............................ 5-77

Index - 1 Index - 1
 [K] [P]
Keyboard ........................................................ 2- 1 Painting ..........................................................4-29
Ind Painting background ......................................4-29
[L] Painting color .................................................4-29
Lamp display function ................................... 5-33 Painting pattern..............................................4-29
Level display function.................................... 5-63 Panel meter display function .........................5-36
Line ................................................................ 4-27 Part display function.......................................5-27
Line freeform ................................................. 4-27 Part movement display function ....................5-30
Line graph display function ........................... 5-46 PC card ...........................................................2- 5
Line style........................................................ 4-29 PC communication driver ...............................6- 4
Line width....................................................... 4-29 Personal computer..........................................2- 1
List box .......................................................... 3-10 Polygon ..........................................................4-25
List of key codes.........................................App- 7 Printer
Logging report ............................................... 5-85 (for connection with personal computer)........2- 1

[M] [R]
Mask operation............................................... 5- 7 Radio button...................................................3-10
Memory........................................................... 2- 1 Recipe function ............................................5-100
Menu bar......................................................... 3- 2 Rectangle .......................................................4-27
Menu configuration......................................... 3- 6 Resolution .......................................................2- 1
Message display function Report function...............................................5-84
Alarm history display function ................... 5-18 Report figures.................................................4-27
Alarm list display function.......................... 5-24 Real-time report .............................................5-84
Comment display function......................... 5-14 Report screen.................................................4-10
Mouse ............................................................. 2- 1 RGB screen....................................................4-23
RGB window display function......................5-119
[N] ROM_BIOS .....................................................6- 5
Numerical display function ............................. 5- 2 RS-232C cable................................................2- 4
Numerical input function................................ 5-77

[O]
Object function list ......................................... 4-34
Observe status function ................................ 5-94
Offset function ............................................. 5-131
Operation environment................................... 2- 1
Operation for creating a report screen........... 6- 3
Operations for drawing figures....................... 6- 2
Operations for object setting .......................... 6- 2
Operations for use
of conventional model ................................App- 1
Operation panel function............................. 5-108
Operations to be set for the first time ............ 6- 1
Overlap
Figure and object....................................... 4-45
Objects....................................................... 4-45
Overlap window.............................................. 4- 4

Index - 2 Index - 2
[S] [V]
Sampling function........................................ 5-113 Video display function..................................5-118
Scale .............................................................. 4-27 Video window.................................................4-11
Scatter chart display function........................ 5-57
Screen configuration ...................................... 3- 1 [W]
Security function.......................................... 5-127 Window screen
Shift operation ............................................. 5-135 Display method ...........................................4- 3
Sound function............................................. 5-104 Movement method ......................................4- 3
Spin box......................................................... 3-10 Overlap window...........................................4- 4
Standard monitor OS ..................................... 6- 4 Setting range of screen size .......................4- 2
Station number switching function.............. 5-138 Superimpose window .................................4- 5
Statistical graph display function .................. 5-54
Status bar ....................................................... 3- 5
Superimpose window..................................... 4- 8
System configuration
System configuration of data transfer and
document creation ...................................... 2- 2
System configuration
of monitoring screen................................... 2- 1
System information function.......................... 5-91
System program ............................................. 6- 4

[T]
Tab................................................................. 3-10
Template
Panelkit ...................................................... 3-12
Parts........................................................... 3-12
Parts display area...................................... 3-12
Parts library................................................ 3-12
Pasting method of parts ............................ 3-14
Tree display area....................................... 3-13
Test function .................................................. 5-68
Text ................................................................ 4-27
Text box ......................................................... 3-10
Time action function .................................... 5-110
Title bar........................................................... 3- 2
Tool bar........................................................... 3- 3
Tool palette
Attribute setting list box ............................. 3-16
Cursor button ............................................. 3-15
Figure drawing button................................ 3-15
Object setting button.................................. 3-16
Touch key function ........................................ 5-66
Trend graph display function......................... 5-39

Index - 3 Index - 3
Microsoft Windows, Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries.
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries.
Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their
respective owners.
SPREAD
Copyright (C) 1998 Farpoint Technologies, Inc.
 R

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5

Reference Manual Reference Manual

MODEL SW5-GOTR-R-E GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual

MODEL 1DM187
CODE

SH(NA)-080117-M(0601)MEE

HEAD OFFICE : TOKYO BUILDING, 2-7-3 MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN
NAGOYA WORKS : 1-14 , YADA-MINAMI 5-CHOME , HIGASHI-KU, NAGOYA , JAPAN

When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the SW5D5C-GTWORKS-E
Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service transaction permission.
MELSOFT SW5D5C-GOTR-PACKE(V)
Specifications subject to change without notice. Integrated Software
MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal

MONO